Anda di halaman 1dari 198

Data WareHouse Interview Questions

Informatica Group URL for Real Time Problems: http://groups.yahoo.com/group/informaticadevelopment/


http://groups.yahoo.com/group/informaticadevelopment/

Kimbel Ralph URL's:-


http://www.dbmsmag.com/9612d05.html
http://www.dbmsmag.com/9701d05.html
STAR - SCHEMA :-
http://www.starlab.vub.ac.be/staff/robert/Information%20Systems/Halpin%203rd%20ed/Infosys
%20Ch1.pdf
ODS Design:-
http://www.compaq.nl/products/servers/alphaserver/pdf/SPD-ODS%20Service-V1.0.pdf
http://www.intelligententerprise.com/010613/warehouse1_1.shtml?database

1.Can 2 Fact Tables share same dimensions Tables? How many Dimension tables are associated with one Fact
Table ur project?
Ans: Yes

2.What is ROLAP, MOLAP, and DOLAP...?


Ans: ROLAP (Relational OLAP), MOLAP (Multidimensional OLAP), and DOLAP (Desktop OLAP). In these
three OLAP architectures, the interface to the analytic layer is typically the same; what is quite different is how
the data is physically stored.
In MOLAP, the premise is that online analytical processing is best implemented by storing the data
multidimensionally; that is, data must be stored multidimensionally in order to be viewed in a multidimensional
manner.
In ROLAP, architects believe to store the data in the relational model; for instance, OLAP capabilities
are best provided against the relational database.
DOLAP, is a variation that exists to provide portability for the OLAP user. It creates multidimensional
datasets that can be transferred from server to desktop, requiring only the DOLAP software to exist on the target
system. This provides significant advantages to portable computer users, such as salespeople who are frequently
on the road and do not have direct access to their office server.

3.What is an MDDB? and What is the difference between MDDBs and RDBMSs?
Ans: Multidimensional Database There are two primary technologies that are used for storing the data used in
OLAP applications.
These two technologies are multidimensional databases (MDDB) and relational databases (RDBMS). The
major difference between MDDBs and RDBMSs is in how they store data. Relational databases store their
data in a series of tables and columns. Multidimensional databases, on the other hand, store their data in a
large multidimensional arrays.
For example, in an MDDB world, you might refer to a sales figure as Sales with Date, Product, and
Location coordinates of 12-1-2001, Car, and south, respectively.

Advantages of MDDB:
Retrieval is very fast because
The data corresponding to any combination of dimension members can be retrieved with a single I/O.
Data is clustered compactly in a multidimensional array.
Values are caluculated ahead of time.
The index is small and can therefore usually reside completely in memory.
Storage is very efficient because
The blocks contain only data.
A single index locates the block corresponding to a combination of sparse dimension numbers.
4. What is MDB modeling and RDB Modeling?
Ans:

5. What is the difference btween OLTP & OLAP?


Ans: OLTP stand for Online Transaction Processing. This is standard, normalized database structure. OLTP is
designed for Transactions, which means that inserts, updates, and deletes must be fast. Imagine a call center that
takes orders. Call takers are continually taking calls and entering orders that may contain numerous items. Each
order and each item must be inserted into a database. Since the performance of database is critical, we want to
maximize the speed of inserts (and updates and deletes). To maximize performance, we typically try to hold
as few records in the database as possible.

OLAP stands for Online Analytical Processing. OLAP is a term that means many things to many people. Here,
we will use the term OLAP and Star Schema pretty much interchangeably. We will assume that star schema
database is an OLAP system.( This is not the same thing that Microsoft calls OLAP; they extend OLAP to
mean the cube structures built using their product, OLAP Services). Here, we will assume that any system of
read-only, historical, aggregated data is an OLAP system.

A data warehouse(or mart) is way of storing data for later retrieval. This retrieval is almost always used to
support decision-making in the organization. That is why many data warehouses are considered to be DSS
(Decision-Support Systems).

Both a data warehouse and a data mart are storage mechanisms for read-only, historical, aggregated data.By
read-only, we mean that the person looking at the data wont be changing it. If a user wants at the sales
yesterday for a certain product, they should not have the ability to change that number.

The historical part may just be a few minutes old, but usually it is at least a day old. A data warehouse
usually holds data that goes back a certain period in time, such as five years. In contrast, standard OLTP systems
usually only hold data as long as it is current or active. An order table, for example, may move orders to an
archive table once they have been completed, shipped, and received by the customer.

When we say that data warehouses and data marts hold aggregated data, we need to stress that there are many
levels of aggregation in a typical data warehouse.

9. Which db is RDBMS and which is MDDB can u name them?


Ans: MDDB ex. Oracle Express Server(OES), Essbase by Hyperion Software, Powerplay by Cognos and
RDBMS ex. Oracle , SQL Server etc.

10. What are the modules/tools in Business Objects? Explain theier purpose briefly?
Ans: BO Designer, Business Query for Excel, BO Reporter, Infoview,Explorer,WEBI, BO Publisher, and
Broadcast Agent, BO ZABO).
InfoView: IT portal entry into WebIntelligence & Business Objects.
Base module required for all options to view and refresh reports.
Reporter: Upgrade to create/modify reports on LAN or Web.
Explorer: Upgrade to perform OLAP processing on LAN or Web.
Designer: Creates semantic layer between user and database.
Supervisor: Administer and control access for group of users.
WebIntelligence: Integrated query, reporting, and OLAP analysis over the Web.
Broadcast Agent: Used to schedule, run, publish, push, and broadcast pre-built reports and spreadsheets,
including event notification and response capabilities, event filtering, and calendar based notification, over the
LAN, e-mail, pager,Fax, Personal Digital Assistant( PDA), Short Messaging Service(SMS), etc.
Set Analyzer - Applies set-based analysis to perform functions such as execlusion, intersections, unions,
and overlaps visually.
Developer Suite Build packaged, analytical, or customized apps.

11.What are the Ad hoc quries, Canned Quries/Reports? and How do u create them?(Plz check this page
C\:BObjects\Quries\Data Warehouse - About Queries.htm)
Ans: The data warehouse will contain two types of query. There will be fixed queries that are clearly defined
and well understood, such as regular reports, canned queries (standard reports) and common
aggregations. There will also be ad hoc queries that are unpredictable, both in quantity and frequency.

Ad Hoc Query: Ad hoc queries are the starting point for any analysis into a database. Any business analyst
wants to know what is inside the database. He then proceeds by calculating totals, averages, maximum and
minimum values for most attributes within the database. These are unpredictable element of a data warehouse.
It is exactly that ability to run any query when desired and expect a reasonable response that makes the data
warhouse worthwhile, and makes the design such a significant challenge.

The end-user access tools are capable of automatically generating the database query that answers any Question
posed by the user. The user will typically pose questions in terms that they are familier with (for example, sales
by store last week); this is converted into the database query by the access tool, which is aware of the structure
of information within the data warehouse.
Canned queries: Canned queries are predefined queries. In most instances, canned queries contain prompts that
allow you to customize the query for your specific needs. For example, a prompt may ask you for a School,
department, term, or section ID. In this instance you would enter the name of the School, department or term,
and the query will retrieve the specified data from the Warehouse.You can measure resource requirements of
these queries, and the results can be used for capacity palnning and for database design.
The main reason for using a canned query or report rather than creating your own is that your chances of
misinterpreting data or getting the wrong answer are reduced. You are assured of getting the right data and the
right answer.
12. How many Fact tables and how many dimension tables u did? Which table precedes what?
Ans: http://www.ciobriefings.com/whitepapers/StarSchema.asp

13. What is the difference between STAR SCHEMA & SNOW FLAKE SCHEMA?
Ans: http://www.ciobriefings.com/whitepapers/StarSchema.asp

14. Why did u choose STAR SCHEMA only? What are the benefits of STAR SCHEMA?
Ans: Because its denormalized structure , i.e., Dimension Tables are denormalized. Why to denormalize means
the first (and often only) answer is : speed. OLTP structure is designed for data inserts, updates, and
deletes, but not data retrieval. Therefore, we can often squeeze some speed out of it by denormalizing some of
the tables and having queries go against fewer tables. These queries are faster because they perform fewer joins
to retrieve the same recordset. Joins are also confusing to many End users. By denormalizing, we can present
the user with a view of the data that is far easier for them to understand.

Benefits of STAR SCHEMA:


Far fewer Tables.
Designed for analysis across time.
Simplifies joins.
Less database space.
Supports drilling in reports.
Flexibility to meet business and technical needs.
31(i). What the difference is between a database, a data warehouse and a data mart?
Ans: -- A database is an organized collection of information.
-- A data warehouse is a very large database with special sets of tools to extract and cleanse data from
operational systems
and to analyze data.
-- A data mart is a focused subset of a data warehouse that deals with a single area of data and is
organized for quick
analysis.

32. What is Data Mart, Data WareHouse and Decision Support System explain briefly?
Ans: Data Mart:
A data mart is a repository of data gathered from operational data and other sources that is designed to
serve a particular
community of knowledge workers. In scope, the data may derive from an enterprise-wide database or data
warehouse or be more specialized. The emphasis of a data mart is on meeting the specific demands of a
particular group of knowledge users in terms of analysis, content, presentation, and ease-of-use. Users of a
data mart can expect to have data presented in terms that are familiar.
In practice, the terms data mart and data warehouse each tend to imply the presence of the other in some
form. However, most writers using the term seem to agree that the design of a data mart tends to start
from an analysis of user needs and that a data warehouse tends to start from an analysis of what data
already exists and how it can be collected in such a way that the data can later be used. A data
warehouse is a central aggregation of data (which can be distributed physically); a data mart is a data
repository that may derive from a data warehouse or not and that emphasizes ease of access and usability for
a particular designed purpose. In general, a data warehouse tends to be a strategic but somewhat unfinished
concept; a data mart tends to be tactical and aimed at meeting an immediate need.

Data Warehouse:
A data warehouse is a central repository for all or significant parts of the data that an enterprise's various
business systems collect. The term was coined by W. H. Inmon. IBM sometimes uses the term
"information warehouse."
Typically, a data warehouse is housed on an enterprise mainframe server. Data from various online
transaction processing (OLTP) applications and other sources is selectively extracted and organized on the
data warehouse database for use by analytical applications and user queries. Data warehousing emphasizes
the capture of data from diverse sources for useful analysis and access, but does not generally start from the
point-of-view of the end user or knowledge worker who may need access to specialized, sometimes local
databases. The latter idea is known as the data mart.
data mining, Web mining, and a decision support system (DSS) are three kinds of applications that can
make use of a data warehouse.

Decision Support System:


A decision support system (DSS) is a computer program application that analyzes business data and presents
it so that users can make business decisions more easily. It is an "informational application" (in distinction
to an "operational application" that collects the data in the course of normal business operation).

Typical information that a decision support application might gather and present would be:
Comparative sales figures between one week and the next
Projected revenue figures based on new product sales assumptions
The consequences of different decision alternatives, given past experience in a context that is described
A decision support system may present information graphically and may include an expert system or
artificial intelligence (AI). It may be aimed at business executives or some other group of knowledge
workers.

33. What r the differences between Heterogeneous and Homogeneous?


Ans: Heterogeneous Homogeneous
Stored in different Schemas Common structure
Stored in different file or db types Same database type
Spread across in several countries Same data center
Different platform n H/W config. Same platform and H/Ware configuration.

34. How do you use DDL commands in PL/SQL block ex. Accept table name from user and drop it, if available
else display msg?
Ans: To invoke DDL commands in PL/SQL blocks we have to use Dynamic SQL, the Package used is
DBMS_SQL.

35. What r the steps to work with Dynamic SQL?


Ans: Open a Dynamic cursor, Parse SQL stmt, Bind i/p variables (if any), Execute SQL stmt of Dynamic
Cursor and
Close the Cursor.

36. Which package, procedure is used to find/check free space available for db objects like
table/procedures/views/synonymsetc?
Ans: The Package is DBMS_SPACE
The Procedure is UNUSED_SPACE
The Table is DBA_OBJECTS

Note: See the script to find free space @ c:\informatica\tbl_free_space

42. What u need concentrate after getting explain plan?


Ans: The 3 most significant columns in the plan table are named OPERATION,OPTIONS, and
OBJECT_NAME.For each step,
these tell u which operation is going to be performed and which object is the target of that operation.
Ex:-
**************************
TO USE EXPLAIN PLAN FOR A QRY...
**************************
SQL> EXPLAIN PLAN
2 SET STATEMENT_ID = 'PKAR02'
3 FOR
4 SELECT JOB,MAX(SAL)
5 FROM EMP
6 GROUP BY JOB
7 HAVING MAX(SAL) >= 5000;

Explained.

**************************
TO QUERY THE PLAN TABLE :-
**************************
SQL> SELECT RTRIM(ID)||' '||
2 LPAD(' ', 2*(LEVEL-1))||OPERATION
3 ||' '||OPTIONS
4 ||' '||OBJECT_NAME STEP_DESCRIPTION
5 FROM PLAN_TABLE
6 START WITH ID = 0 AND STATEMENT_ID = 'PKAR02'
7 CONNECT BY PRIOR ID = PARENT_ID
8 AND STATEMENT_ID = 'PKAR02'
9 ORDER BY ID;

STEP_DESCRIPTION
----------------------------------------------------
0 SELECT STATEMENT
1 FILTER
2 SORT GROUP BY
3 TABLE ACCESS FULL EMP

68. What is BI?


Ans: http://www.visionnet.com/bi/index.shtml

69. Benefits of BI?


Ans: http://www.visionnet.com/bi/bi-benefits.shtml

70. BI Faq
Ans: http://www.visionnet.com/bi/bi-faq.shtml

73. SQL * LOADER?


Ans: http://download-west.oracle.com/otndoc/oracle9i/901_doc/server.901/a90192/ch03.htm#1004678

Why is BusinessObjects telling me that my 'variables are not compatible?

A "combined block" that contains data from more than one data provider can only have objects that meet one
of the following criteria:
1. A dimension object that is linked
2. A detail object associated with a linked dimension object
3. Any measure object
4. Any additional dimension object (unlinked) from a single (one only) data provider
You may not include:

1. Unlinked dimensions from two (or more) data providers


2. Detail objects that are not associated with a valid dimension object that can be used
Note that measure objects are always allowed, but may or may not provide the proper value based on the
linked (or lack of of linked) dimensions.

Why don't my prompts come out in the order I want them to? Any workarounds?

Report prompts appear alphabetically. Try beginning your prompt text with 1, 2, 3, etc. to force them into logical order. Using a period to begin a prompt is a good,
virtually hidden method of forcing a particular prompt to the top of the list.

Explain "You are not authorized to use this document"

The most common reason for this is that the document was - at one point - exported to the repository. Then it
was deleted. At that point, it is a "secured" document (since it was exported) and yet there is no record of who
has access to it (since it's missing from the repository). Thus you, even as the owner, do not have the authority
to access the document. A General Supervisor can open the document and save it for all users to remove the
security information and allow access to anyone.

Another reason why this error can occur is if you totally delete your repository. This will cause this error even
if the document was never exported. If you have a document that was created while you were logged in, and
then you send it to someone that does not have a repository (and therefore cannot log in), they get the same
message.

What does "Some obsolete objects have been removed..." mean?

This message means that one or more of the objects used in your report are no longer available in the universe.
A Designer may have deleted them. Deleting objects is generally a bad idea. Hiding them removes them from
use in future reports but preserves them in current ones.

Another possible reason for this error is that a previously linked universe has now been 'included' instead.
Objects from the kernel universe will report this error. Evidently the inclusion process assigns new ids to
objects from the kernel universe. One way to work around this error is to provide both the original linked
version and an included version of the universe in the repository simultaneously. Users can then use the ...
button in the Data Manager to point the report to the included universe using class and object names rather
than ids.

There are a couple of ways to determine which objects are being removed from your query. Use the
DataProviderSql function to display the sql BEFORE accessing the query panel. Compare this sql to what is
written AFTER the message appears. Another method is to use the Data Manager to see a list of query objects.

Saving / Exporting to MS Excel

There are several ways to get Business Objects data into Excel. Which method works best probably depends on
what you want to do with it once you get it there!

Copy and paste a Table from Business Objects to Excel

This will allow you to take a Business Objects Table into Excel. This keeps the data as displayed (objects,
variables, filters, etc.) and will bring the data as it appears in Business Objects into Excel. It will not preserve
formatting or formulas from Business Objects.

1. From the Business Objects Edit Menu, select Copy All. This will paste your data to the clipboard.
Depending on how large your Business Objects Table is, this can take a while!
2. Open Excel.
3. To maintain text attributes in Excel (such as keeping leading zeros) select the columns that you want to be
treated as text. With the columns selected in Excel choose Format Cells Text.
4. From the Excel Edit Menu, select Paste Special.
5. Choose Text and click OK.
Export a Data Provider from Business Objects to Excel

This process will allow you to take the raw data from a Business Objects data provider and put it into Excel.

1. From the Business Objects Data Menu, select View Data. This will bring up the Data Manager window
where you can see the Data Providers for your report.
2. Click on the Data Provider you want to export.
3. Make sure the Results Tab is highlighted. There will be buttons on the bottom which include Options,
Refresh, Purge, and Export.
4. Click on Export.
5. The Export to External Format screen will appear. Make sure Export to Local File Format is highlighted.
6. Specify the name and path of the file where you want your data to be stored in Name. You can use the
Browse button to locate the path.
7. Specify the format of the file where you want your data to be stored in Format. On the pull down menu,
choose Microsoft Excel Files (*.xls).
8. If you choose the option Delete Spaces it will delete the spaces before and after the delimiters that separate
the columns of data

Converting Excel Content to Text

How can I link or "attach" report blocks so that they are positioned in relation to the each other?

This process will allow you to position the report blocks relative to other report blocks.

1. From the Business Objects Report screen, double-click on the edge of the block you want to position. This
will bring up the block format window where you can set Formats for tables in your report. Click on the
Appearances tab. Alternate method: click on the block, and select Format + Block (Table, Crosstab, or Chart
depending on the block type selected).
2. You will see the Position screen. Horizontal or vertical position allows you to set the table's position relative
to the margins, upper section, another table, or center across the page (called markers). The space between
the marker and the table is relative to the upper left corner of the selected table.
3. To move the table to the left and right, use the Horizontal Position Relative to option. To table up and
down, use the Vertical Position Relative to option.
4. You can enter a number (positive or negative) to set the horizontal space between the marker and the table.
You can also enter a number to set the vertical position between the marker and the table.
Why can't I see all of the data returned by the cube in my report?

There are a couple of reasons why you may not be seeing all the data in your cube within your report.

One possibility is that the data is being filtered. You can check to see whether any filters are excluding rows.

1. Click on the block so that it is highlighted.


2. From the Business Objects Format Menu, select Filters.
3. The Filters On dialog box displays the global and block-specific filters applied to the report.
4. If you have no filters applied, nothing will appear in the Folders. The global folder will display any filters
that have been applied to the all blocks. The block-specific folder is named based on the block name and will
display any filters that have been applied to that block.
5. The Values dialog box displays the values available for the variable. The highlighted values are those
included in the filter. Any that are not highlighted will be filtered out.
6. If you want to remove a filter, click on the filter and then click on Remove.

BusinessObjects, by default, shows only unique rows of data. If the values in your block would result in the
same row being displayed more than once it will only show that row once. However, you can force the block to
display duplicate rows.

1. Click on the block so that it is highlighted.


2. From the Business Objects Format Menu, select Format Table.
3. The Table Format dialog box will be displayed. Click on the General tab.
4. Under the Display box is the option "Avoid Duplicate Rows Aggregation". If you check this box, all rows will
be displayed without aggregating. (This option is not available for a crosstab).

How can I send a report from Business Objects to another Business Objects User?

1. Open Business Objects.


2. Open your report in Business Objects.
3. While you are in Business Objects, Click on File...Send To...Users. This will bring up a Send box.
4. Click on the To button under Send To. This will bring up a list of Business Objects users and groups. The
groups are presented first and then the individual users.
5. Click on the list.
6. If you type a "B" that will take you down the list to the first "b" which is the Bob group.
7. Using the scroll bar on the right side, you can move down the list of users. I am Bob.
8. Double click on "Bob" and that will add me to the Document Recipients.
9. Click "OK". This will take you back to the Send box.
10. Click "OK" on the Send box.
11. The computer will think for a second and then a box will pop up saying "Export was successful".
12. Click "OK".
13. You'll be back in Business Objects with your report. You can then close Business Objects

Why can't I create user defined objects (UDO's) for a particular universe? I can for other universes...

BusinessObjects keeps all of the user defined objects (UDO's) in a particular file. This file has the same name as
the short name for the universe, with the file type of UDO. For example, the short name (file name) for Island
Resorts Marketing is BEACH.UNV. There will be a file named BEACH.UDO that contains the UDO's for that
universe.

However, sometimes - generally when the first UDO is being created - BusinessObjects has a problem accessing
that file. If you check and see if there is a zero-byte file for your UDO's for that universe, you should delete it.
Once you've done that, you will generally be able to go back into BusinessObjects and create User Defined
Objects for that universe.
This never seems to be a problem except for the very first object. Once that first object has been created, you'll
never have a zero-byte file from that point forward.

How can I make a table from two data providers and only show data common to both?

Once they are linked, each object of linked data providers contains ALL of the values from BOTH queries. If
you want to isolate the display to show only records that are in both queries, you need to filter for non-null
values from some other non-linked value.

For example, assume you have measure M1 from query 1, and measure M2 from query 2. Measures work the
best, but detail object can be used also. You need to create a custom filter (not a pick list) using the following
steps.

1. Click on M1
2. Click on Format + Filters from the menu. Do NOT use the filter toolbar button.
3. Click on Add, and select M1
4. Click Define, and enter the following expression:
= Not (IsNull(<M1>))
Repeat for measure M2. Now you will only see rows that have entries from both queries.
What are the available methods and their associated advantages/disadvantages to get BO data/tables/graphs
into an Excel sheet ?

1. In BO: Edit-> CopyAll ; in Excel: Paste Special -> text


Advantage: retains sections, filters, groupings, formula/variable results
Disadvantage: Colours are lost, no export of graphs
2. In Bo Data -> View Data -> Results tab: Export -> File Format: MSExcel
Advantage: directly creates an excel file, exports whole datacube
Disadvantage: loses all formatting and calculations
3. In BO: Save As .txt ; In Excel: Open created .txt file;
Advantage: retains formatting (sections, filters, groupings) and formula/variable results.
Disadvantage: loses colours and graphs, two-step procedure, need to re-do for each report in the BO
document
4. In BO: Save As HTML; In Excel: Open created HTML file;
Advantage: only mehtod that retains all formatting and calculations incl. graphs, saves all reports in the
BO document in one step;
Disadvantage: two-step procedure; creates the HTML files in a sub-folder structure
5. In BO: click exactly on border of a table -> Copy; in Excel: Paste;
Outcome: pastes static image file of that particular table into Excel / Powerpoint etc.
6. In BO: Edit -> CopyAll; In Excel: Paste Special ->Picteue (Enhanced Metafile).
Outcome: Copies the whole report as picture into Excel / Powerpoint etc.
7. In BO: use the available BO_VBA methods DP.ConvertTo() or Report.ExportAs() - for Advanced Users
8. Use the 'Copy to DDE' option (Data-> View Data -> results Tab -> Export; in Excel: Paste Special ->
Paste Link)) to dynamicallyupdate the datacube results in Excel
9. Embed a BO report by calling it in Excel via Insert-> Object -> Create from File (Mark Option 'Link to
file'); Disadv.: not very reliable

GENERAL
Q. What is business objects?

BUSINESSOBJECTS is an integrated query, reporting and analysis solution for business professionals that allow them to access the data in their corporate
databases directly from their desktop and present and analyze this information in a BUSINESSOBJECTS document.
It is an OLAP tool that high-level management can use as a part of a Decision Support Systems (DSS).

BUSINESSOBJECTS makes it easy to access the data, because you work with it in business terms that are familiar to
you, not technical database terms like SQL.

1. What are the various Business Objects products? (AG technologies)


User Module, Designer, Supervisor, Auditor, Set Analyzer, Info View (Web Intelligence), Business Objects
Software Development Kit (SDK), Broadcast Agent etc.

2. What are the advantages of Business Objects over other DSS?


User Friendly.
Familiar Business Terms.
Graphical Interface
Drag and Drop.
Powerful reports in less time.
Enterprise wide Deployment of documents using WebI
Customized dashboards using Application foundation and Business Objects SDK.

How many modes are there in BO & Designer? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
There are 2 types: Enterprise Mode, Workgroup Mode.
3. What are Enterprise and Workgroup modes?
Designer lets you save universes in either enterprise or workgroup mode. Enterprise mode means that you are
working in an environment with a repository. Workgroup mode means that you are working without a
repository. The mode in which you save your universe determines whether other designers are able to access
them. By default, a universe is saved in the mode in which you are already working. For example, if you
launched a session in enterprise mode, any universe you save is automatically in that mode.

Q. How do you save a Business Objects document which can be accessed by all users in workgroup mode?

If we want to make a universe accessible to another designer working without a repository, then click the Save as
Workgroup check box in the Save as universe dialog box.

Q. What is online and offline mode?

4. What is a macro?
A macro is a series of commands and functions that are stored in a Visual Basic for Applications module and can
be run whenever you need to perform the task. If you perform a task repeatedly, you can automate the task
with a macro. You create macros using the Visual Basic Editor.

5. What is an add-in?
Add-ins are programs that add optional commands and features to BUSINESSOBJECTS. Add-ins are usually
created by those responsible in your company for adding customized features to B USINESSOBJECTS. All you
probably need to do is install and uninstall add-ins that are sent to you.

DESIGNER

6. What is a universe? (AG Technologies)


Universe provides a semantic layer between you and the database. It consists of classes and objects named in
business terms. It is basically a mapping of table and the columns in the database to classes and objects
respectively in the query panel.
Alternatively, It is logical mapping of data in business terms.

In the BusinessObjects User module, universes enable end users to build queries from which they can generate
and perform analysis. Universes isolate end users from the complexities of the database structure as well as
the intricacies of SQL syntax.

Q. Can a Universe connect to multiple databases? (AG Technologies)


No. Universe will connect to only one database.
How do you define universe parameters?
The first step in creating a universe is to specify its parameters. These parameters include the definition of a
universe, which is comprised of: the universe name, a description of the universe, a connection to an RDBMS.
You enter universe parameters from the Universe Parameters dialog box. This dialog box also lets you set up
database options, external strategies, graphic options, and print settings.

What is a database connection?


A connection is a set of parameters that provides access to an RDBMS. These parameters include system
information such as the data account, user identification, and the path to the database. Designer provides
three types of connections: secured, shared, and personal.

7. What are the types of connections we use when connecting to the database? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
There are three types of connections namely: - Secured, Shared and Personal.

A secured connection is used to centralize and control access to sensitive or critical data. It is the safest type
of connection for protecting access to data.

A shared connection is used to access common resources such as universes or documents. Several users can
thus use it.

A personal connection is specific to one user and can be used only from the computer on which it was created.

24. What is Designer?


Designer is a BusinessObjects IS module used by universe designers to create and maintain universes. Universes
are the semantic layer that isolates end users from the technical issues of the database structure. Universe
designers can distribute universes to end users by moving them as files through the file system, or by exporting
them to the repository.

25. How do you design a universe?


The design method consists of two major phases.
During the first phase, you create the underlying database structure of your universe. This structure includes
the tables and columns of a database and the joins by which they are linked. You may need to resolve loops
which occur in the joins using aliases or contexts. You can conclude this phase by testing the integrity of the
overall structure.
During the second phase, you can proceed to enhance the components of your universe. You can also prepare
certain objects for multidimensional analysis. As with the first phase, you should test the integrity of your
universe structure. Finally, you can distribute your universes to users by exporting them to the repository or via
your file system.

26. What are the components of the Designer interface?


In Designer, you create a universe using three areas: the Universe pane, the Structure pane, the Table Browser.
The Universe pane displays the components of the universe from the point of view of BusinessObjects; that is
the classes, objects, and conditions. The Structure pane reflects the underlying database structure of the
universe including the tables, columns, and joins. The Table Browser is the component that lets you create the
classes and objects of the universe from the tables and columns of a database.

8. What are classes/objects?


An object maps to data or a derivation of data in the database. For the purposes of multidimensional analysis,
an object can be qualified as one of three types: a dimension, detail, or measure.

A class is a collection of objects based on business categories.

A universe is a set of classes and objects intended for a specific application or group of users.

27. What are classes?


A class is a logical grouping of objects within a universe. In general, the name of a class reflects a business concept that
conveys the category or type of objects. For example, in a universe pertaining to human resources, one class might be
Employees. A class can be further divided into subclasses. In the human resources universe, a subclass of the Employees
class could be Personal Information. As designer, you are free to define hierarchies of classes and subclasses in a model that
best reflects the business concepts of your organization.

28. What are objects?


An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a derivation of data in the database.
Using objects, end users can build queries to generate reports. The name of an object suggests a concept
drawn from the terminology of a business or discipline. For a human resources manager, objects might be
Employee Name, Address, Salary, or Bonus, while for a financial analyst, objects might be Profit Margin, Return
on Investment, etc. For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of three types:
dimension, detail, or measure.

9. What are Dimension-Measure-Detail Objects?

When creating universes, universe designers define and qualify objects. The qualification of an object reveals
how it can be used in analysis in reports. An object can be qualified as a dimension, a detail, or a measure.

A dimension object is the object being tracked; in other words, it can be considered the focus of the analysis. A
dimension can be an object such as Service, Price, or Customer.
Dimension objects retrieve the data that will provide the basis for analysis in a report. Dimension objects
typically retrieve character-type data (customer names, resort names, etc.), or dates (years, quarters,
reservation dates, etc.)

A detail object provides descriptive data about a dimension object (or attribute of a dimension). It is always
associated with a specific dimension object. However, a detail object cannot be used in drill down analysis.
E.g. Address & phone number can be attributes about the customer dimension.

A measure object is derived from one of the following aggregate functions:


Count, Sum, Minimum, Maximum or average or is a numeric data item on which you can apply, at least locally,
one of those functions. This type of object provides statistical information. Examples of measure objects
include the following:
Revenue, unit price etc

10. What is a hierarchy?


Groups of related dimension objects are referred to as dimension hierarchies. An example of a dimension
hierarchy is Geography, which can consist of City, Region, and Country.(Hierarchy is an ordered series of related
dimensions, which can be used, in multidimensional analysis) Good examples of hierarchy are geography and
time

Countr Year
y
Region Quarte
r
City Month

How to create hierarchies in BO? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)


A hierarchy, which the designer sets up when creating the universe, consists of dimension objects ranked from less detailed
to more detailed. The objects that belong to hierarchies are the ones you can use to define scope of analysis.
Creating hierarchies
You can create your own custom hierarchies from any dimensions available in
the report. The dimensions you include in a hierarchy can be local variables,
derived variables, or dimensions returned by data providers.
Note: You can also use a date-type user object as the basis for a time hierarchy.
For information on user objects see Creating User Objects on page 78.
To create a custom hierarchy
1. Click the Hierarchies command on the Analysis menu.
The Hierarchy Editor opens.
2. In the Hierarchy Editor, click New.
3. Type the name of the new hierarchy, then click outside the name box.
4. In the Available Dimensions box, click the first dimension for the new
hierarchy, then click Add.
The dimension you clicked appears in the new hierarchy's folder in the
Available Hierarchies box.
5. Add the other dimensions you want to include and then click OK.
11. Can a Universe have more than 1 fact Table?
Yes. Typically a universe can have more than 1 fact table and numerous aggregated tables.

12. What are Contexts? (MBT)


A context is a rule that determines which of two paths can be chosen when more than one path is possible in
the database from one table to another. It helps in resolving the loops created by various joins in the universe
tables.

With certain database structures, you may need to use contexts rather than aliases to resolve loops. A situation
where this commonly occurs is a transactional database with multiple fact tables (multiple stars) that share
lookup tables.

13. What is Aggregate Awareness? (ITC)


Aggregate awareness is a feature of DESIGNER that makes use of aggregate tables in a database. These are
tables that contain pre-calculated data. The purpose of these tables is to enhance the performance of SQL
transactions; they are thus used to speed up the execution of queries.

Of course, the reliability of the technique depends on the accuracy of the aggregate tables. In fact, they must be refreshed at
the same time as all fact tables. A universe that is aggregate aware has one or more aggregate objects with alternative
definitions based on these tables. These definitions correspond to levels of aggregation. For example, a Profit object can be
aggregated by month, by
quarter, or by year. Queries built from such a universe return information aggregated to the
appropriate level at optimal speed.

Aggregate awareness is a feature that makes use of predefined aggregate tables to enhance the performance
of SQL transactions. It is used to improve the speed by which aggregates are calculated in the database.
To set up aggregate awareness in a universe, you define one or more objects using the @Aggregate_Aware
function. The syntax for this function is as follows:
@Aggregate_Aware(aggregate_table_1, ... aggregate_table_n)
The arguments of this function are all the names of alternative aggregate tables. When you formulate the
syntax, you should be aware of the order of the arguments. The precedence is from left to right; this means
that BusinessObjects determines the aggregate to use beginning from the leftmost argument. As a general rule,
you should enter the most aggregate table as the first argument, the next most aggregate table as the second
argument, and so on. You must then use the Aggregate Navigation editor to set up a list of incompatible objects
and/or incompatible conditions for each aggregate table in your universe. These are the components that
cannot be used with an aggregate table. You can either set up these lists manually, or cause the list of objects
to be detected by Designer.

14. What is Incompatibility?


The set of incompatible objects you specify determines which aggregate tables are disregarded during the
generation of SQL. With respect to an aggregate table, an object is either compatible or incompatible. The
rules for compatibility are as follows:

When an object is at the same or higher level of aggregation as the table, it is compatible with the table.

When an object is at a lower level of aggregation than the table (or if it is not at all related to the table), it is
incompatible with the table.

15. What is the typical strategy employed in developing/maintaining/distributing Universes?


Phase 1: Break down the informational system into functional areas.
Phase 2: Analyze the information needs of users.
Phase 3: Design a conceptual schema
Design the specification of the user.
Phase 4: Create a Universe with designer.
Test the Universe with the Business Objects module.
Distribute the Universe.
Repeat the other steps for other Universes.
Phase 5: Update and maintain the Universe.
Notify end users of changes.
16. I have Customer dimension table and a fact table with cust_to_ship_key and cust_to_bill_key. How do I get the
corresponding customer names?
Create an Alias table for Customer dimension table. Join the cust_to_ship_key with a customer key of Actual
customer table and join the cust_to_bill_key with customer key of the Alias.

17. What are strategies?


A strategy is a script that automatically extracts structural information from a database or flat file.

Q. What are the different types of Strategies? (ITC)

In Designer we can specify two types of strategies:


1) Built-in strategies and
2) External strategies

Built-in Strategies: Designer provides a number of default strategies which we can use. These are strategies
for extracting joins, detecting cardinalities, and creating default classes and objects. Options for indicating
default strategies are located in the Database tab of the Options dialog box.

External Strategies: We can also create our own strategies. Such strategies are referred to as external
strategies. With an external strategy, we can specify the exact way that objects and joins are to be extracted
from the database structure. The strategy we use, for example, can be a script generated from a CASE Access
tool. An external strategy is specific to one RDBMS.

How do you specify external strategies?


With an external strategy, you can specify the exact way that objects and joins are to be extracted from the database structure. All external strategies are
contained within the same text file. The name of this text file is indicated in the .prm file specific to your RDBMS. In the .prm file, the strategy file is
declared as follows: STG=[StrategyFileName] where StrategyFileName is the name of the strategy file.
An external strategy, whether for objects or for joins, is made up of the following sections:
a name and description (These are visible in the Strategies tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box.)
a type parameter: object or join
an SQL parameter or file parameter
an optional parameter that points to a connection other than the universe connection.
An external strategy can be based on SQL or a file.
What are the visualization options available?
Designer contains a variety of features for organizing and viewing the tables and columns in the
Structure pane. Among these features are: List Mode, which adds three panes to the Structure pane.
These panes are for viewing the names of tables, joins, and contexts. When you click a component in a
pane, its corresponding graphical representation in the schema is highlighted. Graphic options, which let
you customize the shape or appearance of the tables, columns, joins, and cardinalities in the Structure
pane.
Arrange tables, a feature that reorganizes the tables in the Structure pane so as to produce an orderly
display. Gridlines, a command that displays a grid, which you can use to align tables in the Structure
pane.
Table (Column) Values, commands that display the data values associated with a particular table or
column.

18. What are loops? (MBT, KPIT Infotech, Pune)


loop is a situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another. Loops result in ambiguity
in the design of a universe

How do you detect loops ?


Designer enables you to identify loops in one of two ways: You can run the Check Integrity function, which
indicates the existence of any loops. You can select the Detect Loops command from the Tools menu. If there are
loops, the Loop Detection viewer appears; it indicates the joins causing a loop.

What are aliases?


An alias is a logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to resolve loops in the paths of
joins. In some cases, more than one alias may be necessary for a given table. As you create aliases, Designer
may prompt you to create other aliases. This occurs when the new aliases result in the need for additional aliases;
in other words, creating such aliases entails the propagation of other aliases. In such a situation, two options are
available to you:
You can cause only the first table proposed to be aliased
You can alias all the tables listed (i.e. propagate the aliases)
Designer displays an alias in the Structure pane as a table. It links an aliased table to existing tables, re-arranging
joins, as necessary.

How do you resolve the loop? (MBT, KPIT Infotech, Pune)


You can resolve loops in two ways:
Using aliases
Using contexts
DESIGNER provides three features, which guide you in the loop resolution process:
Detect Cardinalities
Detect Aliases
Detect Contexts
The first step in resolving loops is to detect the cardinalities of the tables.

19. How can you resolve loops?


You can run the Check Integrity function, which indicates the existence of any loops.
You can select the Detect Loops command from the Tools menu. If there are loops, the Loop Detection viewer
appears; it indicates the joins causing a loop.
You can then use aliases or contexts to resolve the loops in your universe.

Can Contexts And Aliases Be Used Together?


Yes, you can use contexts and aliases in the same universe. In fact, in many cases you should use them together.

When To Use Contexts Instead Of Aliases


There is no strict rule to follow for resolving loops. However, whenever possible you should use an alias instead of a
context. When you use a context, you expose the BUSINESSOBJECTS end user to the database structure. They are
forced to decide which context they want to use to run their query. The role of the universe is to shield end users from
the database structure, so they do not have to make such decisions.

Contexts can be confusing for end users


A context can be confusing for end users when they are forced to make a decision about the meaning of an object. For
example an object called Country can have several meanings; the customers country of residence, the shipment
destination, or the products country of manufacture. When you run a query in BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE,
you are also asked to indicate the correct database path to follow.

Deciding to use an alias or context


You can use the following rules to help you decide whether an alias or context is appropriate for resolving loops: When
you create aliases and you end up with object names that sound very different (Customers Country of Residence,
Shipment Destination, and Products Country of Manufacture), aliases are probably the right solution.
If you end up with object names that sound very similar (such as Ordered Products and Loaned Products as well as
Ordered Products Country of Manufacture and Loaned Products Country of Manufacture), you should consider using
contexts.

Q. When do you use contexts and aliases? (ITC)

Contexts and Aliases are used while resolving loops.

Q. What are the disadvantages of Alias? (PCS)

Q. What is Fan Trap? (PCS)


A one to many join links a table, which is in turn linked by a one to many join. This type of fanning out of one to many joins
can lead to a join path problem called a fan trap.
The fanning out effect of one to many joins can cause incorrect results to be returned when a query includes objects
based on both tables.

20. What is Chasm Trap?


Many to one joins from two fact tables converge on a single lookup table. This type of join convergence can lead to a join
path problem called a chasm trap.
21. What is LoV?
A list of values contains the data values associated with an object. These data values can originate from a
corporate database, or a flat file such as a text file or Excel file. In Designer you create a list of values by
running a query from the Query Panel. You can then view, edit, purge, refresh, and even export this file. A list
of values is stored as an .lov file in a subfolder of the UserDocs folder.

29. How many types of join are available? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Designer supports the following types of joins: equi-joins, outer joins, theta joins, and shortcut joins.

What is theta join? (KPIT Infotech, Pune)


A join is a relational operation that causes two or more tables with a common domain to be combined into a single table. The
purpose of joins is to restrict the result set of a query run against multiple tables.

A Theta join links tables based on a relationship other than equality between two columns.

Q. What are Equi-joins, Outer joins and Short cut joins?

30. What functions are supported?


Designer provides four types of functions: Number, Character, Date and @Functions. Functions beginning with the @
character are BusinessObject functions that render the definition of objects dynamic and database-independent.

@Function Purpose
@Aggregate_Aware is used to enhance the performance of SQL transactions; i.e. it determines which
tables to use in SQL generation: either aggregate tables or detailed tables.
@Prompt is used to create an interactive object. In the Query Panel, this type of object
causes a message to appear that prompts the end user to enter a specific value.
@Script is used to recover the results of an executed macro created with the Visual Basic
Editor in the BusinessObjects User module.
@Select lets you re-use the Select statement of an existing object
@Variable is used to reference the value assigned to a name or variable.
@Where lets you re-use the Where clause of an existing object.

What is meant by object qualification?


The qualification of an object reveals how it can be used in multidimensional analysis. An object can be
qualified as a dimension, a detail, or a measure. In the Universe pane, the symbol beside each object indicates
its qualification.

What is multidimensional analysis?


Multidimensional analysis is a technique for manipulating data in order to view it from different perspectives
and on different levels of detail. In Business Objects, multidimensional analysis involves drill mode and slice-
and-dice mode, and is enabled by the Analyzer and Explorer components of the User module. To set up a
universe for multidimensional analysis, you must define hierarchies and dimensions that determine how users
view and analyze the data. A dimension is simply the object to be tracked. A dimension can be an object such
as Country, Region, and City. A hierarchy is an ordered series of related dimensions. An example of a hierarchy
is Geography, which may group dimensions such as Country, Region, and City.

31. What are cardinalities? (ITC)


Cardinality expresses the minimum and maximum number of instances of an entity B that can be associated
with an instance of an entity A. The minimum and the maximum number of instances can be equal to 0, 1, or
N.

Because a join represents a bi-directional relationship, it must always have two cardinalities.

There are two main methods for detecting or editing cardinalities:


the Detect Cardinalities command
the Edit Join dialog box

If you selected the Detect cardinalities in joins options in the Database tab of the Options dialog box, Designer
detects and retrieves the cardinalities of the joins. If you do not use this option, you can still retrieve the
cardinalities for one or all joins in the universe.

32. How do you test the integrity of a universe?


With the Check Integrity command, you can test the structure of your active universe. This means testing to
determine whether its components are accurate and up-to-date.
Check Integrity serves the following purposes:
It detects any inconsistencies in the objects, joins, conditions, and cardinalities of your universe.
It detects whether there are any loops in the joins.
It determines whether changes were made to the database to which the universe is connected.

33. How do you distribute universes?


You can distribute a universe to end users or another designer by:
Moving it as a file through the file server
Exporting it to the repository
If you distribute a universe as a file through the file server, any designer or end user can open it unless you
have set a password on it. The repository is a centralized set of relational data structures stored on a database.
This device enables BusinessObjects users to share resources in a controlled and secured environment. The
repository is made up of three domains: the security domain, the universe domain, and the document domain.
The Import and Export commands of Designer let you move universes to and from the universe domain of the
repository.

34. What are linked universes? (Designers Guide, 246) (Mascot, MBT, KPIT Infotech Pune)
Linked universes are universes that share common components such as parameters, classes, objects, or joins.
Among linked universes, one universe is said to be the kernel or master universe while the others are the
derived universes.
A kernel or master universe represents a re-usable library of components. Derived universes may contain some
or all the components of the kernel or master universe, in addition to any components that have been added to
it.
Approaches to linking universes
You can use one of three approaches when linking universes:
The kernel approach
The master approach
The component approach

The Benefits of Linked Universes


You can link the active universe to a kernel universe, only if the following requirements are met:
The kernel universe and active universe were created from the same data account and the same RDBMS.
The kernel universe was exported and re-imported at least once.
Exported derived universes are located in the same universe domain as the kernel universe.
All classes and objects are unique in both the kernel universe and the derived universes. (Otherwise, collisions
may occur.)
You are authorized to link the given universe.
Note: A derived universe does not recover the lists of values containing personal data from the kernel universe.
However, if you need certain lists of values, you can use the following workaround: in the derived universe,
create new objects defined in the same way as those in the kernel, then hide them. You can then assign them
to these objects lists of values, which you can then modify and export.

Q. How many types of Linked universes are there, and what are they? (ITC)
Answered above

SUPERVISOR

35. What are the types of users in Business Objects?


General Supervisor
Supervisor
Designer
Supervisor-Designer
End User
Versatile User

36. What is the Supervisor module used for?


SUPERVISOR is the product you need in order to set up and maintain a secure environment for Business Objects products. It
provides you with a powerful and easy-to-use structure for distributing information to be shared by all users. This
information is centralized through relational data accounts called repositories.
37. What is a repository? What does it contain? (AG Technologies)
It is a relational data account created on a database like Oracle, MS-Access, Informix, DB2 etc when the BO is
installed. It will have all the BO system tables, metadata about designer, Information about universes, the
actual universes, user documents and most importantly security information.

38. What are repository domains? (AG Technologies)


A Business Objects repository is a set of data structures stored on a database. A repository makes it possible to
share the resources necessary for client/server architecture. To ensure security and manage user resources, a
repository comprises three types of domains:

A security domain, which contain the definition of the other domains as well as the definition of users

Universe domains, which are meta-models of related databases, containing a description of the data to be
accessed

Document domains, which contain the structures for storing shared documents and for executing tasks
according to a time stamped definition.

39. What are the responsibilities of a Supervisor?


Create the Business Objects repository.

Define users and user groups, as well as assign profiles to them. User profiles include user identification (user
name and password), the products and modules they can work with, the universes they can access, and the
documents that they can share.
Control user access to Business Objects products, and manage the exchange and distribution of the universe
and documents of all the users.

USER MODULE

40. What is a Data Provider?


The data source (Query) is called as the data provider.

41. Can one create a report having two Data Provider each pointing to different Universes?
Yes.

42. Can I add some html tags in the report?


Yes. In the format/properties one has to set the option read as html.

43. Can I drill through from one report to another?


Yes. Using some html coding in the parameters to be passed while drill through one can drill thru from one BO
report to another in the same BO document.

44. Can I have cascading prompts in Business Objects report?


Yes.

45. Did you do metadata reporting in BO?


Metadata reporting of BO is possible. BO provides a separate universe which actually contains repository tables, objects
etc. Using this Universe one can do metadata reporting in BO

46. What is Channel?


It is a Website that uses push technology, also known as web casting, to keep subscribers abreast of up-to-date
information.
Each BO channel is associated with a BROADCAST AGENT, itself associated with a user group in the BO repository.
One BROADCAST AGENT can have several channels.
47. How do Channels work?
General supervisors and supervisors can create, modify and remove channels using SUPERVISOR.
Each channel uses a Channel Definition Format (CDF) file as an index to the Website.
The first time a document is published in the channel, the CDF file is created based on the template. It is then
updated every time a new document is published in the channel.
BO users can schedule a document to be published in one or more channels by a BROADCAST AGENT.
They can only publish in channels associated with the BROADCAST AGENT of groups to which they belong.
When BROADCAST AGENT publishes a BO document in a channel, it converts the document to HTML format and
simultaneously updates the channels CDF file so channel subscribers via IE4 can view the document.
SCHEDULING/PUBLISHING RELATED

48. How do you publish BO report?

There are 2 ways of publishing BO reports on website


1) User who has publishing rights for a document can publish that document for other users.
2) Documents can be published via a scheduler for Business Object known as BCA or Broadcast Agent.

49. What is BCA?


BROADCAST AGENT provides scheduled or batch processing of BUSINESSOBJECTS and WEBINTELLIGENCE
documents. All the end user has to do is send a document to BROADCAST AGENT using BUSINESSOBJECTS or
WEBINTELLIGENCE, and specify scheduling and distribution information. No understanding of the server
configuration is required.
BROADCAST AGENT lets users not only automate simple actions such as refreshing and printing documents, but
control processing with conditions which trigger distribution when pre-defined events occur.
Users can choose to publish documents to the repository, on a web server or on the server file system. Users
with access to the repository can view documents that BROADCAST AGENT has processed in BUSINESSOBJECTS
or WEBINTELLIGENCE. BROADCAST AGENT supports HTML publishing on the web, on channels and on your
intranet or extranet.

50. What is WebI or Web Intelligence?


WebIntelligence is a decision support solution designed to meet critical query, reporting and analysis needs
over the World Wide Web and has features very similar to Business Objects.

Like Business Objects, with WebIntelligence, you can access the data in your corporate databases or data
warehouses from within your office, home, or around the world, using your corporate intranet, extranet, or the
World Wide Web.
How do you share the information?
You can quickly and easily share the documents you have created with other users in your company, either by sending them directly to
selected individuals or groups, or by publishing them as corporate documents. When you distribute documents in these different ways,
you use the BUSINESSOBJECTS repository. The repository stores the documents you send so that other users can retrieve and view
them. It also stores information about the documents it stores, such as name of sender, date and time, and also which users in the
company have the right to retrieve and view a document.

What about security?


The repository is set up and administered by the BUSINESSOBJECTS supervisor. All of the rights you have as a user are granted by your
BUSINESSOBJECTS supervisor using BUSINESSOBJECTS SUPERVISOR. The supervisor defines:
The parts of the BUSINESSOBJECTS interface you can access. Your supervisor can restrict the availability of BUSINESSOBJECTS
functionality, such as access to certain menu commands.
Your database connections
The universes you can access for creating and editing queries

Q. What are the different tools in Business Objects 5.1? (AG technologies)
Whats new in BusinessObjects 5.1?
Although not a major release over BUSINESSOBJECTS 5.0, BUSINESSOBJECTS 5.1 has some important new features.

Save as PDF
Add hyperlinks to reports
Zero Administration BusinessObjects

BUSINESSOBJECTS 5.1 can be installed in two ways:


from INFOVIEW via an Internet browser
from the product CD

Q. Explain the Reporting features in Business Objects reporting tool? (AG Technologies)

What data sources are available?


BUSINESSOBJECTS let you access data from a wide range of sources. You can access data from
Relational databases (RDBMS), such as ORACLE, Microsoft SQL Server, Informix and IBM DB2.
Multidimensional (OLAP) databases, such as Microsoft OLAP Services, Hyperion Essbase, and
ORACLE Express.
Text files and spreadsheets
Packaged applications such as SAP
Virtually any data source using Microsoft Visual Basic for Applications (VBA) procedures.
How do you access data sources?
BUSINESSOBJECTS lets you access your data through a graphical user interface. You need no technical knowledge of the underlying
data structures to get the information you want. What you do need, however, is knowledge of your business.
To access a data source with BUSINESSOBJECTS, you build a data provider. The types of data providers supported in
BUSINESSOBJECTS depends on whether you install BUSINESSOBJECTS from the installation CD or install BUSINESSOBJECTS via an
Internet browser.

Which are the different types of data providers?


Queries on Universes
Stored Procedures
Free-hand SQL
Personal Data files
VBA Procedures
OLAP Servers
SAP
Can all BusinessObjects users build data providers?
You can build data providers only if you have purchased the REPORTER module of BUSINESSOBJECTS.
Can you combine data from different sources in one report?
Absolutely. With BUSINESSOBJECTS, you can build powerful reports with data from corporate databases which you can access using
queries on universes, freehand SQL, etc., and data from your own spreadsheets, text files etc.
Which data providers can you combine in one report?
You can combine data from any BUSINESSOBJECTS-supported data provider with data from any other BUSINESSOBJECTS-supported
data provider in a single report. For example, in a report that displays data from a query on a universe, you can build a new query on a
different universe. You can also use a different type of data provider: a stored procedure, a free-hand SQL script, a personal data file,
or an OLAP server.
Linking Data Providers
Linking data providers enables data from different sources to be computed in the same table, crosstab, or chart in a report.
What situations require you to link data providers?
BUSINESSOBJECTS automatically links data providers with a common dimension. Two dimensions in separate data providers are
common when they belong to the same universe and have the same name. BUSINESSOBJECTS prompts you to link data providers if
there is no common dimension between the data providers.
Tip: If you simply want to add columns of data to a report, use the Edit Data Provider command on the Data menu instead of building
a new query. This method lets you add result objects to the initial query; BUSINESSOBJECTS automatically inserts the new columns of
data in the report or creates a new report.
Purging and Deleting Data Providers
Whats the difference between purging and deleting a data provider? Purging means emptying a data provider of its results, whereas
deleting means getting rid of the data provider for good - an action which cannot be undone. So, why purge or delete a data provider?
Purging reduces the size of a document,
so is useful when you want to send the document to other users, or save it on a diskette, for example. You should only delete a data
provider, however, if you are certain that you and other users no longer need it.
Tip: You can populate a purged data provider by selecting the Refresh Data command on the Data menu. Note that this command
refreshes all the data providers in the active document.
Building a More Powerful Query
The procedures described in the following sections enable you to build a more powerful query by controlling the data that your queries
retrieve. You can:
Define scope of analysis, which means that you retrieve data that you will later use for analysis in the report.
Limit the query results to data that satisfies conditions.
Sort data, for example alphabetically.
Retrieve a specified number of rows of data.
Eliminate duplicate rows of data from the query result.
What is scope of analysis? (BO Users guide,65) (Mascot, KPIT Infotech, Pune)
Analysis means looking at data from different viewpoints and on different levels of detail. In reports, you can use scope of analysis to
ensure that the data included in your report can be displayed at the appropriate level of detail for your analysis. Setting a scope of
analysis allows you to work in drill mode, which enables you to display data in progressively greater detail. Scope of analysis means
a subset of data, returned by a query, that you will use for analysis in your report. The data for your scope of analysis does not appear
in
the report until you decide that you want to use it in analysis. The scope of analysis you can define depends on hierarchies in the
universe. A hierarchy, which the designer sets up when creating the universe, consists of dimension objects ranked from less detailed
to more detailed. The objects that belong to hierarchies are the ones you can use to define scope of analysis.
Applying conditions
A condition is a way of limiting the data that a query returns.
Predefined conditions When universe designers build universes, they can create predefined conditions for
you to use. For example, the Island Resort Marketing universe contains predefined
conditions such as Year 98, which lets you obtain reservations for 1998 only. You can
apply one or more predefined conditions when you build a query. However, you can
neither delete predefined conditions from a universe, nor can you edit their definition.
Simple Conditions Enable you to limit data returned by a result object. For example, you can
find out about certain customers by applying a simple condition on the
Customer object, then selecting the customer names that appear in a dialog
box.
Complex Conditions Enable you to limit the query results by any object in the Universe.
Running a Query on a Different Universe
BUSINESSOBJECTS allows you to run a query on one universe and then run the same query on a different universe. By doing this, you
can test your query on a pilot universe before applying it to your real data.
1. Open the report containing the query.
2. From the Data menu, choose View Data. The Data Manager dialog box opens.
3. Choose the query you want to use in the Data Providers list, then click the Definition tab.
4. Click the button to the right of the current universe name.
5. In the dialog box that appears, select the universe you want to use, then click OK.
6. Click the Results tab, then Refresh.
7. Click OK to close the Data Manager.

Q. What are user objects?


A universe consists primarily of classes and objects, created by the universe designer. If the objects in a universe do not meet your
needs, you can customize the universe by creating your own objects, which are called user objects.

Why create a user object?


Based on one or more existing objects, user objects enable you to:
Make calculations at the database level.
Apply functions to text, for example to capitalize data.
Group data.

What does a user object consist of?


A user object has a name, a type (character, date or numeric), a qualification (dimension, measure or detail) and a formula. The
formula contains a combination of functions, objects, user objects, operators, and text.
User objects are end-user personal objects that are not shared with other end users.
What are the restrictions on user objects?
You can work only with the user objects that you create yourself, and you cannot move user objects from the User Objects class. Also,
user objects are available only in the universe in which they were created.
User objects are not shared. Reports that include user objects can only be viewed by other end-users. This is because user objects are
stored locally in a specific user object definition file. Other end-users, who do not have the same user object definition file are not able
to access the user object definitions. If an end-user tries to refresh or edit a query that contains another users user objects, the user
objects are automatically removed from the query and report.

Note: Scheduling reports containing user objects is not a supported feature. User objects are removed when
the report is refreshed.
How can an end-user share user objects with other users?
If an end-user wants to share user objects with other users, they should ask the universe designer to include these user objects in the
related universe in order to make them available to all BUSINESSOBJECTS end-users. The universe designer includes the file
UNIVERSE_NAME.UDO in the universes where the user objects are to be used.
Applying Groups of Conditions
You use conditions to limit the data retrieved by queries. A group of conditions consists of two or more conditions (predefined, simple
or complex) applied on the same query. You use groups of conditions when a single condition does not enable you to obtain the data
that you need.

A group of conditions consists of two or more conditions applied on the same query. In the Conditions box in the Query Panel,
conditions are linked by an operator (AND or OR).

Building Combined Queries


BUSINESSOBJECTS lets you combine the data returned by up to eight queries as one set of results. These combined queries enable you
to:
Obtain a single column of data from multiple objects.
Obtain data common to two sets of results, such as customers from a given region and a given age group.
Exclude the results of one query from the results of another.
Note: Building combined queries allows you to combine or exclude data from the query result by using operators to combine the
results of multiple queries. You can contrast this with using the In list and Not in list operators when you apply a complex condition on
a query. The In list and Not in list operators include or exclude data from a query result based on a list of values that you enter.
Operators used to combine queries are Union, Intersection and Minus.

Setting up hierarchies for drill mode


Drill mode enables you to analyze data on different levels of detail. You perform analysis by navigating up, down and across
hierarchies of data in a report. You drill down on the data to examine the details of more consolidated data. You drill up on data to
examine totals for the underlying data. Your ability to drill on data requires that the data be organized into hierarchies.

Note: You can only work in drill mode if you have installed the EXPLORER option with BUSINESSOBJECTS.
Exporting Data From BusinessObjects

What external formats are available?


You can export data from BUSINESSOBJECTS to the following formats:
Text. You can open the text file in many different applications, and on platforms other than Windows
(Macintosh, OS/2 or UNIX, for example).
Spreadsheet format (Microsoft Excel). When you view the exported data in the spreadsheet application,
each value appears in a separate cell.
RDBMS format (including .dbf format for dBASE). When you export data from BUSINESSOBJECTS to
RDBMS format, you create a relational table in the database. The table contains the columns of data
returned by the data provider. This feature enables you to extract a subset of data from a very large table,
then export the result to your RDBMS. Once exported, the data can be retrieved by running a data
provider in BUSINESSOBJECTS. The universe designer can build a new universe, or edit an existing
universe, to map to the data in the new table. Alternatively, you can access the data directly by using free-
hand SQL.
Options available to export data from BO
Export to Local File format
Export to RDBMS
Copy to DDE
Using offline mode
Using BUSINESSOBJECTS in offline mode means that you are not connected to a repository which in turn means that, whatever your
connection type, you will not be able to retrieve and send documents using BROADCAST AGENT. However, what you can do once you
have opened BUSINESSOBJECTS in offline mode depends on the type of connection you chose to use in offline mode.
Client/Server connection
If you are using a BUSINESSOBJECTS client/server connection offline and not connected to a repository, you can still work with
documents and universes stored locally on your computer and even create and refresh documents if you have a connection to the
database, and the database connection and security information is stored on your computer.
Web connection
If you are using a web connection offline, you will not be able to retrieve documents from, and send documents to, Personal
Document folders on the web server, and will not be able to create queries or refresh documents because all the database and
connection information is stored on the web server.
In offline mode, you can continue to work on documents stored locally; you can work on the formatting of your reports or analyze
data in existing reports, for example, and work with the data contained in the document to build new reports. If B USINESSOBJECTS
cannot establish the connection you requested with the web server, it may give you the option of starting B USINESSOBJECTS in offline
mode if your user rights allow you to work offline.
No remote connection
You may also choose to start BUSINESSOBJECTS in offline mode because you know you have no remote connection at all - for
example, on a plane - and want to continue to work on documents you have stored locally. Note: The right to use BUSINESSOBJECTS
offline is given to you by your BUSINESSOBJECTS supervisor or system administrator. Depending on how BUSINESSOBJECTS has been
set up in your company, you may not even have the option of logging on to BUSINESSOBJECTS in offline mode.

Different ways of refreshing documents


BUSINESSOBJECTS allows you to refresh documents in the following ways:
Manually
Automatically at specific times or intervals
By sending the document to Broadcast Agent, the BUSINESSOBJECTS product that manages the scheduled
processing of documents.
Every time you open a document.
Saving a document for all users
If you want to make a document accessible to another user working without a repository, then check the Save for all users option in
the Save as dialog box (Save As command, File menu). If you do not do this, users working without a repository will get an error
message saying You are not authorized to use this document when they try to open your document. This is important to bear in mind
if you are sending documents to other users via email, for example.
Saving WebIntelligence documents
If you have opened a WEBINTELLIGENCE document in BUSINESSOBJECTS, you cannot save it as a WEBINTELLIGENCE document. You
can only save it as a BUSINESSOBJECTS document, i.e., a .rep file.
Once you have saved the document, you can send, publish and schedule the document, but only as a BUSINESSOBJECTS document, not
as a WEBINTELLIGENCE document. If you want to send, publish and schedule the document as a WEBINTELLIGENCE document, you
must use INFOVIEW in your Web browser.

Displaying Data in Tables


BUSINESSOBJECTS has three basic ways of displaying the data in a report. You can display data in tables, in charts or in free-standing
cells.
What Types of Tables?
BUSINESSOBJECTS has three types of table. It has two basic table types that display data in a list and crosstabs, which are a special kind
of table that allows you to summarize data.

Tables: BUSINESSOBJECTS tables display data in either rows or in columns and have a header and a footer. Header and footer rows and
columns are special rows and columns. The header displays information about the row or column e.g. a label or the name of the
variable whose values are displayed. The footer displays
calculations on the values displayed in the columns or rows.

Crosstab tables: A crosstab is a particular kind of table where data is displayed in columns and in rows. Corresponding data appears
at the intersection of the columns and rows; this part of the crosstab is called the body. The body typically displays numerical data. A
crosstab can display both row totals and column totals as well as a grand total. You need at least three variables to display data in a
crosstab including one measure. The measure is placed in the body of the crosstab.

Free-Standing Cells: BUSINESSOBJECTS reports have two types of cell: cells that make up tables and freestanding cells. A free-
standing cell is a single cell that is not attached to any other report component and can be moved and formatted individually. Free-
standing cells have many uses in BUSINESSOBJECTS reports. They are containers for text, calculations or graphics and are used among
other things for report titles, for adding comments and for displaying page numbers.
What are master/detail reports?
Master/detail reports enable you to split large blocks of data into sections. This type of presentation allows you to avoid repeating
values and also to display subtotals.

Structuring a Master/Detail Report


You set up a master/detail report by setting a variable as a master cell. This section describes the different ways to do this. You can:
use a variable in a table or crosstab to create a master cell
add a variable from the Report Manager to create a master cell

Organizing Data in Reports


Limiting the Data Displayed
You may not want to display all the data returned by a data provider in a report. You may want to focus on a selection of it only, which
is difficult to do if there is a lot of data on the screen. A filter enables you to hide the data you do not want to view behind the scenes
and display only the data you need. There are two types of filter. A global filter affects the whole report. A blockspecific filter only
filters data for the specified chart, table or crosstab.
Creating more complex filters
Simple filters enable you to view only the data you need in a report. When you apply a simple filter, all you do is select values for a
variable in the report. Complex filters enable you to display values that satisfy conditions. You define a complex filter by writing a
formula.
Ignoring filters
You can force BUSINESSOBJECTS to ignore any filters you have inserted on a report so that when you make a calculation, the
calculation is made on all the data, not just the filtered values. To do this, you use the
NoFilter function. The syntax is: =NoFilter(formula)
Using Ranking to View the Top and Bottom Values
You may only want to show the extreme ranges of the data. For example, you may want to determine your top ten customers. Ranking
enables you to look at the largest numbers and the smallest numbers in a report. Like filtering, it hides the data you do not want to
display. The hidden data is not deleted from the report - you can view it again whenever you like by removing the ranking. Ranking
also sorts the data in descending order. Thus, the largest value of the ranking is always at the top of the ranked column and the smallest
value at the bottom. You can rank data contained in tables, crosstabs or master cells in master/detail reports.
Highlighting Data: using Alerter Note: You cannot use alerters on charts.
What is a break?
A break does what its name implies. It breaks up the data in a table or crosstab by grouping the data according to a selected value. This
allows you to display all the data for each value of a dimension variable together, and more importantly, it allows you to display
subtotals.

Note: You cannot insert breaks on data in charts.


Calculations
BUSINESSOBJECTS has standard calculation functions that enable you to make quick calculations on the data in reports. These
calculations are available directly from a menu. The most commonly used calculations are also available on the Report toolbar.
What are calculation contexts? (ITC)
By default, BUSINESSOBJECTS determines the result of a measure based on the dimension or dimensions in the part of the report in
which the measure is inserted. These sets of dimensions are called calculation contexts. Calculation contexts are dynamic in
BUSINESSOBJECTS.
Understanding input and output contexts
BUSINESSOBJECTS defines an input context and an output context to determine the result of an aggregate calculation. Remember that a
context is made up of one or more dimensions. The following table defines which dimensions in a report make up which context:

Analyzing Data in drill mode


What is drill mode?
Drill mode is a BOs analysis mode that allows you to break down data and view it from different angles and on different levels of
detail to discover what is the driving factor behind a good or bad result.
Hierarchies
Objects are also organized in this way for drilling. When you analyze data in drill mode, you use hierarchies. The Universe classes are
the default hierarchies you use for drilling but the Universe designer can also set up custom hierarchies. You can also create and edit
hierarchies in your reports. Drill hierarchies only contain dimension objects. In drill mode, you drill down on dimensions, for example
from Year to Quarter to Month. At each level, measures, such as Revenue or Profit Margin, are recalculated.
Qualifying Data For Hierarchies
BUSINESSOBJECTS qualifies data as dimensions, measures or details. Hierarchies only contain dimensions so if you want to include an
object in a hierarchy for analysis in drill mode, you must qualify it as a dimension. Note: You cannot change the qualification of data
returned by a query on a universe.

Q. What is Slice and Dice feature in Business Objects? (AG Technologies)

Working in Slice-and-Dice Mode


Slice-and-dice mode enables you to switch the position of data in a report. You can, for ex, move data from columns to rows. The
result would be a crosstab, where numeric data such as revenue appears at the intersection of rows and columns. You can also use
slice-and-dice mode to:
Work with master/detail reports Display and remove data
Rename, reset and delete blocks Turn tables and crosstabs into charts, and vice versa
Apply, edit and delete breaks, filters, sorts, rankings and calculations.
Slice-and-dice mode is enabled by the Slice and Dice Panel, a pop-up window that provides a graphical representation of the report
you are working on. You carry out tasks by dragging and dropping icons that represent the data you can use.
Formatting Sections
What are sections?
There are two types of section in a BUSINESSOBJECTS report.
Main Section
If you have not created any sections, the main section is the only section in the report and when you apply shading, the whole report
(except margins) will be shaded in the same color.
Sections in a Master/Detail report
If you have set up a report with sections, you can apply a different type of shading to each section in the report. This can allow you to
easily distinguish between the different sections. The sections you have created are contained in the main section and a main section
header is displayed at the beginning of the report and a main section footer at the end of the report. You can hide the main section
header or the main section footer or both of them if you wish.

Formatting Tables
Tables and crosstabs are made up of headers and footers, columns and rows, and cells. All these elements together make up the block.
The cell is the most basic element of a table or crosstab. Rows and columns are made up of groups of cells. When you format tables
and crosstabs, you can work on the formatting cell by cell or on the block formatting.
Using hyperlinks in BusinessObjects reports
You can easily add hyperlinks such as email addresses and web site addresses to your reports. B USINESSOBJECTS automatically
recognizes certain keywords or symbols included in the address, adds any extra syntax behind the scenes and formats the address as a
hyperlink. Hyperlinks you add to a BUSINESSOBJECTS report are retained when you save the report in PDF or in HTML format.

Positioning report components


Relative positioning
Relative positioning means positioning a selected block in relation to markers such as page margins or other blocks. If these markers
change in size or position the block is re-positioned accordingly.

Using Outline View


When you have a report in sections with a lot of information in each section, a convenient way of presenting the report is to use
outline view. Outline view folds up the sections in the report to display only the high level information that youve included at the top
of each section. People viewing your reports can then open up the sections they are interested in to get more details. A bar with arrows
is displayed at the left side of the report window. The number of buttons displayed at the bottom of the outline bar depends on the
number of sections you have in the report.

What is a template?
A standard report does not contain information on page setup or include custom elements such as graphics. A BUSINESSOBJECTS
template allows you to do this. A template is a special kind of BUSINESSOBJECTS document that contains pre-defined styles and
structure that you use as a foundation to create reports. BUSINESSOBJECTS comes with several templates for you to use and you
can also create your own.
Structure: The structure of a report defines how the data is presented. Your data can be presented in a crosstab, a column chart, or it
can have a master/detail structure
Styles: The styles contained in a template define the report page background and the style of the headers and footers.

Interview Questions from Mascot Systems:

Can we create filters in Universes using Designer? Yes

What is the difference in creating filters in Designer and BusinessObjects?

How to make a report available to other users?

What are categories? (while publishing the reports (supervisor & BCA))

Explain about prompts in BO?

Interview Questions from KPIT Infotech, Pune.

1. How do you create prompts and conditions?


2. Built in functions
3. How do you create a universe, step-by-step approach.
Designing, Creating and maintaining a universe
The phased in this include:
Planning
Break down the information system into functional
areas
Analysis
Analyze the information needs of users
Design
Design a conceptual schema
Design the specification of a universe
Implementation
Create a universe with DESIGNER
Test the universe with BUSINESSOBJECTS/WEBINTELLIGENCE
Distribute the universe
Repeat the above steps for other universes
Maintenance
Update and maintain the universe
Notify end users of changes

4. How do u create filters, step-by-step approach.

5. What different domain are there in BO


There are 3 domains: Security, Universe and Document domains.

6. What are Model Queries?


Interview questions from MBT

1. To create reports what tools, you have used in BO. Ans) BO


2. Have you created a repository? No
3. Which is the best way to resolve a loop (alias or context)? Why? Alias
4. What are the contents of repository?
5. How do you design universe?
6. How do you pull reports to excel from BusinessObjects?
7. How do you publish your reports in BO, without using Broadcast agent, to a corporate database?
(WebIntelligence)
8. Have you worked on WebIntelligence? Yes
9. Can a universe point to multiple databases simultaneously? How? No
10. Can I grant permission to a user to view only a particular report? Yes
11. If I want to grant access to a report to a group of users, how do I do?

Interview Questions from AG-Technologies:

1. Explain about your project? (Mascot)


2. How many tables are there in each universe in your project?
3. What is the BO version you have used?
4. What is the system configuration in which Business Objects are installed?
5. If I want to install BO Enterprise products in Windows 2000 professional server, what should be the
system configuration?
6. What is a repository? What it contains? (Explain the different domains in the repository)
7. who are the users of the repository?
8. Can a repository contain reports?
Interview Questions from ITC:

1. Is Universe MOLAP or OLAP?


MOLAP

MOLAP: Multidimensional OLAP


OLAP: Online Analytical Processing
2. What will be there in the Domains?
A Business Objects repository is a set of data structures stored on a database. A repository makes it possible to share the
resources necessary for client/server architecture. To ensure security and manage user resources, a repository comprises three
types of domains:
a security domain, which contain the definition of the other domains as well as the definition of users
universe domains, which are meta-models of related databases, containing a description of the data to be accessed
document domains, which contain the structures for storing shared documents and for executing tasks according to a
timestamped definition.
These three types of domains make it possible for all users to share resources.

Q. Can we have a report with multiple data sources?


Yes

3. Can we have a report with multiple data providers?


Yes. We can add a new data provider to an existing report, where it asks for the source either it may be a
universe or other(Freehand SQL, Personal Data files, VBA , Stored Procedures)

4. How do u use aggregate tables in Star Schema?


Using multiple Star Schemas.

Interview Questions from PCS:

Business Objects
1. Can we create aliases for every table before hand ? If yes what are the disadvantages?
2. What problems are NOT known while performing Integrity Check?
3. Where do we use GLOBAL FILTERS, explain with example?
4. What sort of Drill Down charts did you prepare, name few.
5. Outer Join Pl/Sql statement
6. How did you give a developed Universe to your client.
7. Using Formula Object in another Formula Object
8. What happens if Cardinalities are not Resolved.

2. Explain the steps to create Universe? (Need to explain all the necessary steps including filters, joins,
objects etc.)
3. How if you will create conditions and where we will create these filters?
4. Can we create conditions at report level? What are disadvantages creating conditions at report level.
Explain?
5. Practical question: I have one department and avg(sal) of each department,
Now I want a report some thing like department name along with Avg(sal) by specifying the department
number as Parameter. Explain how best we can do this report.

* WHAT ARE DIFFERENT USER PROFILES OF BUSINESS OBJECTS?


* EXPLAIN USER HIERARCHY IN BUSINESS OBJECTS?

Interview Questions from Shreesoft


1. How do you generate a dynamic prompt
2. What is the function to display the prompt values in the report
Ans: User_response(dataprovier,character string)
3) what is the default number of rows in bo
Ans:
4) What is UDO
Ans: user defined object.
5) how to open the universe or the report from other system.
Ans: open it in offline mode.
6) explain the architeture of the thick and thin client
7) explain about ZABO
8) difference between inline view and view.
9) Difference between mview and view
10) Scd, and scd types

Linked Universe

Linked universes are universes that share common components such as


parameters, classes, objects, or joins. Among linked universes, one universe is
said to be the kernel or master universe while the others are the derived
universes.
A kernel or master universe represents a re-usable library of components.
Derived universes may contain some or all the components of the kernel or
master universe, in addition to any components that have been added to it.

Approaches to linking universes


You can use one of three approaches when linking universes:
1.The kernel approach
2.The master approach
3.The component approach

Working with Linked Universes

The kernel approach


With the kernel approach, one universe contains the core components. These are
the components common in all universes. The derived universes that you create
from this kernel universe contain these core components as well as their own
specific components.
The universes Human Resources and Sales are derived from a kernel universe. They
contain core components of the kernel universe as well as their own specific components.

Any changes you make to the kernel universe are automatically reflected in the
core components of all the derived universes.

The master approach


The master approach is another way of organizing the common components of
linked universes.
In this approach, one master universe holds all possible components. In the
universes derived from this master, certain components are hidden; in other
words, the components visible in the derived universes are a subset of the master
universe. The approach is depicted in the diagram below.
The universes Human Resources and Sales are derived from a master universe. They
contain components from the master universe, some of which may be hidden.
Any changes you make to the master universe are automatically reflected in the
core components of all the derived universes.

The component approach


The third way of organizing linked universes is the component approach. It
involves merging two or more universes into one universe.
The Sales universe was created by merging two universes: Part 1 and Part 2.

In summary, you can use any of the three approaches presented above, or a
combination of them.
Advantages:

Centralized core components. DBA Can maintain these. More specialised Components can be handled by
specialised designers.

No need to recreate the core components in every universe. Do it in the kernel or master and it will be reflected in
other universe.

Reduces development and maintenance time1

Notes:
You can not creat a derived universe from another derived universe.

A universe is designed on some database. Can it be used with another database with the same structure???

Yes.

If the structure is different (For example , the field name is different), You will get an error saying that "Error during SQL
Execution"

Outline?
Displays indicators on the outside of the document that show the outline. Using these indicators, you can fold and
unfold sections and/or the data that corresponds to a break in the current block.
This option is equivalent to the Outline command on the View menu.

Report is slow. why?


1.Indexing dimension table and fact table.
2.Creating aggregate tables

Specific to BO
1.Modifying Array fetch parameter.
Array fetch parameter tell BO the number of rows to fetch at once. So if your network can handle
large data you can increase the no . of records to fetch.
(Goto Universe parameters and edit the connection properties)

2.Modfying the table weight.


Useful only in Oracle. By default BO sorts tablefrom lighter weight to heavier weight. This determines the order of rows in the FROM clause of the SQL.
Oracle uses the reverse order while running queries(Sybase uses the same order). You can change this oracle behaviour by setting
REVERSE_TABLE_WEIGHT = N in ORA7EN.PRM of Businessobjects/data access directory.

3.Using Shortcut Joins.


A shortcut join links two table that are already joined in a common path. You can use shortcut joins to
reduce the number of rows in a query. Shortcut joins will not create a loop.

How to: Select a join. Right click and select join properties. Change it to shortcut join

What is the difference between Formula and Variable

1. Formula can not have a name. But Variables can and should have a name

2. You can not apply alerters, Sorts, Breaks,filters on columns or rows containing formulas. But you can do this with
variables

3. You can qualify variables as dimensions in drill operation.

What is a Loop. How will you resolve it?

Can we have an alias on alias?

What are the available option for getting data to the reports
1. Universe
2. Personal data files (Files like .xls,.txt,.csv etc)
3. Freehand SQL
4. Store Procedures
5. Visual basic Procedures

Domain

A subdivision of the BusinessObjects repository. The BusinessObjects repository is made up of three domains: the
security domain, the universe domain, and the document domain.

a. Security domain
A set of data structures in the BusinessObjects repository. The security domain contains information on the other
domains (universe and document) and on the identification of BusinessObjects users. It also contains information
relating to the management of the different products. The security domain is created with the wizard the first time
Supervisor is launched.

b. Document domain
A set of data structures in the BusinessObjects repository that contains information on stored documents, lists of
values, scripts or stored procedures. These are components that were created and sent by end users to the
document domain. As a result, end users can share these documents, or cause them to be refreshed during
scheduled processing with the Broadcast Server.

c. Universe domain
A set of structures in the BusinessObjects repository that contains information on universes created and exported
with Designer. The universe domain makes it possible to store, distribute, and administrate universes. There may
be multiple universe domains in a repository.

Designer Privileged User ( Defaults)


1. Analysis
a. work in drill mode
b. slice and dice mode
c. work with business miner
2. business applications
a. work with SAP BAPI
3. connectiion
a. create and edit connections
4. documents
a. attach scripts
b. change file locations
c. conditional formatting
d. create documents
and many more
5. free hand SQL
a. edit free hand SQL
b. use free hand sql

6. miscellaneous
a. cannot view user/groups hierarchy
7. multidimensianl data
8. personal data files
9. programmability
10. query technique
11. stored procedure
a. create store procedures / edit
12. tools
a. use change login
b. use change password
Repository

A centralized set of relational data structures stored in a database. It enables BusinessObjects users to share resources in
a controlled and secured environment. The repository is made up of three domains: the security domain, the universe
domain and the document domain.

Types of User Profiles

Table 1
Profile Role Product
General Supervisor The Business Objects system All Business Objectsproducts
administrator. This is the
person who launches
Supervisor for
the first time.The general
supervisor creates the
repository, defines users and
groups, and
manages resources. A general
supervisor is the sole user with
a global view of the
hierarchical organization.
Supervisor Defines users and group, Supervisor,BusinessObjects
manages resources, and
ensures security. A supervisor
also assigns properties and
resources to these users and
groups. Inaddition, a
supervisor can restrict access
to certain resources. A general
supervisor can create several
supervisors.
Supervisor-designer Creates users, groups and Supervisor,
universes. This user has all Designer,BusinessObjects
the rights of the supervisor
and designer combined.
Designer Creates universes and Designer, BusinessObjects
distributes them to end users
by sending them through the
file system, or by exporting
them to the repository.
User The main BusinessObjects BusinessObjects(see note
user whose tasks are to query, below)
report, and analyze data.
Users can produce documents
containing data from one or
more data sources. There can
be an unlimited number of
users.
Versatile This user is authorized to use
any combination of products
defined by a supervisor.

FAQ for BO Developer


Questions:

1) Types and definitions of joins?


Ans: There should be one WHERE clause for each pair of tables being joined. Thus, if four tables are to be
combined, three conditions would be necessary.

EQUI JOIN: An equi-join is based on the equality between the values in the column of one
table and the values in the column of another. Because the same column is
present in both tables, the join synchronizes the two tables.

THETA JOIN: A theta join links tables based on a relationship other than equality between
two columns.

OUTER JOIN: An outer join links two tables, one of which has rows that do not match those
in the common column of the other table.

SHORTCUT JOIN: Shortcut joins can be used in schemas containing redundant join paths leading
to the same result, regardless of direction.

The simplest way to create joins in a universe is to specify a join strategy that
creates them automatically as we insert tables and columns in the Structure pane
from the Table Browser.

The Detect JOIN Method: A quick and reliable method for joining the tables in wer universe is to select
the Detect Joins command on the Tools menu. we can also click the button on
the Editing toolbar to execute the command.

The Edit JOIN Method: The Edit Join dialog box is a graphical method for creating a new join, or editing
an existing one.

The Formula BAR Method: The formula bar is an area


within the DESIGNER window that shows the formula or expression defining any
join that we click.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2) What are loops and how do we resolve them?


Ans: In a relational database schema a common type of join path that returns too few
rows is called a loop.In a relational database, a loop occurs when joins form multiple paths between
lookup tables. In a database schema, a loop can be identified as a closed path

Resolving the Loop:


DESIGNER provides three features, which guide we in the loop resolution
process:
Detect Cardinalities : The Detect Cardinalities command automatically identifies the cardinalities or
nature of the relationships between the tables in the Structure pane.

Detect Aliases: In SQL an alias is an alternative name for a table. The purpose of aliases is to
resolve structural issues in a database arising from SQL limitations.In DESIGNER, an alias is just a pointer to
another table.
A designer places one or more aliases in the Structure pane so that BUSINESSOBJECTS and
WEBINTELLIGENCE
can generate the appropriate SQL statements for certain types of queries.
Detect Contexts: A context is a set of joins that specifies one of several paths through tables in a
loop. It ensures that joins are not included from different paths within the same
SQL query.

3? Can we link Universe and what are the advantages of doing that? -> SEE LATER
Ans: Linked universes are universes that share common components such as
parameters, classes, objects, or joins. Among linked universes, one universe is
said to be the kernel or master universe while the others are the derived
universes. A kernel or master universe represents a re-usable library of components.
Derived universes may contain some or all the components of the kernel or
master universe, in addition to any components that have been added to it.

Kernel Approach: With the kernel approach, one universe contains the core components. These are
the components common in all universes. The derived universes that we create
from this kernel universe contain these core components as well as their own
specific components.

Master Approach: In this approach, one master universe holds all possible components. In the
universes derived from this master, certain components are hidden; in other
words, the components visible in the derived universes are a subset of the master
universe.

Component Approach: The third way of organizing linked universes is the component approach. It
involves merging two or more universes into one universe.

Benefits of Linking Universe:


When we set up a link between universes, any changes we or other designers
make to the kernel universe are dynamically reflected in the derived universes.
A dynamic link may considerably reduce development and maintenance
time. When we modify a component in the kernel universe, DESIGNER
propagates the change to the same component in all the derived universes.
Instead of re-creating common components each time we create a new
universe, we can centralize such components in a kernel universe, and then
include them in all new universes.
Linked universes facilitate specialization. Development can be split between
database administrators who set up a basic kernel universe, and the more
specialized designers who create more functional universes based on their
specific field.

Requirements for Linking Universe:


The kernel universe and active universe were created from the same data
account and the same RDBMS.
The kernel universe was exported and re-imported at least once.
Exported derived universes are located in the same universe domain as the
kernel universe.
All classes and objects are unique in both the kernel universe and the derived
universes. (Otherwise, collisions may occur.)
we are authorized to link the given universe.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4) Where are the reports stored?
Ans: Reports are stored in Repository created by the Supervisor .

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5) In what form we can present the reports?
Ans: Reports can be presented in text, html, excel or pdf fromat.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6) What is the purpose of Checking Integrity?
Ans: Check Integrity serves the following purposes:
It detects any errors in the objects, joins, conditions, and cardinalities of wer
universe.
It detects whether there are any loops in the joins.
It detects whether contexts are necessary.
It determines whether any changes were made to the database to which the
universe is connected.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

7) What is the purpose of Parse Checking ?


Ans: Parse checking means how DESIGNER is to determine the validity of an object,
join, or condition. There are two levels for parse checking:
Quick parsing checks only the syntax of components.
Thorough parsing checks both the syntax and semantics of components.
Of the two options, Thorough parsing provides a more extensive check and thus
ensures the integrity of the components. However, if we wish to create many
components in a short time, Quick parsing is generally more rapid.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8) What are Lookup Table and Fact table?


Ans: LOOK UP Table:

A lookup (or dimension) table contains information associated with a particular


entity or subject. For example, a lookup table can hold information on customers
from a geographical perspective such as their names, telephone numbers as well
as the cities and countries in which they reside.
In DESIGNER, dimension and detail objects are derived from lookup tables. A
lookup table has the following join cardinality structure:

FACT Table:
A fact table contains statistical information about transactions. For example, it
may contain figures such as Sales Revenue or Profit.
In a BUSINESSOBJECTS universe, most measures are defined from fact
tables.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9) What is LOV ( list of Values) ?
A list of values is a file that contains the data values associated with an object. Thus, lists of values can reveal
information about the contents of a database.

By default, each dimension or detail object is assigned a list of values made up of


all the corresponding data values in the database. No default list of values is
assigned to measure objects.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10) What is
Conditional Hiding ?
Ans: In the universes that we create, we may find it convenient to hide certain
classes, objects or conditions in the Universe pane. we may wish to hide one or
more components for any of the following reasons:
The components are from linked universes and are not needed in the active
universe .
The objects exist solely to optimize SQL syntax and should therefore be
invisible to end users.
we are in the process of developing a component that we do not want end
users to view from the Query Panel.
we want to disable components temporarily without deleting them.

11) What is Zabo?


Ans: Zabo means Zero Administration Business Objects .we can deploy
BUSINESSOBJECTS using either the traditional client/server deployment or
using a three-tier web deployment. This new web deployment is called a
zero-administration deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS.

In a zero-administration deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS, only the


BUSINESSOBJECTS client software is installed on the Windows PC; all middleware
is stored and administered on the WEBINTELLIGENCE web server and the server-side
processing is handled by the WEBINTELLIGENCE system This means zero-administration
on the client computer yet still gives the client all the powerful query, reporting and analysis features of
BUSINESSOBJECTS.

A zero-administration deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS allows us to:


Install and automatically update the BUSINESSOBJECTS client software from
INFOVIEW via an Internet browser.
Connect to the BUSINESSOBJECTS repository using a web connection and use
middleware installed on the server.
When connected to BUSINESSOBJECTS via a web connection, we can save
documents either locally, or in personal storage space on the server.

12) What is End User and Real User ?


Ans: Full Clients are users who have a Windows workstation with
BUSINESSOBJECTS installed on it. Document processing is carried out on
the client.

Thin Clients are users who have any client platform that provides a
Web Browser. Document processing is carried out on a
WEBINTELLIGENCE server and formatted documents are passed down to
the client.

13) What is Chasm Trap and how do we detect and resolve it?

Ans: Many to one joins from two fact tables converge on a single lookup table. This type
of join convergence is called a Chasm Trap. This returns too many rows.
We will get incorrect results if we run a query when the following
circumstances exist:
A many to one to many relationship exists among three tables in the
universe structure.
The query includes objects based on two tables both at the many end of their
respective joins.
There are multiple rows returned for a single dimension.

Chasm Trap cannot be automatically detected but it has to be visually detected.


To resolve a Chasm trap we need to make two separate queries and then
combine the results. Depending on the type of objects defined for the fact tables,
and the type of end user environment, we can use the following methods to
resolve a Chasm trap:

Create a context for each fact table. This solution works in all cases for
BUSINESSOBJECTS universes.
Modify the SQL parameters for the universe so we can generate separate SQL
queries for each measure. This solution only works for measure objects. It
does not generate separate queries for dimension or detail objects.
Break the universe into multiple universes. One universe for each fact table.
This solution only applies to WEBINTELLIGENCE universes when there are
dimension objects in one or both fact tables so two SELECT statements are
synchronized and not joined.

14) What is Fan Trap?


Ans: Serial many to one joins. This is called a Fan trap.This returns too many rows.
The fanning out effect of one to many joins can cause incorrect results to be returned when a query includes
objects
based on both tables. we need to visually examine the
direction of the cardinalities displayed in the table schema. If we have two tables
which are referenced by measure objects and are joined in a series of many to one
joins, then we probably have a potential Fan trap.
To Resolve Fan Trap, If query contains only measure objects from the two tables causing the Fan trap,
we can use the Multiple SQL Statements For Each Measure function to generate
separate SQL queries for each measure.

15) Explain Measure, Detail and Dimension Object ?

An object maps to data or a derivation of data in the database. For the


purposes of multidimensional analysis, an object can be qualified as one of
three types: a dimension, detail, or measure.

An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a


derivation of data in the database.

The name of an object suggests a concept drawn from the terminology of a


business or discipline. Thus, for a product manager, objects might be Product, Life
Cycle, or Release Date while for a financial analyst, objects might be Profit Margin,
Return on Investment, etc.

For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of


three types: dimension, detail, or measure.

Dimension objects are the parameters for the analysis. Dimensions typically
relate to a hierarchy such as geography, product, or time.By default, an object is qualified as a dimension object,
which is indicated by the
cube symbol that precedes the objects name.

Detail objects provide a description of a dimension but are not the focus of the
analysis.

Measure objects convey numeric information by which a dimension object can be


measured.A measure object is derived from an aggregate function: Count, Sum, Minimum,
or Maximum. This type of object provides numeric information.

For example, Sales Revenue is a measure object, Last Name and City Id are
dimension objects, and Phone Number is a detail object.

16) What are Aliases and Contexts?


whenever possible we should use an alias instead of a context. When we use a context, we expose
the BUSINESSOBJECTS end user to the database structure. They are forced to decide
which context they want to use to run their query. The role of the universe is to
shield end users from the database structure, so they do not have to make such
decisions.

When do we use Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure?


we can use this solution for both BUSINESSOBJECTS and WEBINTELLIGENCE
universes that contain only measure objects defined for both fact tables. The
advantage of using multiple SQL statements is that we can avoid using contexts
which we need to later maintain.

When do we not use Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure?


we should not use Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure when we have
dimension or detail objects defined for one or both of the fact tables. If a
dimension or detail object is included in a query based on a universe using this
solution, a cartesian product will be returned.

This solution can slow query response time. If the drop in query performance is
important, than we should consider creating contexts (BUSINESSOBJECTS) or
separate universes (WEBINTELLIGENCE) to resolve the Chasm trap.

17) What is Cartesian Product?


Ans: Cartesian Product is a situation a
situation in which a query includes two or more tables that are not linked by a
join .Cartesian product is a situation in which all possible combinations
between each row of each table are retrieved.
18) Describe Personal, Shared and Secured Connections ?
Ans: A connection is a set of parameters that provides access to a database. A
connection is made up of three elements:
the network layer
the connection name and type
the database location and account name.

DESIGNER provides three types of connections: secured, shared, and personal.


A secured connection is used to centralize and control access to sensitive or
critical data. It is the safest type of connection for protecting access to data.
Created with either DESIGNER or SUPERVISOR, secured connections are stored in
the security domain of the repository. They may be shared by any designers or
supervisors who have been granted the appropriate privileges.

As a universe designer, we must use secured connections if we want to


distribute wer universes through the Business Objects repository. In addition,
we can re-use secured connections and update them dynamically as needed.

Shared connections
A shared connection is used to access common resources such as universes or
documents. It can thus be used by several users.

The parameters of this connection are stored in a file called sdac.lsi or sdac.ssi,
located in the LocData subfolder. we can update these parameters dynamically.
Universes defined with shared connections are unsecured in terms of Business
Objects product security. To protect universes with these connections, we can
store them in restricted network folders. However, this may not be entirely safe
since unauthorized users who have installed Business Objects product software
on their computer can still open the universes; this is so because the connection
file in the folder can potentially be read by the software installed on their
computers.

A shared connection is useful if we need to set up a testing environment for


universes before distributing them to the entire user community.

Personal Connectons
A personal connection is specific to one user and can be used only from the
computer on which it was created. It is defined either from BUSINESSOBJECTS or
DESIGNER.
The parameters of this connection are stored in files called pdac.lsi and pdac.ssi,
located in the LocData folder. we cannot update the parameters of such a
connection, which are static.

In terms of Business Objects product security, a personal connection does not


protect a universe from unauthorized access. Thus, anyone who can log into a
users computer can gain access to restricted universes defined with personal
connecti ons. However, i f an authori zed user copi es t he same uni verses t o anot her
machine he would not be able to open them since the connection parameters do
not exist on that machine.

Personal Connections are used rarely given their lack of flexibility in


the distribution process. we may occasionally use them to access personal
databases on local machines. However, they are more commonly used to access
database accounts to test a bit of SQL through the Free-hand SQL option in
BUSINESSOBJECTS.

NOTE: All three types of connections can be modified from DESIGNER. Personal and
shared connections can be modified from BUSINESSOBJECTS. Only secured
connections can be modified from SUPERVISOR.

19) What are the main components of Designer Window ?


Ans: From the main window of DESIGNER, we create wer universe using three areas:
the Table Browser
the Structure pane
the Universe pane.

When we choose the tables and columns from the Table Browser, DESIGNER
displays them in the Structure pane and in the Universe pane.

The Structure pane reflects the underlying database structure of the universe. The
Universe pane displays the components of the universe from the point of view of
BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE, i.e. the classes and objects.

20) Describe Online and Offline Mode in Designer ?


Ans: Online mode
Online, the default mode, is appropriate for a networked environment in which
the general supervisor has set up a repository. In online mode, we can import or
export universes.

Offline mode
Working in offline mode means essentially that we work with universes that are
stored locally owner computer. To use this mode, we must have been
connected at least once in Online mode.
we may wish to use this option whenever we need to work away from wer
site, such as with a laptop computer, or whenever wer network goes down.

21) What is Repository and what is it use?


Ans: A repository is set up by a general supervisor who stores it centrally on a
database. A repository enables users to share resources for Business Objects
products; it is made up of the following domains:
the security domain
the universe domain
the document domain.
A universe domain holds all the universes that we export. In fact, there may be
more than one universe domain in the repository.
A document domains holds all exported documents, templates, scripts, and lists
of values.
If we are not sure whether the general supervisor has set up a repository, check
to see whether there is a .key file located in the LocData subfolder of wer
BUSINESSOBJECTS folder. This encrypted file contains the address of the
repository.

22) What is Startegy ?


Ans: A strategy is a script that reads structural information from a database or flat file.
This information can pertain to tables, columns, or joins.

DESIGNER uses the following built-in strategies for creating the components of
universes:
the Objects Creation strategy, which tells DESIGNER how to define classes and
objects automatically from the databases tables and columns
the Joins Creation strategy, which tells DESIGNER how to define joins
automatically from the databases tables and columns
the Table Browser strategy, which tells DESIGNER how to read the table and
column structures from the databases data dictionary

Object: From the list box, select an object strategy.


The built-in strategy creates classes, and names them
based on the tables in the database; it also creates
objects, and names them based on the columns in the
database. It replaces all underscore characters (_) with
spaces.

Joins :From the list box, select a join strategy. A description is


displayed below the name of the current strategy.

Tables :From the list box, select a table strategy. The built-in
strategy reads the structure of database tables.

23) What is Universe?


Ans: A universe is a set of classes and objects intended for a specific application or
group of users.A universe is a business-oriented mapping of the data structure found in
databases: tables, columns, joins, etc. All universe components map to parts of the database structure.

A universe can represent any specific application, system, or group of users. For
example, a universe can relate to a department in a company such as marketing
or accounting.

A universe can also pertain to a section within a department or just about any set
of organized procedures such as a payroll or inventory system. A universe
consists of a set of objects, grouped by classes.

24) What is Class ?


Ans: A class is a collection of objects based on business categories.A class is a logical grouping of objects
within a universe. In general, the name of a class reflects a business concept that conveys the category or type of
objects.
A class can be further divided into subclasses.
As designer, we are free to define hierarchies of classes and subclasses into a
model that best reflects the business concepts of our company.

25) What is Aggregate Awareness ?


Ans: Aggregate awareness is a feature of DESIGNER that makes use of aggregate tables
in a database. These are tables that contain precalculated data. The purpose of
these tables is to enhance the performance of SQL transactions; they are thus used
to speed up the execution of queries.

The reliability of the technique depends on the accuracy of the


aggregate tables. In fact, they must be refreshed at the same time as all fact tables.
A universe that is aggregate aware has one or more aggregate objects with
alternative definitions based on these tables. These definitions correspond to
levels of aggregation. For example, a Profit object can be aggregated by month, by
quarter, or by year.

Queries built from such a universe return information aggregated to the


appropriate level at optimal speed.

26) How do we set up Aggregate Awareness in an Universe?


Ans: Setting up Aggregate Awareness in an Universe is a four part process:
i) Build the Objects:
1. Identify all the possible definitions (table/column
combinations) of the objects.
2. Arrange the objects by level of aggregation.
3. Build the objects using the @Aggregate_Awareness function.

ii) Specify the Incompatible Objects


1. Build an objects/aggregate tables matrix.
2. For the first aggregate table, decide whether each object is either:
- at the same level of aggregation or higher (compatible)
- at a lower level of aggregation (incompatible)
3. Check only the boxes of objects that are incompatible
for that table.
4. Repeat the steps for the remaining aggregate tables.

iii) Define any necessary Contexts.


Define one context per level of aggregation.

iv) Test the Results


i) Run Several queries
ii) Compare the results

27) What is Concatenated Objects and How do we create it ?


Ans: A concatenated object is an object we create by combining two existing objects.
For example, lets say that we wish to create an object called Full Name, which is
a concatenation of the objects Last Name and First Name in the Customer class.
To do so, first create a new object in the Customer class and call it Full Name.
Remember to enter a description for the object such as This object is a
concatenation of the customers first and last name.

28) What are the Business Objects SDK?

SDK is software Development Kit which are mainly used to customize Business Objects.
SDK is mainly licensed together with documentation (and code samples) .

WebI SDK can be programmed using JSP or ASP using whatever generic editor we want
for JSP or ASP.

I have used VBA, JSP BO SDK. Additional I have also used BO web Service SDK.

29) What is the Business Objects web server?

30) Describe the steps to create the Universe?

31) How to create User's rights for specific Universe in the Supervisor ?

32) What is Web Intelligence?

WebIntelligence : WEBINTELLIGENCE provides users with a light-weight, easy-to-use interface called


the Web Panel to create and modify documents.WEBINTELLIGENCE, you can access the data in your
corporate databases or
data warehouses from within your office, your home, or around the world, using
your corporate intranet, extranet, or the World Wide Web.

WEBINTELLIGENCE allows users to access, analyze, and share data over


intranets and extranets for both traditional relational databases and
online analytical processing (OLAP) servers.
WEBINTELLIGENCE allows users to view, refresh, create reports.

WEBINTELLIGENCE uses the same universes created for full-client users. These
universes are the sole data providers for WEBINTELLIGENCE documents.
All users need to do to create and edit WEBINTELLIGENCE documents is to log into
a web server and download a Java applet or ActiveX control from the corporate
intranet, extranet, or the web. They can then build queries to create documents
that display accurate, up-to-date data from their corporate databases.
When users have finished editing the queries, they send them to the server, where
they are processed, formatted and sent back as HTML documents.

Once youve used WEBINTELLIGENCE to query a database, we can take the


information and turn it into documents as simple as tables, or as complex as
dynamic documents with drillable charts.

We can then save those documents for your own personal use, send them to
other users, publish them to the repository as corporate documents, or schedule
them for automatic refresh and distribution through BROADCAST AGENT.

33) Describe the three modules of Web Intelligence ?

WEBINTELLIGENCE INFOVIEW
The indispensable web-based entry point for accessing both
WEBINTELLIGENCE and BUSINESSOBJECTS documents, and all other types of
files that are stored in the repository or in personal document storage areas.
INFOVIEW also lets users manage, save, distribute, print and schedule
documents for automated processing by BROADCAST AGENT.

WEBINTELLIGENCE REPORTER allows users to create and edit WEBINTELLIGENCE


documents. The client for WEBINTELLIGENCE is a Java applet or an ActiveX control called
the Web Panel, which is automatically downloaded for users to build and edit
documents.

WEBINTELLIGENCE EXPLORER allows users to drill in drillable


WEBINTELLIGENCE documents to analyze data on different levels of detail, as
in the example on the previous page.

34 ) What is Web Intelligence SDK ? Give example of where have you used Web Intelligence SDK?

WEBINTELLIGENCE SDK (Software Development Kit) is an extension of


WEBINTELLIGENCE which enables us to customize the look, behavior, and
workflow of a WEBINTELLIGENCE deployment to match the needs of a wide user
audience.

From a developers viewpoint, this means that you have tight control over how
your WEBINTELLIGENCE deployment operates and how it appears to end users.
From the users viewpoint, this means they can access documents and perform
queries and analysis in an environment with which they are familiar. A common
use of WEBINTELLIGENCE SDK is to align WEBINTELLIGENCE deployments with
current corporate intranet or extranet solutions.

Example SDK:
I have used Web Intelligence SDK in order to :

Personalized UI
Embed prompts in web pages. You can determine which prompts are
returned depending on a users profile and you can determine the results sent
back to the user based on their input.
Add a hyperlink to a document which launches the Web Panel.

35) What is Broadcast Agent ?

BROADCAST AGENT provides scheduled or batch processing of BUSINESSOBJECTS


and WEBINTELLIGENCE documents. All the end user has to do is send a document
to BROADCAST AGENT using BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE, and specify
scheduling and distribution information. No understanding of the server
configuration is required.

BROADCAST AGENT lets users to automate simple actions such as refreshing


and printing documents, and also control processing with conditions which trigger
distribution when pre-defined events occur.

Users can choose to publish documents to the repository, on a web server or on


the server file system. Users with access to the repository can view documents
that BROADCAST AGENT has processed in BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE.
BROADCAST AGENT supports HTML publishing on the web, on channels and on
your intranet or extranet.

36) What is Info View ?

Ans: BUSINESSOBJECTS INFOVIEW is a business intelligence portal (BIP) that


collects and consolidates a company's BI information and presents it in a
secure, focused, and personalized view to users inside and outside an
organization.

INFOVIEW lets users personalize how they view, manage, and distribute
BI content. It is both a standalone business intelligence portal (BIP), as
well as a BI-content provider for enterprise information portals (EIPs).

________________________________________________________________________

37) Explain the Business Objects Deployment Architecture ?


Ans: The BUSINESSOBJECTS architecture has two components which are
fundamental to the product concept.
The Universe or Semantic layer enables end users to query corporate
data using everyday business terminology and without the need to
understand the underlying data structures. BUSINESSOBJECTS then
translates the objects chosen by the user into SQL using the definitions
and restrictions built into the universe definition by the universe
designer.

The Repository provides a central database of information required to


run an enterprise deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS. This includes
security, universe definition and corporate reports.
Business Objects tools can access information from anywhere within
your organization.

________________________________________________________________________

38) What is @Select Function ?


Ans: The @Select function is a pointer to the Select box properties of another
object.

It is used by placing the @Select in the Select field of the Edit Properties
box of an object, using the following syntax:
@Select(path of existing object)

You specify the path in the form Class_Name\Object_Name.


Its purpose is to allow you to re-use existing code. The advantage of
using this function is that it allows you to specify SQL code only once.

This has two key advantages:


It means that you have to maintain only one instance of the SQL
code.
It ensures consistency of the code.

________________________________________________________________________

39) What are the differences of Web Intelligence with Business Objects ?

Ans: WEBINTELLIGENCE only requires a Web Browser to be installed on the


client.
All intelligence is on the server, therefore, software need only be
installed on the server making support and administration more
centralized.

WEBINTELLIGENCE documents are always converted to HTML before


being sent to the client.

BUSINESSOBJECTS documents are always converted to HTML, PDF or


metafile before being sent to the client. These formats will result in
much smaller documents being sent across the network than Full Client
.rep documents. The exact format sent to the client is determined by
user settings for their WEBINTELLIGENCE session. If PDF or Metafile
format is selected a Java Applet (ActiveX control or Java Plug-in) will be
required to display the document. Web Browsers support the use of
such applets to extend the capabilities of the basic browser.

Q) Tell me about yourself, your employment history.


Q) How many years of experience do you have in BusObj? Versions?
Q) What was your role in the current project? Q) How many users were there?
Q) On a scale of 1 - 10, rate yourself on BUSOBJ? Q) Supervisor
Q) Designer
Q) BusObj
Q) Webi
Q) Broadcast Agent
Q) Business Query
Q) Were any experts called from BUSOBJ while you were on the project?

Q) What is BOmain.key?
A) A file that contains the address of the repository's security domain. This file must be distributed to all users
who will access the BusinessObjects repository to share universes and documents. By default, the bomain.key
is placed in the BusinessObjects\LocData folder on your system.

Supervisor Questions

Q) What is the Business Objects repository?


A) The Business Objects repository is a set of relational data structures stored on a database. It enables
Business Objects users to share resources in a controlled and secured environment.

Q) What is a domain? How many are there is a basic set up? What are they?
A) The repository is made up of three domains: the security domain, the universe domain, and the document
domain.

Q) When is the repository created?


A) The repository is created by the general supervisor with the Setup wizard during the first-time use of the
product. You can create and use more than one repository, typically to manage multiple sites.

Q) Can we have multiple domains? If yes. Purpose of having them?


A) Yes, Having multiple document domains can help with organization. If you stick with the 'canned'
document domain, all documents (BCA, user to user, corporate, universe lov's) all wind up sharing the same
domain/default table space. You can create separate domains with separate table spaces for the different types
of documents and reduce the risk of space related Repro problems and corruption. Also, you can reduce the
risk that problems corrupt your entire Repro.

Q) How do you restrict the users from using a particular universe, a class or object(s) of a universe, a particular
document etc?
Q) How do you restrict access to the rows of a database?
A) 1) In the User pane, click the user or group.
2) In the Resource pane, click the Universe tab.
3) Right-click the universe.
4) From the pop-up menu, click Properties.
5) In the Universe Properties dialog box, click the Rows tab.
6) Set the options as necessary.
7) Click OK.

Q) How do you Create a user?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the group in which you want to create a new user.
2) Click on the toolbar.
3) Type a user name, and press the Enter key.

Q) What are the types of user profiles and products can they use?
A) Supervisor offers standard profiles representing the various types of Business Objects users. The names of
the profiles, as well as their symbols, roles, and products are explained below. Profile) General Supervisor
Role) The Business Objects system administrator. This is the person who launches Supervisor for the first time.
The general supervisor creates the repository, defines users and groups, and manages resources. A general
supervisor is the sole user with a global view of the hierarchical organization.
Product) All Business Objects Products Profile) Supervisor Role) Defines users and group, manages resources,
and ensures security. A supervisor also assigns properties and resources to these users and groups. In
addition, a supervisor can restrict access to certain resources. A general supervisor can create several
supervisors. Product) Supervisor, BusinessObjects Profile) Supervisor-designer Role) Creates users, groups
and universes. This user has all the rights of the supervisor and designer combined.
Product) Supervisor, Designer, BusinessObjects Profile) Designer Role) Creates universes and distributes them
to end-users by sending them through the file system, or by exporting them to the repository. Product)
Designer, BusinessObjects Profile) User
Role) The main BusinessObjects user whose tasks are to query, report, and analyze data. Users can produce
documents containing data from one or more data sources. There can be an unlimited number of users.
Product) BusinessObjects Profile) Versatile Role) this user is authorized to use any combination of products
defined by a supervisor.

Q) How do you create a user group?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the group in which you want to create a new group.
2) Click on the toolbar.
3) Type a group name, and press the Enter key.

Q) How do you know if a user is Disabled?


A) A sad face means the user has disabled him/herself by failing the password check X number of times. A
user disabled intentionally via the Supervisor module will have a red circle X over him/her.

Q) How do you enable a User?


A) Right click on the disabled user and select enable.

Q) How many strikes does it take before a user disables themselves?


A) 3 is the default but a General Supervisor can change this setting in tools/options.
Q) What is a Category?
A) A keyword or phrase created by Supervisor and stored in the repository, which end-users can assign to
documents when they send them to users, groups, or Broadcast Agent. Users can then filter document searches
in the repository by assigned category.

Designer Questions
Q) What is a Universe?
A) A universe is a business-oriented mapping of the data structure found in databases: tables, columns, joins,
etc. It can represent any specific application, system, or group of users. For example, a universe can relate to a
department in a company such as marketing or accounting. In the BusinessObjects User module, universes
enable end users to build queries from which they can generate and perform analysis. Universes isolate end
users from the complexities of the database structure as well as the intricacies of SQL syntax.

Q) How many Universes did you create?


Q) Tell me how many classes where there, and objects in each class?

Q) What is an Object?
A) An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a derivation of data in the
database. Using objects, end users can build queries to generate reports.

Q) What is Object qualification?


A) For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of three types: dimension, detail,
or measure.

Q) Tell me about a complicated object you have created?


Q) What was the size of the database? Which server?
Q) What was the Database? Was it a data warehouse?
Q) What problems you have faced while creating a universe?
Q) Tell me an incident and how you went about solving it?
Q) How many Tables was the universe built?

Q) What is a loop, how do you resolve them?


A) A situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another in the universe.

Q) What do prefer an Alias or a context? Why?


A) Alias - A logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to resolve loops in the paths of
joins. A) Context - A context is a rule by which Designer can decide which of two paths to choose when more
than one path is possible from one table to another. Contexts can be used to resolve loops in the universe. You
can create contexts manually, or cause them to be detected by Designer. When contexts are useful, Designer
suggests a list of contexts that you can create.

Q) What is join? Explain different types of joins?


A) A relational operation that causes two tables with a common column to be combined into a single table.
Designer supports equi-joins, theta joins, outer joins, and shortcut joins.

Q) What are linked universes? Have you worked with them, problems faced and solutions?
A) Linked universes are universes that share common components such as parameters, classes, objects, or
joins. Among linked universes, one universe is said to be the kernel or master while the others are the derived
universes.
BusObj Questions
Q) How many reports have you created? Explain a few?

Q) What are alerter's, filters, breaks, conditions?


A) The Alerters dialog box allows you to create and apply alerters. Alerters use special formatting to make data
that fits specified conditions stand out from the rest of the data. This helps draw attention to trends and
exceptions in report data.
A) A filter enables you to hide the data you do not want to view and display only the data you want to focus
on. In the Apply a Filter on Variable Name dialog box, you choose which values of the selected variable you
want to display in the selected block.
A) Select the variables you want to use to insert a break. When you close the dialog box, the variable you select
is displayed in the Breaks dialog box. Break Level, sets the level that the block of data will have in the report.
You can have more than one break level to organize blocks of data. A) Conditions - feature that forces a query
to retrieve only the data that meets specified criteria.

Q) What's the difference between master-detail and Breaks?


Q) What's the difference between filters and conditions?
Q) What are pre-defined conditions? Compare with report conditions? Justify?
Q) What are the differences between a formula, variable and user objects?
Q) Did you face any problems while creating reports? Name? Solutions?
Q) How do you schedule the reports?

Q) What is a microcube? How many can a document have?


A) Local structure in which the data retrieved by a data provider is stored; contains the data users can display
in reports inside a document.
Q) Have you worked with multiple data sources? If yes. How do you link them?
Q) What are templates? Explain what you have created?
Q) How do you resolve #multivalue and #computation errors?

Q) Difference between Foreach and Forall?


A) Foreach - Adds a dimension to the calculation environment.
A) Forall - Specifies the dimensions you want to include in the calculation.

Q) Define a Cell, Block, and Section?

BUSINESS OBJECTS(DESIGNER)

1.Alias

A logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to resolve loops in the paths of joins.

2.Cardinality

Expresses the minimum and the maximum number of instances of an entity B that can be associated with an
instance of an entity A. The minimum and the maximum number of instances can be equal to 0,1, or N.

3.Cartesian product
A situation in which a query includes two or more tables that are not linked by a join. If executed, this type of
query retrieves all possible combinations between each table and may lead to inaccurate results.

4.Class

A logical grouping of objects and conditions within a universe. In general, the name of a class reflects a business
concept that conveys the category or type of objects.

5.Condition

A component that controls the type and the amount of data returned by a specific object in a query. A condition
created in the Designer module is referred to as a predefined condition.

6.Connection

Set of parameters that provides access to an RDBMS. These parameters include system information such as the
data account, user identification, and path to the database. Designer provides three types of connections: secured,
shared, and personal.

7.Context

A method by which Designer can decide which path to choose when more than one path is possible from one table
to another in the universe.

8.Detail object

An object qualified as a detail provides descriptive data about a dimension object. A detail object cannot be used
in drill down analysis.

9.Dimension object

An object being tracked in multidimensional analysis; the subject of the analysis. Dimensions are organized into
hierarchies.

10.Document domain

The area of the repository that stores documents, templates, scripts, and lists of values.

11.Drill

The action of navigating through levels of data. When you drill up, you obtain more summarized or general
information. By drilling down, you can reach more refined or detailed information.

12.Equi-join

A join based on the equality between the values in the column of one table and the values in the column of another.
Because the same column is present in both tables, the join synchronizes the two tables.

13.Enterprise mode

A work mode whereby a designer creates universes in an environment with a repository. The mode in which a
universe is saved determines whether other designers are able to access it. By default, a universe is saved in the
mode in which the designer is already working.

14.Hierarchy

An ordered series of related dimensions used for multidimensional analysis.

15.Join
A relational operation that causes two tables with a common column to be combined into a single table. Designer
supports equi-joins, theta joins, outer joins, and shortcut joins.

16.List of values

A list of values contains the data values associated with an object. These data values can originate from a
corporate database, or a flat file such as a text file or Excel file. In Designer you create a list of values by running
a query from the Query Panel. You can then view, edit, purge, refresh and even export this file. A list of values is
stored as an .lov file in a subfolder of the UserDocs folder.

17.Loop

A situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another in the universe.

18.Measure object

An object that is derived from an aggregate function. It conveys numeric information by which a dimension object
can be measured.

19.Object

A component that maps to data or a derivation of data in the database. For the purposes of multidimensional
analysis, an object can be qualified as a dimension, detail, or measure. Objects are grouped into classes.

20.Offline mode

The work mode in which the designer works with universes stored locally.

21.Online mode

The work mode appropriate for a networked environment in which the general supervisor has set up a repository.

22.Outer join

A join that links two tables, one of which has rows that do not match those in the common column of the other
table.

23.Personal connection

A personal connection is used to access resources such as universes or documents. It can be used only by the user
who created it. Information about a personal connection is stored in both the PDAC.LSI and PDAC.SSI files; its
definition is static and cannot be modified.

24.Qualification

A property of an object that determines how it can be used in multidimensional analysis. An object can be qualified
as one of three types: a dimension, detail or measure.

25.Query

In Designer a query is a technique for creating or modifying a list of values associated with an object. From the
Query Panel, a designer builds a query from the classes, objects, and conditions of a universe.In the
BusinessObjects User module, a query is a type of data provider. An end user builds a query from a universe, and
then runs the query to generate a BusinessObjects report.

26.Quick Design
A wizard in the Designer module that provides guided instructions for creating a basic universe. It lets a designer
name a universe, set up a connection to a database, select strategies, create classes and objects, as well as
generate joins with cardinalities.

27.Repository

A centralized set of relational data structures stored in a database. It enables BusinessObjects users to share
resources in a controlled and secured environment. The repository is made up of three domains: the security
domain, the universe domain, and the document domain.

28.Secured connection

A secured connection is used to access universes or documents that may be restricted or confidential.It can be
shared by several authorized users. Stored in the repository, the definition of a secured connection is updated
dynamically.

29.Shared connection

A shared connection is used to access common resources such as universes or documents. It can be used by several
users. Information about a shared connection is stored in a SDAC.LSI or SDAC.SSI file; its definition is updated
dynamically.

30.Shortcut join

A join that links two tables by bypassing one or more other tables in the universe.

31.Strategy

Scripts that automatically extract structural information about tables, columns, joins, or cardinalities from a
database. Designer provides default strategies but a designer can also create strategies. These are referred to as
external strategies.

32.Structure pane

The graphical component within the main Designer window that shows the schema of the universe. It reflects the
underlying database structure of the universe.

33.Subclass

A component within a class that groups objects. A subclass can itself contain other subclasses or objects.

34.Table Browser

The graphical component within the main Designer window that lets you create the classes and objects of the
universe from the tables and columns of a database.

35.Theta join

A join that links tables based on a relationship other than equality between two columns.

36.Universe

A mapping of the data structure found in databases: tables, columns, joins, etc. A universe, which is made up of
classes, objects, and conditions, can represent any specific application, system, or group of users.

37.Universe domain

The area of the repository that holds exported universes. The universe domain makes it possible to store,
distribute, and administrate universes. There may be multiple universe domains in a repository.
38.Universe pane

The graphical component within the main Designer window that displays a hierarchical view of the classes, objects,
and conditions in a universe.Two radio buttons on the lower edge of the pane filter the display of the components.
One button, the Classes/Objects filter, provides a view of the classes and objects. The other button,
Classes/Conditions, provides a view of the classes and conditions.

39.User object

An object created by the end user from the BusinessObjects User module. A user object can be inserted into a
universe by the designer.

40.Workgroup mode

A work mode whereby a designer creates universes in an environment without a repository. The mode in which a
universe is saved determines whether other designers are able to access it. By default, a universe is saved in the
mode in which the designer is already working.

41.What is Designer?

Designer is a BusinessObjects IS module used by universe designers to create and maintain universes. Universes
are the semantic layer that isolates end users from the technical issues of the database structure.Universe
designers can distribute universes to end users by moving them as files through the file system, or by exporting
them to the repository.

42.How do you design a universe?

The design method consists of two major phases. During the first phase, you create the underlying database
structure of your universe. This structure includes the tables and columns of a database and the joins by which
they are linked. You may need to resolve loops which occur in the joins using aliases or contexts. You can conclude
this phase by testing the integrity of the overall structure.During the second phase, you can proceed to enhance
the components of your universe. You can also prepare certain objects for multidimensional analysis. As with the
first phase, you should test the integrity of your universe structure. You may also wish to perform tests on the
universes you create from the BusinessObjects User module. Finally, you can distribute your universes to users by
exporting them to the repository or via your file system.For a universe based on a simple relational schema,
Designer provides Quick Design, a wizard for creating a basic yet complete universe. You can use the resulting
universe immediately, or you can modify the objects and create complex new ones. In this way, you can gradually
refine the quality and structure of your universe.

43.How do you define universe parameters?

The first step in creating a universe is to specify its parameters. These parameters include the definition of a
universe, which is comprised of:the universe name a description of the universe a connection to an RDBMS You
enter universe parameters from the Universe Parameters dialog box. This dialog box also lets you set up database
options, external strategies, graphic options, and print settings.

44.How do you select tables and columns?

You create the initial classes and objects of your universe by selecting them from the tables and columns listed in
the Table Browser, and inserting them into the Structure pane.Depending on the database connection parameters,
the browser presents you with a list of database tables and columns.

Note: Before selecting tables, you should indicate the strategies you wish to use in creating your universe.

45.How do you test the integrity of a universe?


With the Check Integrity command, you can test the structure of your active universe. This means testing to
determine whether its components are accurate and up-to-date.

Check Integrity serves the following purposes:

It detects any inconsistencies in the objects, joins, conditions, and cardinalities of your universe. It detects
whether there are any loops in the joins. It determines whether changes were made to the database to which the
universe is connected.

46.What is a universe?

A universe is a business-oriented mapping of the data structure found in databases: tables, columns, joins, etc. It
can represent any specific application, system, or group of users. For example, a universe can relate to a
department in a company such as marketing or accounting.In the BusinessObjects User module, universes enable
end users to build queries from which they can generate and perform analysis.Universes isolate end users from the
complexities of the database structure as well as the intricacies of SQL syntax.

47.What is aggregate awareness?

Aggregate awareness is a feature that makes use of predefined aggregate tables to enhance the performance of
SQL transactions. It is used to improve the speed by which aggregates are calculated in the database.To set up
aggregate awareness in a universe, you define or more objects using the @Aggregate_Aware function. The syntax
for this function is as follows:

@Aggregate_Aware(aggregate_table_1, ... aggregate_table_n)The arguments of this function are all the names of
alternative aggregate tables. When you formulate the syntax, you should be aware of the order of the arguments.
The precedence is from left to right; this means that BusinessObjects determines the aggregate to use beginning
from the leftmost argument.As a general rule, you should enter the most aggregate table as the first argument,
the next most aggregate table as the second argument, and so on.You must then use the Aggregate Navigation
editor to set up a list of incompatible objects and/or incompatible conditions for each aggregate table in your
universe. These are the components that cannot be used with an aggregate table.You can either set up these lists
manually, or cause the list of objects to be detected by Designer.

48.What is multidimensional analysis?

Multidimensional analysis is a technique for manipulating data in order to view it from different perspectives and
on different levels of detail. In BusinessObjects, multidimensional analysis involves drill mode and slice-and-dice
mode, and is enabled by the Analyzer and Explorer components of the User module.To set up a universe for
multidimensional analysis, you must define hierarchies and dimensions that determine how users view and analyze
the data.A dimension is simply the object to be tracked. A dimension can be an object such as Country, Region, and
City. A hierarchy is an ordered series of related dimensions. An example of a hierarchy is Geography, which may
group dimensions such as Country, Region, and City.

49.What are classes?

A class is a logical grouping of objects within a universe. In general, the name of a class reflects a business concept
that conveys the category or type of objects. For example, in a universe pertaining to human resources, one class
might be Employees.A class can be further divided into subclasses. In the human resources universe, a subclass of
the Employees class could be Personal Information.As designer, you are free to define hierarchies of classes and
subclasses in a model that best reflects the business concepts of your organization.

50.What are objects?


An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a derivation of data in the database.
Using objects, end users can build queries to generate reports.The name of an object suggests a concept drawn
from the terminology of a business or discipline. For a human resources manager, objects might be Employee Name,
Address, Salary, or Bonus, while for a financial analyst, objects might be Profit Margin, Return on Investment,
etc.For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of three types: dimension, detail, or
measure.

51.What is a list of values?

A list of values contains the data values associated with an object. These data values can originate from a
corporate database, or a flat file such as a text file or Excel file. In Designer you create a list of values by running
a query from the Query Panel. You can then view, edit, purge, refresh, and even export this file. A list of values is
stored as an .lov file in a subfolder of the UserDocs folder.

52.What is the SQL editor?

The SQL editor lets you enter or modify an SQL statement for either the Select statement or Where clause. To
invoke this editor, click the button to the right of either the Select or Where text box. You can type the SQL
statement directly in the text box located in the upper part of the editor window. Or you can formulate your
syntax by using any combination of the following elements: tables, columns, classes, objects, operators, or
functions. To select an element (and cause it to appear in the text box) double-click it in the appropriate pane.The
functions listed in the Functions pane include the native SQL functions of your RDBMS as well as BusinessObjects
@ functions. For further information on @ functions, click .By clicking on a function, you can view its syntax and
purpose; this information is displayed in the Description box.

53.Create a universe using the Quick Design wizard

1 Click the button on the Standard toolbar.

2 Follow the wizard through a series of dialog boxes to create a basic universe.

Notes: If you intend to export the universe, you must select Secured as the connection
type. If you click the File/New starts Quick Design wizard check box in the General tab
(Tools menu, Options command) the New command automatically launches the Quick Design

54.What are the components of the Designer interface?

In Designer, you create a universe using three areas: the Universe pane - the Structure pane - the Table Browser -

The Universe pane displays the components of the universe from the point of view of BusinessObjects; that is the
classes, objects, and conditions.The Structure pane reflects the underlying database structure of the universe
including the tables, columns, and joins.The Table Browser is the component that lets you create the classes and
objects of the universe from the tables and columns of a database.

55.What are the visualization options available?

Designer contains a variety of features for organizing and viewing the tables and columns in the Structure pane.
Among these features are:

List Mode, which adds three panes to the Structure pane. These panes are for viewing the names of tables, joins,
and contexts. When you click a component in a pane, its corresponding graphical representation in the schema is
highlighted. Graphic options, which let you customize the shape or appearance of the tables, columns, joins, and
cardinalities in the Structure pane. Arrange tables, a feature that reorganizes the tables in the Structure pane so
as to produce an orderly display. Gridlines, a command that displays a grid, which you can use to align tables in the
Structure pane.
Table (Column) Values, commands that display the data values associated with a particular table or
column.

56.Create a database connection

1 Select the Connections command from the Tools menu.

2 Click the Add button.

3 In the Add a connection dialog box, click the name of the network driver, then click OK.connection dialog box
specific to your RDBMS appears. It is made up of two tabs: Login and Advanced. In each tab, the parameters
shown depend on the network driver you selected. For more information, click .

4 Type or select the connection parameters in the appropriate boxes, and click OK.Connections dialog box appears
once again. It displays the connection you just created.

5 Click OK.

57.Modify a database connection

1 Select the Connections command from the Tools menu.

2 Click the connection.

3 Click the Edit button.

4 In the dialog box, type or select the connection parameters in the appropriate boxes, and click ok.The
Connections dialog box appears once again. It displays the connection you just modified.

5 Click OK.

58.Delete a database connection

1 Select the Connections command from the Tools menu.

2 Click a previously defined connection.

3 Click the Remove button.dialog box prompts you to confirm the action.

4 Click Yes.

59.How do you specify strategies?

A strategy is a script that automatically extracts structural information from a database. Designer provides a
number of default strategies you can use. These are strategies for extracting joins, detecting cardinalities, and
creating default classes and objects. Options for indicating default strategies are located in the Database tab of
the Options dialog box.You can also create your own strategies. Such strategies are referred to as external
strategies. With an external strategy, you can specify the exact way that objects and joins are to be extracted
from the database structure. The strategy you use, for example, can be a script generated from a CASE Access
tool. An external strategy is specific to one RDBMS.

60.Specify default strategies

1 Select the Options command from the Tools menu.

2 Click the Database tab.


3 In the Default Creation box, select the default strategies you want.

Option Description

Extract joins with tables. Retrieves tables with the joins that link them according to a join strategy. Detect
cardinalities in joins. Detects the cardinalities inherent in the joins. Create default classes and objects
from tables. Causes classes and objects to be generated in the Universe pane when you insert tables in the
Structure pane. If you select one or more options, Designer uses the corresponding strategies specified in the
Strategies tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box:

Option Description

Objects The strategy creates classes, and names them based on the tables in the database; it also creates
objects, and names them based on the columns in the database. It replaces all underscore characters (_) with
spaces.

Joins From the list box, select a join strategy. A description is displayed below the name of the current
strategy.

Tables Reads the table structure from the database system tables.

61.How do you specify external strategies?

With an external strategy, you can specify the exact way that objects and joins are to be extracted from the
database structure.All external strategies are contained within the same text file. The name of this text file is
indicated in the .prm file specific to your RDBMS. In the .prm file, the strategy file is declared as follows:

STG=[StrategyFileName] where StrategyFileName is the name of the strategy file. An external strategy, whether
for objects or for joins, is made up of the following sections:

a name and description (These are visible in the Strategies tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box.)

a type parameter: object or join

an SQL parameter or file parameter

an optional parameter that points to a connection other than the

universe connection. An external strategy can be based on SQL or a file.After you have set
up external strategies, you can specify them from the Quick Design wizard. Or you can
specify them from the Strategies tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box.

62.Insert tables in the Structure pane

1 Select the Tables command from the Insert menu.

2 In the Table Browser, click the tables you want to add to the universe structure.select several contiguous tables,
hold down the Shift key, then click the first table and the last table. All the tables between the selected tables
will be highlighted. To select several tables that are not contiguous, click each table while holding down the Ctrl
key.

3 Click the Insert button.

63.View the Structure pane in List Mode

Select the List Mode command from the View menu.panes (Tables, Joins, and Contexts) are added above the
display of the schema. When you click a component in one of these panes, Designer highlights its graphical
representation in the schema, and vice-versa.
64.Modify graphic options

1 Select the Options command from the Tools menu.

2 Click the Graphics tab.

3 Select the graphic options you want.

4 Click OK.

64.Arrange tables in the Structure pane

Select the Arrange Tables command from the View menu.

65.Display gridlines in the Structure pane

Select the Gridlines command from the View menu.

66.View the values of tables

1 In the Structure pane, click the table whose values you wish to view.

2 Select the Table Values command from the View menu.displays a window, which lists all the values for each
column in the table. With the check box Distinct Values, you can filter the display so that only unique values are
shown.

67.View the values of columns

1 In the Structure pane, place the pointer on the column whose values you wish to view.may wish to enlarge the view
of the columns by applying the Zoom In command one or more times. This makes it easier to select a column.

2 Click the right mouse button.pop-up menu appears.

3 From the pop-up menu, select the View Column Values command.displays a window, which lists all the values for
the column. With the check box, Distinct Values, you can filter the display so that only unique values are shown.

68.What join types are supported?

Designer supports the following types of joins: equi-joins, outer joins, theta joins, and shortcut joins.In addition to
join strategies, Designer provides several other methods for creating or editing joins:the Detect Joins command
tracing the joins manually the Edit Join dialog box the formula bar

69.Create joins automatically

1 Select the Detect Joins command from the Tools menu.Candidate Joins dialog box appears. It displays the joins
that were detected according to the join strategy set for the universe. By default, all the joins are selected.

2 Insert the joins by doing any of the following: Select one join by clicking it, and then click the Insert button.
Select several contiguous joins. Hold down the Shift key, then click the first and last join. All the joins between
the selected joins will be highlighed. Click the Insert button. Select several joins that are not contiguous.
Click each join while holding down the Ctrl key. Click the Insert button. Select all highlighted joins, and then click
the Insert.

3 Click the Close button to dismiss the dialog box.joins appear in the Structure pane.

70.Trace a join manually

1 Position the mouse pointer over the column to be the source of the join.pointer is transformed into a hand
symbol.
2 Click the column with the left mouse button.column is highlighted.

3 While keeping the left mouse button pressed, drag the join which begins to appear away from the source column
toward the destination column.pointer is transformed into a pencil.

4 Position the pencil over the column to be the destination of the join.

5 When the second column is highlighted, release the mouse button.join between the two tables is created.

71.Create a join with the Edit Join dialog box

1 Select the Join command from the Insert menu.

2 In the list boxes, Table1 and Table2, select the tables.

3 Click the list box and select an operator.

4 In the list boxes below each table, select the column that is to link Table1 to Table2.

5 Check the validity of the join by clicking the Parse button.

6 Click the OK button.

72.Edit a join with the Edit Join dialog box

1 Double-click the join.

2 In the Edit Join dialog box, modify the definition of the join as needed.

3 Check the validity of the join by clicking the Parse button.

4 Click the OK button.

73.Edit a join with the formula bar

1 Click the join that you want to edit.formula for the join appears in the formula bar.

2 Click the entry area of the formula bar, and edit the formula.

3 Press the Enter key to exit from the formula bar.

Note: By default, the formula bar is activated. To deactivate it, select the Formula Bar command from the View
menu.

74.Delete a join

1 Click the join.

2 Do one of the following:

Press the backspace key on your keyboard - Press the Delete key on your keyboard - Select the Clear command.

Note: Be careful when deleting a join. Deleting one or more joins may have undesirable consequences on the overall
structure of your universe.

75.What are cardinalities?

Cardinality expresses the minimum and maximum number of instances of an entity B that can be associated with an
instance of an entity A. The minimum and the maximum number of instances can be equal to 0, 1, or N.Because a
join represents a bidirectional relationship, it must always have two cardinalities. If you selected the Detect
cardinalities in joins options in the Database tab of the Options dialog box, Designer detects and retrieves the
cardinalities of the joins. If you do not use this option, you can still retrieve the cardinalities for one or all joins in
the universe.There are two main methods for detecting or editing cardinalities:

the Detect Cardinalities command - the Edit Join dialog box

76.Detect cardinalities

You can detect the cardinalities for one join or for all the joins in the universe. For a single join, click it, and in the
Edit Join dialog box, click the Detect button. To detect the cardinalities for all joins:

1 Select the Detect Cardinalities command from the Tools menu. A dialog box prompts you to confirm the action
for all the joins of the universe.

2 Click the OK button.

Note: The Graphics tab of the Options dialog box contains a number of options for the display of cardinalities in
the Structure pane.

77.What are loops?

A loop is a situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another. Loops result in
ambiguity in the design of a universe. Designer enables you to identify loops in one of two ways: You can run the
Check Integrity function, which indicates the existence of any loops.You can select the Detect Loops command
from the Tools menu. If there are loops, the Loop Detection viewer appears; it indicates the joins causing a
loop.You can then use aliases or contexts to resolve the loops in your universe.

78.What are aliases?

An alias is a logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to resolve loops in the paths of
joins. In some cases, more than one alias may be necessary for a given table. As you create aliases, Designer may
prompt you to create other aliases. This occurs when the new aliases result in the need for additional aliases; in
other words, creating such aliases entails the propagation of other aliases.In such a situation, two options are
available to you:You can cause only the first table proposed to be aliased You can alias all the tables listed (i.e.
propagate the aliases)Designer displays an alias in the Structure pane as a table. It links an aliased table to
existing tables, re-arranging joins, as necessary.

79.Create an alias automatically

1 Select the Detect Aliases command from the Tools menu.Candidate Alias dialog box appears.

2 In the left pane of the dialog box, click the first table that you wish to alias.right pane displays the alias name(s)
Designer suggests for the table you selected. To give an alias a different name, click the Rename button, and enter
the new name.

3 Click the Create button.message box prompts you to confirm the creation of the alias(es). In some cases, a dialog
box may prompt you to propagate additional aliases.

4 Click the OK button.

5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 for the remaining tables (if any).

6 Click Close to dismiss the dialog box.

Notes: Before using Detect Aliases, check to see that all the tables in the universe are already linked by joins.
Before using Detect Aliases, be sure that Designer has already detected all the cardinalities of joins; if this is not
the case, select the Detect Cardinalities command from the Tools menu.
80.Create an alias manually

1 In the Structure pane, click the table for which you want to create an alias.

2 Select the Alias command from the Insert menu.dialog box appears prompting you to enter a name for the aliased
table.

3 Enter a new name for the aliased table, or keep the one proposed.

4 Click OK.aliased table appears in the Structure pane.

Note: If you create an alias manually, you must also create the joins necessary to link it to the other tables.

81.What are contexts?

A context is a rule by which Designer can decide which of two paths to choose when more than one path is possible
from one table to another. Contexts can be used to resolve loops in the universe. You can create contexts manually,
or cause them to be detected by Designer. When contexts are useful, Designer suggests a list of contexts that you
can create.

82.Create a context automatically

1 Select the Detect Contexts command from the Tools menu.Candidate Contexts dialog box is displayed.

2 In the left pane of the dialog box, click the name of the first context you wish to create. Click the Add
button.context is displayed in the right pane. You can remove any context from the right pane by selecting it, and
then clicking the Remove button.4 Repeat steps 2 and 3, if applicable, to add the other contexts.

5 If you wish to rename a context, select it from the right pane, and then click the Rename button.Rename Context
dialog box appears from which you can enter a new name.

6 Click the OK button.Structure pane is displayed in List Mode. This lets you view the contexts you created.

83.Create a context manually

1 Select the Context command from the Insert menu.

2 In the New Context dialog box, type a name for the context in the text box.

3 In the Current context join list box, click all the joins defining the context.can click the Detect button for
assistance; it shows the joins making up a context and suggests a name for it.

4 If you wish to see all the joins you selected, click the Show selected only option.view makes it easy to see the
joins you selected. To return to the previous view, click the option again.

5 Click OK.context is created.

84.How do you test the integrity of a universe?

With the Check Integrity command, you can test the structure of your active universe. This means testing to
determine whether its components are accurate and up-to-date. Check Integrity serves the following purposes: It
detects any inconsistencies in the objects, joins, conditions, and cardinalities of your universe. It detects whether
there are any loops in the joins. It determines whether changes were made to the database to which the universe
is connected.

85.Run check integrity

1 Select the Check Integrity command from the Tools menu. Integrity Check dialog box appears.

2 In the dialog box, click the component(s) to be checked by clicking the corresponding check boxes.Check All
causes all the options to be checked.
3 Click the parse level.parsing checks only the syntax of a component Thorough parsing checks both the syntax and
semantics of a component. Of the two options, the latter may take longer to run. Click OK.

Note: Options for running Check Integrity automatically are available in the Options dialog box (Tools menu).

86.Create a class manually

1 Click the class after which you want the new class to appear in the Universe pane.

2 Select the Class command from the Insert menu.Edit Properties dialog box appears.

3 Enter the name of the class in the Class Name text box.

4 Enter information about the class in the Description text box. Click the OK button.
Notes: A class appears within the Universe pane with a symbol. If you insert a class in
an opened class, it becomes a subclass of this class. Otherwise, it appears

There are two ways to solve a fan trap problem.


Alias for Sale
Contexts to separate
the query
Resolving Join Problems
Designers Guide 219
Create an alias for the table containing the initial aggregation, then use Detect
Contexts (Tools > Detect Contexts) to detect and propose a context for the alias
table and a context for the original table. This is the most effective way to solve
the fan trap problem.
Altering the SQL parameters for the universe. This only works for measure
objects.

Create a join between the original table and the alias table.
If you create a one-to-one join, DESIGNER does not detect the context, and you
must build the context manually.

The Check Integrity function sends a request to the database for a list of tables.
It then compares this list with the tables in the universe. It carries out the same
action for columns.

Whats the significance of the "Database format" option in the object properties--> Advanced?

@Functions specific to Business Objects products.Available functions are listed under the Functions entry in the parameters

(.PRM) file for the target database. There is a .PRM file for each supported database. They are stored in the Data Access

folder in the usinessObjects path. You can add or modify the available functions by editing the .PRM file. Know how to modify

and if there are any limitations on this feature?

Right click on the object-->Object format. Here we can define the format. Which format takes precedence? The one defined here

or the one set at the reporter level when a report is created?

Can we associate list of values for a measure?


How are measures different from dimensions and details?
Measures differ from dimensions and details in the following ways:
Measures are dynamic
Measures can project aggregates

Measures infer a Group By clause


When you run a query that includes a measure object with other types of objects, a Group By clause is automatically inferred

in the Select statement. The inference of the Group By clause depends on the following SQL rule:

If the Select clause line contains an aggregate, everything outside of that aggregate in the clause must also appear in the

Group By clause.

When will an LOV file be created? If


Based on this rule, any dimension or detail used in the same query as a measure object will always be included in an

automatically inferred Group By clause. To ensure that the query returns correct results, dimension and detail objects must

NOT contain aggregates.

Some customers complaint that Group By clause is not generated. Check those scenarios?

Understand the aggregations set at the object properties level and at the select statement level?

What is the advantage of resctricting the object values at the designer level. Object Properties->Edit and set a particular

value for it. But when a report is generated, all the values for that object are returned instead of restricted values.

Note: Apart from self restricting joins, you should not create a join in a Where clause. A join in a Where clause is not

considered by Detect Contexts (automatic context detection) or aggregate aware incompatibility detection. You should ensure

that all joins are visible in the Structure pane. This ensures that all joins are available to the DESIGNER automatic

detection tools.

Get more on @prompts?

The @Aggregate_Aware function allows an object to take advantage of tables containing summary data in the database. If your

database contains summary tables and you are running queries that return aggregate data, it is quicker to run a Select

statement on the columns that contain summary data rather than on the columns that contain fact or event data.

Note: VBA macros can only run in a Windows environment.

Cross check if the VBA macros are supported in WebI or not?

In the page number 290, the explanation is given on "how to restrict the information based on the user logged onto BO.

@Variable function with text file variables:

You use @Variable function in the Where clause of an object to reference a variable in an associated text file. This allows

you to define user specific conditions on an object. To use this variable, BUSINESSOBJECTS needs to be launched by a command

line that includes the -VARs parameter. You will need to change the command line in Windows shortcuts on all PCs that use

this feature. Note: Ensuring that BUSINESSOBJECTS is launched by a command line makes using the @Variable function difficult

to maintain for universe deployments of more than a few users. If you have more than a few users, or a geographically diverse
user base, you should not use @functions with associated text files to implement restrictions.
Syntax:

You use the following syntax for the @Variable function:


You use @Variable function with an associated text file as follows:
To use a @Variable function with an associated text file
1. Create a text file that contains a list of variables with the corresponding values.
Use the following format:
Variable name = value
2. Add the following to a command line used to start BUSINESSOBJECTS:
Busobj.exe -vars text_file_name.txt
For example, if you have a text file called Bovars.txt, you would type the
following:
C:\BusinessObjects\Busobj.exe -vars Bovars.txt

The -vars syntax is a switch that tells the operating system to load the text file into memory for use by BUSINESSOBJECTS.
Note: The Busobj.exe -vars text_file_name.txt syntax only applies if you store the text file in the BusinessObjects path. If

you store the text file anywhere else on your computer, or on a server, you must specify the full file path. 3. Open the Edit

Properties sheet for the object that you want to reference the text variable. 4. Insert the @Variable on the operand side of

the condition in the Where clause.

For example;
COUNTRY.COUNTRY_NAME = @Variable(Country)
Country is the name of the variable in the text file.

5. Click OK and save the universe.


Advantages using the @Variable function with text file variables? The principle advantage for using the @Variable function

with text file variables is that you can update the values for the variables in the text file without making any changes to

the universe.

Disadvantages using the @Variable function with text file variables You have a number of important disadvantages using this

function: @Variable(variable name) Defining Objects

The command string must be changed on every client post to include the -vars <textfile.txt> argument. Security can be a

problem, as a text file on a PC can be modified locally. Given the number of potential problems using the @Variable function

with text variables, you should use the security options available in Supervisor to control access to data if you are using

Business Objects products in an enterprise environment.

Note: No default list of values is assigned to measure objects.

When a condition is first placed on an object in the Query panel that requires a list of values to be displayed in either

DESIGNER or BUSINESSOBJECTS, a SELECT DISTINCT statement is run against the appropriate columns inferred by the object,
and

the list of values is returned.

A.LOV file is automatically created in the User Docs folder to hold the list values. The next time that the list of values is

required for the object in either DESIGNER or BUSINESSOBJECTS, the values are returned from the.LOV file and not from the
database.
Export with
universe
When selected, the.LOV file associated with the object is exported with the universe to the repository. The universe
domain and document domain must exist on the same data account. A list of values is stored in the document domain. The

document domain does not have to be visible to the a users profile in SUPERVISOR. You must create the list of values that

is associated with the object for it to be exported. This list is saved as a.LOV file.

In the repository, .LOV files are stored in a document domain that must have a matching universe domain in the same database

account.

How is an exported .LOV used in BusinessObjects or WebIntelligence? When a user runs a query in BUSINESSOBJECTS or

WEBINTELLIGENCE using an object that is associated with a .LOV file exported from DESIGNER, the list of values that is

returned for the object is determined by one of the following:

The data contained in the .LOV file.


The SQL for the SELECT DISTINCT query defined in the .LOV file.
If you have created a condition in DESIGNER to restrict the data values returned for an object, the restricted list appears,

and not the default list of all the data values. The list retains all conditions and formatting implemented in DESIGNER. If

you had not exported the .LOV file with the universe, then the object would simply return the default list with no conditions

and formatting. A default .LOV file would then be created to hold the data.

What happens if we disabled the option Edit list of values?

Note: When you export a .LOV file to the repository, it is copied to a sub-directory of the UserDocs folder on the repository

server. The path for the sub directory is the same as the path for the exported universe on the repository server. For

example if the universe is stored in the following directory: \Universe\<key file name>\<universe domain name>\<universe

name>

An exported .LOV file for the universe is stored in the following path: \UserDocs\<key file name>\<universe domain

name>\<universe name>\<lovfilename.LOV>

Know about the customization of LOVs? Page around 314.

Aggregate awareness is a term that describes the ability of a universe to make use of aggregate tables in a database. These

are tables that contain pre-calculated data. You can use a function called @Aggregate_Aware in the Select statement for an

object that directs a query to be run against aggregate tables rather than a table containing non aggregated data. Using

aggregate tables speeds up the execution of queries, improving the performance of SQL transactions.

Here the aggregated tables mean "Fact Table"?

Discuss about the flow chart given in the page 325.

Building the aggregate awareness:

Building the objects: The first step in setting up aggregate awareness in a universe is to determine which objects are to be

aggregate aware. You can use either measure objects or dimension objects.
What is an aggreagte table?

What is the need to go for Aggregate Aware and do we use only sum within Aggregate function?

Resolving loops using contexts in a database that contains aggregate tables:

When a database contains one or more aggregate tables, you should resolve any loops using contexts.

Linking images in BusinessObjects: The format can be either Bitmap (.BMP) or .TIF. Check if we can use different formats in

6.x?

Can we link full client report and webi document? check the around page number 355.

An analytic function is a function that performs an analytical task on a result set that can be divided into ordered groups

of rows or partitions.Full description of analytic functions refer to your RDBMS documentation.

In DESIGNER5.x, you can define analytic functions for the following function
families:
Ranking
Accumulative aggregation
Ratio, Ratio to Report, or Reporting Aggregate

Before using an analytic function, you should verify that it is listed RDBMS section of the PRM file. If it is not listed,

you can add the name of the function to the list. DESIGNER will then support its use in the Select statement for an object.

that the following parameters and values are present:

OVER_CLAUSE = Y Generates the appropriate SQL (OVER_CLAUSE).


RISQL_FUNCTIONS = <list of functions used> Analytic functions available. (RISQL is for DB2.This name changes from RDBMS
to

another).

Rules for using Analytic functions:

Rule Description
Analytic functions cannot appear in a GROUP BY clause. Aggregate functions such as SUM defined in the analytic function

are used in the GROUP BY clause, but an analytic function such as

RANK will not be used. To ensure that analytic functions are not used

in GROUP BY clause, they are listed after the RISQL FUNCTIONS

parameter in the PRM file. The OVER_CLAUSE preceding it must be set to Y.

This is the default setting.

Analytic functions must not generate a GROUP BY clause. If you add an analytic function to the Functions section in the
PRM file (to populate the list of functions in the Edit SQL
dialog box), you must ensure that the GROUP CLAUSE is set to N.

This will prevent it from generating a GROUP BY clause. See the

section Inserting Syntax Automatically in Select Statements on page

372 for more information.


If an analytic function uses an aggregate
function, all the dimensions used by the
analytic function will appear in the GROUP BY
clause.
For example; RANK() OVER (PARTITION BY year ORDER BY SUM(sales). The

GROUP BY clause will contain the dimension year even if the rank function is

used alone in a query.

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

You can not use the functions @prompt and @variable in the definition of an object that also uses analytic functions.

Analytic functions are not supported as user objects in BUSINESSOBJECTS (Reporter). If you add an analytic function to the

Functions section in the PRM file (to populate the list of functions in the Edit SQL dialog box), you must ensure that IN

MACRO is set to N. Check what happens if that parameter is set to Y.

Objects that use analytic functions cannot be used as a condition or in a sort. If end users try to use these objects to

define a condition, they will receive a SQL error message. You can prevent the end user from using an object in either a

condition or a sort by editing the object properties as follows: Go to properties of that object-->Advanced tab-->check only

the option "Result" and uncheck the remainig "Condition", "Sort" under the field "Can be used In".
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

External Strategies: External strategy files are declared in the STG section of Parameter files (.PRM).

The PRM file is a parameter file used to configure universe creation and SQL query generation in BUSINESSOBJECTS and

WEBINTELLIGENCE products.

External strategy files are named according to the following convention: StxxxxEN.txt

Where St means strategy, xxxx is an abbreviation for the RDBMS, and EN is the language in which Business Objects products are

installed (EN =English, FR=French, GE=German).


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Optional parameters: You can enter a parameter within a [CONNECTION] section to indicate a database connection. Note that the

connection type must be personal. Here is an

example:
[CONNECTION]
NAME=MyPersonalConnection

You can enter the following parameter under the [STRATEGY] section in order to skip the screen in the Quick Design wizard

that deals with the creation of measures:

SKIP_MEASURES=Y
Both of these parameters are optional.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Creating an External Strategy from a Flat File:

[STRATEGY]
TYPE=OBJECT
NAME= MyMetaData Candidate Objects Strategy
[FILE]
NAME=C:\Path\MyFlatFile
[HELP]
HELP= This strategy reads metadata and creates a list of

Optional Parameters: By default, the separator for the columns in a flat file is a tabulation. If you want to use a different

character, you can enter a parameter within the [FILE] section.

Here is an example:
SEPARATOR=,

where the separator is a special character; in this case, a comma (,). You can enter the following parameter under the

[STRATEGY] section in order to skip the screen in the Quick Design wizard that deals with the creation of measures:
SKIP_MEASURES=Y

Study the output formats of the strategies


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

You can lock a universe from the Import or Export dialog box. When you do so, the universe is displayed beside a padlock

symbol. When another designer locks the universe, the padlock symbol becomes dimmed. The lock mechanism is an attribute of

the universe stored in the universe domain. It ensures that only one designer can update or modify a universe so that no
collisions occur.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

The revision number:

Each time you export a universe to a universe domain, DESIGNER increments the revision number of the universe. In this way,

you can determine which is the latest version of the universe. Where can we find this revision number?

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Will repository store the reps and uvs or only ids and simple data?

Incremental Exports:

The procedure given above exports an entire universe to a universe domain. In certain cases, DESIGNER is able to export a

universe incrementally, meaning that it takes into account only the modifications made since the last export. This can
occur especially when such changes are minor. To enable DESIGNER to carry out incremental exports, select the Options
command from the Tools menu. Then in the General tab click the Allow incremental export check box.

Suppose you want to migrate a universe from a development domain to a production domain.

To do so, you export the universe to the production domain. The first time you export the universe the operation is
successful. However, the second time you attempt to do this a conflict arises; DESIGNER detects that there is an existing
universe with the same file name but different ID.

A general supervisor can help you overcome this restriction by setting the option Work with Universe Overrides in SUPERVISOR.

Thereafter, when you export the universe, DESIGNER prompts you to replace the existing universe.

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Migrating a Derived Universe to Another Domain:

Lets say you have two dynamically linked universes: a core universe and a derived universe based on this core. You wish to

migrate the derived universe from a development domain to a production domain.

For the purposes of simplification, lets say the two domains are named Development and Production respectively. Thus,

there are corresponding subfolders named Development and Production in the Universe folder. The steps for carrying out the

migration are as follows:

1. Export the core universe to the Production domain. As a result of the export, you now have two universe files: one in the
Development folder, the other in the Production folder; both are identical except for the ID.

2. Link the derived universe in the Development folder to the core universe in the Production folder.

Use the Change Source button in the Links tab of the Universe Parameters dialog box to change the source universe.
As a result, the derived universe references the core universe in the Production folder. (It now references the universe in
BusinessObjects\Universe\Production.)

3. Export the derived universe to the Production domain. After the export, you have two universe files, both of which

reference the core universe in the Production domain.

4. Open the derived universe in the Development folder.


5. Link this derived universe back to the core universe in the Development folder. At this point you can convert your

development documents to production documents. To do so, change the source universe of these documents to the new
derived universe in the Production folder.

You cannot save dynamically linked universes in workgroup mode. Therefore, before migrating such universes to another

repository, you must first remove the link and then include the contents of the core universe within the derived universe.

For information on performing this action, see the section Including One Universe within Another on page 417.

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Linked universes are universes that share common components such as parameters, classes, objects, or joins. Among linked

universes, one universe is said to be the kernel or master universe while the others are the derived universes.

A kernel or master universe represents a re-usable library of components. Derived universes may contain some or all the

components of the kernel or master universe, in addition to any components that have been added to it.

Approaches to linking universes.You can use one of three approaches when linking universes:

The kernel approach


The master approach
The component approach

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Note: DESIGNER allows one level of linked universes. This means that you cannot create derived universes from a universe

which is itself derived. Also, when you link universes, DESIGNER does not save any lists of values which may be
associated with a kernel universe. Check this statement whether right or wrong.

Presenting objects in the order of the core universe:

By default, the order in which you arrange the objects of the derived universe is that which will be seen by users of the

universe, even if the order later changes in the core universe. If you want your derived universe to present objects always

in the order they are presented in the core universe, you must set a parameter accordingly in the *.PRM file of the database

you are using. The parameter setting is CORE_ORDER_PRIORITY = Y.


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

The Benefits of Linked Universes. Some of the benefits inherent in the use of linked universes are as follows:

A dynamic link may considerably reduce development and maintenance time. When you modify a component in the kernel

universe, DESIGNER propagates the change to the same component in all the derived universes.

Instead of re-creating common components each time you create a new universe, you can centralize such components in a

kernel universe, and then include them in all new universes.

Linked universes facilitate specialization. Development can be split between database administrators who set up a basic

kernel universe, and the more specialized designers who create more functional universes based on their specific field.

%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Requirements for Linking Universes: You can link the active universe to a kernel universe, only if the following
requirements are met:

The kernel universe and active universe were created from the same data account and the same RDBMS.
The kernel universe was exported and re-imported at least once.
Exported derived universes are located in the same universe domain as the kernel universe.
All classes and objects are unique in both the kernel universe and the derived universes. (Otherwise, collisions may

occur.)
You are authorized to link the given universe.

Tip: A derived universe does not recover the lists of values containing personal data from the kernel universe. However, if

you need certain lists of values, you can use the following workaround: in the derived universe, create new objects
defined in the same way as those in the kernel, then hide them. You can then assign to these objects lists of values which

you can modify and export.


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

To create such a link, you must have exported the kernel universe at least once. Otherwise, DESIGNER does not allow the link.
The core components within the active universe DESIGNER displays the components from the kernel universe as dimmed in both
the Universe pane and the Structure pane of the active universe.

If you are working in online mode, the connection of the active universe becomes that of the kernel universe. You can, of

course, change it if necessary. The join detection strategy of the active universe remains unchanged.

You cannot modify or delete derived components in the active universe. However, you can create a join linking a table

originating from the kernel universe to one in the active universe.

Removing the link


You can remove a link to a kernel universe only if the active universe no longer contains objects based on kernel components

or joins to kernel components.


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Including One Universe within Another:

Other than linking universes, you can include the components of the kernel universe in a derived universe. When you do this,

DESIGNER copies the components of the kernel universe to the derived universe. The resulting components in the derived

universe are independent of those in the kernel universe. Therefore, modifying a kernel universe has no effect on any

universes derived from it.

You may decide to include one universe within another for one of two reasons:
You simply wish to copy the contents of a given universe into an active universe.
You wish to end the dynamic link between two universes.

The procedure for including the components from a kernel universe within the active universe is nearly identical to linking

two universes dynamically. However, it is not necessary to export the kernel universe. Note: If your two universes were

linked before the operation, the procedure removes the dynamic link components in the active universe are no longer
dynamically linked to the external universe.

Check how to include one universe in another> Do it practically.


%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

There are several ways you can optimize a universe:

Modifying the Array Fetch parameter in the Universe Parameters.


Allocating a weight to each table.
Using shortcut joins.
Creating and using aggregate tables in your database.

The Array Fetch parameter in the SBO file allows you to set the maximum number of rows that are permitted in a FETCH

procedure. The SBO file is a text file that specifies default values used by Business Objects products queries are
run against the database.

The Array Fetch parameter determines the packet size on the network.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

If you want to retrieve binary long-objects (BLOB), you should set the Array Fetch size as 1.

Allocating table weights:


Table weight is a measure of how many rows there are in a table. Lighter tables have less rows than heavier tables. By

default BUSINESSOBJECTS sorts tables from the lighter to the heavier tables (those with the least amount of rows to those

with the most). This determines the table order in the FROM clause of the SQL statement. The order in which tables are sorted

at the database level depends on your database.

For example, Sybase uses the same order as BUSINESSOBJECTS, but Oracle uses the opposite order. The SQL will be optimized for

most databases, but not for Oracle where the smallest table is put first in the sort order. So, if you are using

BUSINESSOBJECTS, and are using an Oracle database, you can optimize the SQL by reversing the order that BUSINESSOBJECTS
sorts

the tables.

To do this you must change a parameter in the relevant PRM file of the database. You modify this parameter as follows:

To modify the PRM file to allocate table weights

1. Open the PRM file for your database in a text editor.


The PRM file is stored in the following directory: \Business Objects\Data Access\RDBMS\RDBMS.PRM

For example, the file for Oracle is ORA7EN.PRM in the Oracle folder under the Data Access folder.

2. Find the REVERSE_TABLE_WEIGHT parameter in the Default section of the file (normally at the beginning of the file).
3. Change the Y to an N.

For example the parameter appears as REVERSE_TABLE_WEIGHT=N. If the line is not in the file, the default is Y. This forces

BUSINESSOBJECTS to sort the tables from those with the most rows to those with the least rows.

4. Save and close the .PRM files.


5. Restart DESIGNER to apply the changes to the .PRM file.
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%
%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%%

Using Shortcut Joins:

A shortcut join links two tables that are already joined in a common path. You can use a shortcut join to reduce the number

of tables that are used in a query.

Shortcut joins will not create loops.

DOCUMENT

Q. What is a document file composes of ? For example, I have a customer claimed that she deleted all the
data in all report tabs in a document file. The original document file is 20meg. After purged the data,
the document file is still occupied 1.8meg.
A. An .rep file stores the local database (the microcubes) and the report sheets attributes. The main room is
used by the local database, however when many report sheets display complex results (local computation,
several bocks, custom formatting, etc.) then the size the require can be significant. When you purge the data
providers or when you delete some report sheets, you have to save the .rep as a new one to make the file size
down.

Q. Can I automatically save my Document every 10 minutes?


A. Yes, the "Save" tab in the Options dialog box allows you to set an automatic save on the time basis you
selected.

Q. Is there any limitation on the number of reports that a document can have?
A. There is no algorithmic limitation.

Q. Is there any limitation on number of cells to be displayed or defined per report


Or document?
A. There isn't any algorithmic limitation.
Q. Is there any way of defaulting new reports to have no color (i.e. black and white)
when generated ?
A. Default reports are based on the default template
(\BusinessObjects\Template\Default.ret). Build a report using the color you want
and then save it as template using "Default.ret" name.

Q. How is data stored in the document?


A. The structure that stores the data in the document is known as the microcube. You
can think of the microcube as a local database attached to a document. You can use the data in the
microcube in any report you create inside the document. One of the powerful features of the microcube is
that it enables you to display only the data you want to see in a report. Any non-displayed data is still
present in the microcube, which means that you can use it whenever you like, in any report inside the same
document. This feature is particularly useful when you want to analyze data: you display only the data that
is pertinent for your multidimensional analysis..

Q. When a user copies ( via email or diskette ) a document from one machine (
where they were created ) to another machine, the user is unable to modify the document (data
provider). The error message that the user gets is Cannot find the universe 'XYZ'.
A. Make sure that the universe is in C:\Business Objects\Universe folder and not C:\Business
Objects\Universe\Universe folder. Also check the connections of the universe. If it has a personnel
connection, then a file called pdac.lsi ( located under the LocData directory ) has to be copied on the PC that
is trying to refresh the report. If the universe has a shared connection, then a file called sdac.lsi ( located
under the LocData directory ) has to be copied on the PC that is trying to refresh the report.

Q. Whenever reports are build against a particular universe, the users are always
getting partial results ?
A. Check the universe parameters. This can be done in the Designer. Open the universe against which these
reports are build, Go to File/Parameters. Under the Controls Tab, check the limitations set by the Designer
of this universe.

Q. Can BusinessObjects 4.1 open BusinessObjects 4.0.x documents and vise versa?
A. All BusinessObjects 4.0.5.x documents can be opened with BusinessObjects version 4.1 and all-new
BusinessObjects 4.1 documents can be opened with BusinessObjects 4.0.5.x versions.
Q. What is the difference between sending a document through File/Send To/Users
and File/Send To/Repository?
A. If one chooses File/ Send To/ Users, the documents you send will remain in the repository until all the users
you send them to have retrieved the document. You can send documents to individual users only when you
use this command. Also, when the user is notified that he or she has a document to retrieve. If one chooses
File/Send To/ Repository, the documents you send remain in the repository until they are deleted by the
BusinessObjects Supervisor. You can send documents to groups of users only when you use this command.
The user is not notified that he or she has a documents to retrieve.
Q. Can BusinessObjects allow users to refresh BusinessObjects reports interactively
but prevent them from tampering with the results after refreshed?
A. Yes this can be achieved using BusinessObjects. For the person who builds the report, click on Data and
View. This brings up a dialog box with query/ies in the left panel, and a two-tabbed dialog on the right.
Click on the Definition tab. Then play with the two checkboxes "Editable" and "Refreshable" - in your
case, you want to set Editable OFF but leave Refreshable ON. Do this for each query in the left hand panel
that you need to lock up. This prevents them from messing with the query panel. If your objective is to
prevent ANY report modifications, such as modifying report format, formulae, etc.

Q. Do we store information about the server the printer is attached to in the .rep file? It appears that we
are storing information about the server the printer is attached to in the .rep file because with reports
from users on a different Netware server, it prompts for a login to that server. Also, can we get some
kind of list of all the information that is stored in the .rep ?
A. The server the printer is attached to is part of the printer logical definition stored in the document. This is
required to print the document on the right printer! As a result when you open a document that was built on
a printer that wasn't set on your PC (printer control panel) and that isn't available on the server you're logged
in, the network OS you use prompt you for a login to this new server. The benefit of this implementation is
that you can print on a network printer you haven't set on your PC (printer control panel).
Q. Can two tables be located relative to each other in a document?
A. This will avoid overwriting the table when more rows are added to the above table (for instance when the
table is refreshed or a filter associated to the table is removed). Here is how to do it:
1. Open a report with a table below a table.
2. Select the below table.
3. Select the Format Table menu
4. Click on the Appearance tab
5. On the "Vertical Position Relative to" drop-down box, select Table1
6. Chose a number in the box below Top, for instance 5
7. Click OK. You are done.

Q. Why is BusinessObjects called Document Centric?


A. BusinessObjects is called document centric because a dcocument is one file that
contains the following information:-
Security Information
Data Definition
Data Itself
Document Layout
It represents one local database

FAQ for BO Developer

Questions:

1) Types and definitions of joins?


Ans: There should be one WHERE clause for each pair of tables being joined. Thus, if four tables are to be
combined, three conditions would be necessary.

EQUI JOIN: An equi-join is based on the equality between the values in the column of one
table and the values in the column of another. Because the same column is
present in both tables, the join synchronizes the two tables.

THETA JOIN: A theta join links tables based on a relationship other than equality between
two columns.

OUTER JOIN: An outer join links two tables, one of which has rows that do not match those
in the common column of the other table.

SHORTCUT JOIN: Shortcut joins can be used in schemas containing redundant join paths leading
to the same result, regardless of direction.
The simplest way to create joins in a universe is to specify a join strategy that
creates them automatically as we insert tables and columns in the Structure pane
from the Table Browser.

The Detect JOIN Method: A quick and reliable method for joining the tables in wer universe is to select
the Detect Joins command on the Tools menu. we can also click the button on
the Editing toolbar to execute the command.

The Edit JOIN Method: The Edit Join dialog box is a graphical method for creating a new join, or editing
an existing one.

The Formula BAR Method: The formula bar is an area


within the DESIGNER window that shows the formula or expression defining any
join that we click.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

2) What are loops and how do we resolve them?


Ans: In a relational database schema a common type of join path that returns too few
rows is called a loop.In a relational database, a loop occurs when joins form multiple paths between
lookup tables. In a database schema, a loop can be identified as a closed path

Resolving the Loop:


DESIGNER provides three features, which guide we in the loop resolution
process:
Detect Cardinalities : The Detect Cardinalities command automatically identifies the cardinalities or
nature of the relationships between the tables in the Structure pane.

Detect Aliases: In SQL an alias is an alternative name for a table. The purpose of aliases is to
resolve structural issues in a database arising from SQL limitations.In DESIGNER, an alias is just a pointer to
another table.
A designer places one or more aliases in the Structure pane so that BUSINESSOBJECTS and
WEBINTELLIGENCE
can generate the appropriate SQL statements for certain types of queries.

Detect Contexts: A context is a set of joins that specifies one of several paths through tables in a
loop. It ensures that joins are not included from different paths within the same
SQL query.

3? Can we link Universe and what are the advantages of doing that? -> SEE LATER
Ans: Linked universes are universes that share common components such as
parameters, classes, objects, or joins. Among linked universes, one universe is
said to be the kernel or master universe while the others are the derived
universes. A kernel or master universe represents a re-usable library of components.
Derived universes may contain some or all the components of the kernel or
master universe, in addition to any components that have been added to it.

Kernel Approach: With the kernel approach, one universe contains the core components. These are
the components common in all universes. The derived universes that we create
from this kernel universe contain these core components as well as their own
specific components.

Master Approach: In this approach, one master universe holds all possible components. In the
universes derived from this master, certain components are hidden; in other
words, the components visible in the derived universes are a subset of the master
universe.

Component Approach: The third way of organizing linked universes is the component approach. It
involves merging two or more universes into one universe.

Benefits of Linking Universe:


When we set up a link between universes, any changes we or other designers
make to the kernel universe are dynamically reflected in the derived universes.
A dynamic link may considerably reduce development and maintenance
time. When we modify a component in the kernel universe, DESIGNER
propagates the change to the same component in all the derived universes.
Instead of re-creating common components each time we create a new
universe, we can centralize such components in a kernel universe, and then
include them in all new universes.
Linked universes facilitate specialization. Development can be split between
database administrators who set up a basic kernel universe, and the more
specialized designers who create more functional universes based on their
specific field.

Requirements for Linking Universe:


The kernel universe and active universe were created from the same data
account and the same RDBMS.
The kernel universe was exported and re-imported at least once.
Exported derived universes are located in the same universe domain as the
kernel universe.
All classes and objects are unique in both the kernel universe and the derived
universes. (Otherwise, collisions may occur.)
we are authorized to link the given universe.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
4) Where are the reports stored?
Ans: Reports are stored in Repository created by the Supervisor .

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
5) In what form we can present the reports?
Ans: Reports can be presented in text, html, excel or pdf fromat.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
6) What is the purpose of Checking Integrity?
Ans: Check Integrity serves the following purposes:
It detects any errors in the objects, joins, conditions, and cardinalities of wer
universe.
It detects whether there are any loops in the joins.
It detects whether contexts are necessary.
It determines whether any changes were made to the database to which the
universe is connected.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

7) What is the purpose of Parse Checking ?


Ans: Parse checking means how DESIGNER is to determine the validity of an object,
join, or condition. There are two levels for parse checking:
Quick parsing checks only the syntax of components.
Thorough parsing checks both the syntax and semantics of components.
Of the two options, Thorough parsing provides a more extensive check and thus
ensures the integrity of the components. However, if we wish to create many
components in a short time, Quick parsing is generally more rapid.
------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------

8) What are Lookup Table and Fact table?


Ans: LOOK UP Table:

A lookup (or dimension) table contains information associated with a particular


entity or subject. For example, a lookup table can hold information on customers
from a geographical perspective such as their names, telephone numbers as well
as the cities and countries in which they reside.
In DESIGNER, dimension and detail objects are derived from lookup tables. A
lookup table has the following join cardinality structure:

FACT Table:
A fact table contains statistical information about transactions. For example, it
may contain figures such as Sales Revenue or Profit.
In a BUSINESSOBJECTS universe, most measures are defined from fact
tables.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
9) What is LOV ( list of Values) ?
A list of values is a file that contains the data values associated with an object. Thus, lists of values can reveal
information about the contents of a database.

By default, each dimension or detail object is assigned a list of values made up of


all the corresponding data values in the database. No default list of values is
assigned to measure objects.

------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------10) What is
Conditional Hiding ?
Ans: In the universes that we create, we may find it convenient to hide certain
classes, objects or conditions in the Universe pane. we may wish to hide one or
more components for any of the following reasons:
The components are from linked universes and are not needed in the active
universe .
The objects exist solely to optimize SQL syntax and should therefore be
invisible to end users.
we are in the process of developing a component that we do not want end
users to view from the Query Panel.
we want to disable components temporarily without deleting them.

11) What is Zabo?


Ans: Zabo means Zero Administration Business Objects .we can deploy
BUSINESSOBJECTS using either the traditional client/server deployment or
using a three-tier web deployment. This new web deployment is called a
zero-administration deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS.

In a zero-administration deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS, only the


BUSINESSOBJECTS client software is installed on the Windows PC; all middleware
is stored and administered on the WEBINTELLIGENCE web server and the server-side
processing is handled by the WEBINTELLIGENCE system This means zero-administration
on the client computer yet still gives the client all the powerful query, reporting and analysis features of
BUSINESSOBJECTS.

A zero-administration deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS allows us to:


Install and automatically update the BUSINESSOBJECTS client software from
INFOVIEW via an Internet browser.
Connect to the BUSINESSOBJECTS repository using a web connection and use
middleware installed on the server.
When connected to BUSINESSOBJECTS via a web connection, we can save
documents either locally, or in personal storage space on the server.

12) What is End User and Real User ?


Ans: Full Clients are users who have a Windows workstation with
BUSINESSOBJECTS installed on it. Document processing is carried out on
the client.

Thin Clients are users who have any client platform that provides a
Web Browser. Document processing is carried out on a
WEBINTELLIGENCE server and formatted documents are passed down to
the client.

13) What is Chasm Trap and how do we detect and resolve it?

Ans: Many to one joins from two fact tables converge on a single lookup table. This type
of join convergence is called a Chasm Trap. This returns too many rows.
We will get incorrect results if we run a query when the following
circumstances exist:
A many to one to many relationship exists among three tables in the
universe structure.
The query includes objects based on two tables both at the many end of their
respective joins.
There are multiple rows returned for a single dimension.

Chasm Trap cannot be automatically detected but it has to be visually detected.


To resolve a Chasm trap we need to make two separate queries and then
combine the results. Depending on the type of objects defined for the fact tables,
and the type of end user environment, we can use the following methods to
resolve a Chasm trap:

Create a context for each fact table. This solution works in all cases for
BUSINESSOBJECTS universes.
Modify the SQL parameters for the universe so we can generate separate SQL
queries for each measure. This solution only works for measure objects. It
does not generate separate queries for dimension or detail objects.
Break the universe into multiple universes. One universe for each fact table.
This solution only applies to WEBINTELLIGENCE universes when there are
dimension objects in one or both fact tables so two SELECT statements are
synchronized and not joined.

14) What is Fan Trap?


Ans: Serial many to one joins. This is called a Fan trap.This returns too many rows.
The fanning out effect of one to many joins can cause incorrect results to be returned when a query includes
objects
based on both tables. we need to visually examine the
direction of the cardinalities displayed in the table schema. If we have two tables
which are referenced by measure objects and are joined in a series of many to one
joins, then we probably have a potential Fan trap.
To Resolve Fan Trap, If query contains only measure objects from the two tables causing the Fan trap,
we can use the Multiple SQL Statements For Each Measure function to generate
separate SQL queries for each measure.

15) Explain Measure, Detail and Dimension Object ?

An object maps to data or a derivation of data in the database. For the


purposes of multidimensional analysis, an object can be qualified as one of
three types: a dimension, detail, or measure.

An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a


derivation of data in the database.

The name of an object suggests a concept drawn from the terminology of a


business or discipline. Thus, for a product manager, objects might be Product, Life
Cycle, or Release Date while for a financial analyst, objects might be Profit Margin,
Return on Investment, etc.

For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of


three types: dimension, detail, or measure.

Dimension objects are the parameters for the analysis. Dimensions typically
relate to a hierarchy such as geography, product, or time.By default, an object is qualified as a dimension object,
which is indicated by the
cube symbol that precedes the objects name.

Detail objects provide a description of a dimension but are not the focus of the
analysis.

Measure objects convey numeric information by which a dimension object can be


measured.A measure object is derived from an aggregate function: Count, Sum, Minimum,
or Maximum. This type of object provides numeric information.

For example, Sales Revenue is a measure object, Last Name and City Id are
dimension objects, and Phone Number is a detail object.

16) What are Aliases and Contexts?


whenever possible we should use an alias instead of a context. When we use a context, we expose
the BUSINESSOBJECTS end user to the database structure. They are forced to decide
which context they want to use to run their query. The role of the universe is to
shield end users from the database structure, so they do not have to make such
decisions.

When do we use Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure?


we can use this solution for both BUSINESSOBJECTS and WEBINTELLIGENCE
universes that contain only measure objects defined for both fact tables. The
advantage of using multiple SQL statements is that we can avoid using contexts
which we need to later maintain.

When do we not use Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure?


we should not use Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure when we have
dimension or detail objects defined for one or both of the fact tables. If a
dimension or detail object is included in a query based on a universe using this
solution, a cartesian product will be returned.

This solution can slow query response time. If the drop in query performance is
important, than we should consider creating contexts (BUSINESSOBJECTS) or
separate universes (WEBINTELLIGENCE) to resolve the Chasm trap.

17) What is Cartesian Product?


Ans: Cartesian Product is a situation a
situation in which a query includes two or more tables that are not linked by a
join .Cartesian product is a situation in which all possible combinations
between each row of each table are retrieved.

18) Describe Personal, Shared and Secured Connections ?


Ans: A connection is a set of parameters that provides access to a database. A
connection is made up of three elements:
the network layer
the connection name and type
the database location and account name.

DESIGNER provides three types of connections: secured, shared, and personal.


A secured connection is used to centralize and control access to sensitive or
critical data. It is the safest type of connection for protecting access to data.
Created with either DESIGNER or SUPERVISOR, secured connections are stored in
the security domain of the repository. They may be shared by any designers or
supervisors who have been granted the appropriate privileges.

As a universe designer, we must use secured connections if we want to


distribute wer universes through the Business Objects repository. In addition,
we can re-use secured connections and update them dynamically as needed.

Shared connections
A shared connection is used to access common resources such as universes or
documents. It can thus be used by several users.

The parameters of this connection are stored in a file called sdac.lsi or sdac.ssi,
located in the LocData subfolder. we can update these parameters dynamically.
Universes defined with shared connections are unsecured in terms of Business
Objects product security. To protect universes with these connections, we can
store them in restricted network folders. However, this may not be entirely safe
since unauthorized users who have installed Business Objects product software
on their computer can still open the universes; this is so because the connection
file in the folder can potentially be read by the software installed on their
computers.

A shared connection is useful if we need to set up a testing environment for


universes before distributing them to the entire user community.

Personal Connectons
A personal connection is specific to one user and can be used only from the
computer on which it was created. It is defined either from BUSINESSOBJECTS or
DESIGNER.
The parameters of this connection are stored in files called pdac.lsi and pdac.ssi,
located in the LocData folder. we cannot update the parameters of such a
connection, which are static.

In terms of Business Objects product security, a personal connection does not


protect a universe from unauthorized access. Thus, anyone who can log into a
users computer can gain access to restricted universes defined with personal
connecti ons. However, i f an authori zed user copi es t he same uni verses t o anot her
machine he would not be able to open them since the connection parameters do
not exist on that machine.

Personal Connections are used rarely given their lack of flexibility in


the distribution process. we may occasionally use them to access personal
databases on local machines. However, they are more commonly used to access
database accounts to test a bit of SQL through the Free-hand SQL option in
BUSINESSOBJECTS.

NOTE: All three types of connections can be modified from DESIGNER. Personal and
shared connections can be modified from BUSINESSOBJECTS. Only secured
connections can be modified from SUPERVISOR.

19) What are the main components of Designer Window ?


Ans: From the main window of DESIGNER, we create wer universe using three areas:
the Table Browser
the Structure pane
the Universe pane.

When we choose the tables and columns from the Table Browser, DESIGNER
displays them in the Structure pane and in the Universe pane.

The Structure pane reflects the underlying database structure of the universe. The
Universe pane displays the components of the universe from the point of view of
BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE, i.e. the classes and objects.

20) Describe Online and Offline Mode in Designer ?


Ans: Online mode
Online, the default mode, is appropriate for a networked environment in which
the general supervisor has set up a repository. In online mode, we can import or
export universes.

Offline mode
Working in offline mode means essentially that we work with universes that are
stored locally owner computer. To use this mode, we must have been
connected at least once in Online mode.
we may wish to use this option whenever we need to work away from wer
site, such as with a laptop computer, or whenever wer network goes down.

21) What is Repository and what is it use?


Ans: A repository is set up by a general supervisor who stores it centrally on a
database. A repository enables users to share resources for Business Objects
products; it is made up of the following domains:
the security domain
the universe domain
the document domain.
A universe domain holds all the universes that we export. In fact, there may be
more than one universe domain in the repository.
A document domains holds all exported documents, templates, scripts, and lists
of values.
If we are not sure whether the general supervisor has set up a repository, check
to see whether there is a .key file located in the LocData subfolder of wer
BUSINESSOBJECTS folder. This encrypted file contains the address of the
repository.

22) What is Startegy ?


Ans: A strategy is a script that reads structural information from a database or flat file.
This information can pertain to tables, columns, or joins.

DESIGNER uses the following built-in strategies for creating the components of
universes:
the Objects Creation strategy, which tells DESIGNER how to define classes and
objects automatically from the databases tables and columns
the Joins Creation strategy, which tells DESIGNER how to define joins
automatically from the databases tables and columns
the Table Browser strategy, which tells DESIGNER how to read the table and
column structures from the databases data dictionary

Object: From the list box, select an object strategy.


The built-in strategy creates classes, and names them
based on the tables in the database; it also creates
objects, and names them based on the columns in the
database. It replaces all underscore characters (_) with
spaces.

Joins :From the list box, select a join strategy. A description is


displayed below the name of the current strategy.

Tables :From the list box, select a table strategy. The built-in
strategy reads the structure of database tables.

23) What is Universe?


Ans: A universe is a set of classes and objects intended for a specific application or
group of users.A universe is a business-oriented mapping of the data structure found in
databases: tables, columns, joins, etc. All universe components map to parts of the database structure.

A universe can represent any specific application, system, or group of users. For
example, a universe can relate to a department in a company such as marketing
or accounting.

A universe can also pertain to a section within a department or just about any set
of organized procedures such as a payroll or inventory system. A universe
consists of a set of objects, grouped by classes.

24) What is Class ?


Ans: A class is a collection of objects based on business categories.A class is a logical grouping of objects
within a universe. In general, the name of a class reflects a business concept that conveys the category or type of
objects.
A class can be further divided into subclasses.
As designer, we are free to define hierarchies of classes and subclasses into a
model that best reflects the business concepts of our company.

25) What is Aggregate Awareness ?


Ans: Aggregate awareness is a feature of DESIGNER that makes use of aggregate tables
in a database. These are tables that contain precalculated data. The purpose of
these tables is to enhance the performance of SQL transactions; they are thus used
to speed up the execution of queries.

The reliability of the technique depends on the accuracy of the


aggregate tables. In fact, they must be refreshed at the same time as all fact tables.
A universe that is aggregate aware has one or more aggregate objects with
alternative definitions based on these tables. These definitions correspond to
levels of aggregation. For example, a Profit object can be aggregated by month, by
quarter, or by year.

Queries built from such a universe return information aggregated to the


appropriate level at optimal speed.
26) How do we set up Aggregate Awareness in an Universe?
Ans: Setting up Aggregate Awareness in an Universe is a four part process:
i) Build the Objects:
1. Identify all the possible definitions (table/column
combinations) of the objects.
2. Arrange the objects by level of aggregation.
3. Build the objects using the @Aggregate_Awareness function.

ii) Specify the Incompatible Objects


1. Build an objects/aggregate tables matrix.
2. For the first aggregate table, decide whether each object is either:
- at the same level of aggregation or higher (compatible)
- at a lower level of aggregation (incompatible)
3. Check only the boxes of objects that are incompatible
for that table.
4. Repeat the steps for the remaining aggregate tables.

iii) Define any necessary Contexts.


Define one context per level of aggregation.

iv) Test the Results


i) Run Several queries
ii) Compare the results

27) What is Concatenated Objects and How do we create it ?


Ans: A concatenated object is an object we create by combining two existing objects.
For example, lets say that we wish to create an object called Full Name, which is
a concatenation of the objects Last Name and First Name in the Customer class.
To do so, first create a new object in the Customer class and call it Full Name.
Remember to enter a description for the object such as This object is a
concatenation of the customers first and last name.

28) What are the Business Objects SDK?

SDK is software Development Kit which are mainly used to customize Business Objects.
SDK is mainly licensed together with documentation (and code samples) .

WebI SDK can be programmed using JSP or ASP using whatever generic editor we want
for JSP or ASP.

I have used VBA, JSP BO SDK. Additional I have also used BO web Service SDK.
29) What is the Business Objects web server?

30) Describe the steps to create the Universe?

31) How to create User's rights for specific Universe in the Supervisor ?

32) What is Web Intelligence?

WebIntelligence : WEBINTELLIGENCE provides users with a light-weight, easy-to-use interface called


the Web Panel to create and modify documents.WEBINTELLIGENCE, you can access the data in your
corporate databases or
data warehouses from within your office, your home, or around the world, using
your corporate intranet, extranet, or the World Wide Web.

WEBINTELLIGENCE allows users to access, analyze, and share data over


intranets and extranets for both traditional relational databases and
online analytical processing (OLAP) servers.
WEBINTELLIGENCE allows users to view, refresh, create reports.

WEBINTELLIGENCE uses the same universes created for full-client users. These
universes are the sole data providers for WEBINTELLIGENCE documents.
All users need to do to create and edit WEBINTELLIGENCE documents is to log into
a web server and download a Java applet or ActiveX control from the corporate
intranet, extranet, or the web. They can then build queries to create documents
that display accurate, up-to-date data from their corporate databases.
When users have finished editing the queries, they send them to the server, where
they are processed, formatted and sent back as HTML documents.

Once youve used WEBINTELLIGENCE to query a database, we can take the


information and turn it into documents as simple as tables, or as complex as
dynamic documents with drillable charts.

We can then save those documents for your own personal use, send them to
other users, publish them to the repository as corporate documents, or schedule
them for automatic refresh and distribution through BROADCAST AGENT.

33) Describe the three modules of Web Intelligence ?

WEBINTELLIGENCE INFOVIEW
The indispensable web-based entry point for accessing both
WEBINTELLIGENCE and BUSINESSOBJECTS documents, and all other types of
files that are stored in the repository or in personal document storage areas.
INFOVIEW also lets users manage, save, distribute, print and schedule
documents for automated processing by BROADCAST AGENT.

WEBINTELLIGENCE REPORTER allows users to create and edit WEBINTELLIGENCE


documents. The client for WEBINTELLIGENCE is a Java applet or an ActiveX control called
the Web Panel, which is automatically downloaded for users to build and edit
documents.

WEBINTELLIGENCE EXPLORER allows users to drill in drillable


WEBINTELLIGENCE documents to analyze data on different levels of detail, as
in the example on the previous page.

34 ) What is Web Intelligence SDK ? Give example of where have you used Web Intelligence SDK?

WEBINTELLIGENCE SDK (Software Development Kit) is an extension of


WEBINTELLIGENCE which enables us to customize the look, behavior, and
workflow of a WEBINTELLIGENCE deployment to match the needs of a wide user
audience.

From a developers viewpoint, this means that you have tight control over how
your WEBINTELLIGENCE deployment operates and how it appears to end users.
From the users viewpoint, this means they can access documents and perform
queries and analysis in an environment with which they are familiar. A common
use of WEBINTELLIGENCE SDK is to align WEBINTELLIGENCE deployments with
current corporate intranet or extranet solutions.

Example SDK:
I have used Web Intelligence SDK in order to :

Personalized UI
Embed prompts in web pages. You can determine which prompts are
returned depending on a users profile and you can determine the results sent
back to the user based on their input.
Add a hyperlink to a document which launches the Web Panel.

35) What is Broadcast Agent ?


BROADCAST AGENT provides scheduled or batch processing of BUSINESSOBJECTS
and WEBINTELLIGENCE documents. All the end user has to do is send a document
to BROADCAST AGENT using BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE, and specify
scheduling and distribution information. No understanding of the server
configuration is required.

BROADCAST AGENT lets users to automate simple actions such as refreshing


and printing documents, and also control processing with conditions which trigger
distribution when pre-defined events occur.

Users can choose to publish documents to the repository, on a web server or on


the server file system. Users with access to the repository can view documents
that BROADCAST AGENT has processed in BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE.
BROADCAST AGENT supports HTML publishing on the web, on channels and on
your intranet or extranet.

36) What is Info View ?

Ans: BUSINESSOBJECTS INFOVIEW is a business intelligence portal (BIP) that


collects and consolidates a company's BI information and presents it in a
secure, focused, and personalized view to users inside and outside an
organization.

INFOVIEW lets users personalize how they view, manage, and distribute
BI content. It is both a standalone business intelligence portal (BIP), as
well as a BI-content provider for enterprise information portals (EIPs).

________________________________________________________________________

37) Explain the Business Objects Deployment Architecture ?

Ans: The BUSINESSOBJECTS architecture has two components which are


fundamental to the product concept.
The Universe or Semantic layer enables end users to query corporate
data using everyday business terminology and without the need to
understand the underlying data structures. BUSINESSOBJECTS then
translates the objects chosen by the user into SQL using the definitions
and restrictions built into the universe definition by the universe
designer.

The Repository provides a central database of information required to


run an enterprise deployment of BUSINESSOBJECTS. This includes
security, universe definition and corporate reports.
Business Objects tools can access information from anywhere within
your organization.

________________________________________________________________________
38) What is @Select Function ?
Ans: The @Select function is a pointer to the Select box properties of another
object.

It is used by placing the @Select in the Select field of the Edit Properties
box of an object, using the following syntax:
@Select(path of existing object)

You specify the path in the form Class_Name\Object_Name.


Its purpose is to allow you to re-use existing code. The advantage of
using this function is that it allows you to specify SQL code only once.

This has two key advantages:


It means that you have to maintain only one instance of the SQL
code.
It ensures consistency of the code.

________________________________________________________________________

39) What are the differences of Web Intelligence with Business Objects ?

Ans: WEBINTELLIGENCE only requires a Web Browser to be installed on the


client.
All intelligence is on the server, therefore, software need only be
installed on the server making support and administration more
centralized.

WEBINTELLIGENCE documents are always converted to HTML before


being sent to the client.

BUSINESSOBJECTS documents are always converted to HTML, PDF or


metafile before being sent to the client. These formats will result in
much smaller documents being sent across the network than Full Client
.rep documents. The exact format sent to the client is determined by
user settings for their WEBINTELLIGENCE session. If PDF or Metafile
format is selected a Java Applet (ActiveX control or Java Plug-in) will be
required to display the document. Web Browsers support the use of
such applets to extend the capabilities of the basic browser.

Please check the below.

- Give scenario and then had to right the sql freehand to get the data.
- Given a report to look and asked to identify why it was not pulling in the correct data,
in this case it was the joins they had to implement security.
- Ask you describe a fan and chasm trap how would you resolve it.
- Explain calculation contexts when to use them.
- Explain about contexts generally and when to use them.
- Common problems to look out for.
- Create new users in Supervisor
- Schedule a report.
----------------------------------------------------------------
5. What is an Universe?
6. How many Universes did you create?
7. Tell me how many classes where there, and objects in each class?
8. What is Object qualification?
9. Tell me about a complicated object you have created?
10. What was the size of the database? which server?
11. How many user were there?
12. What problems you have faced while creating an universe? tell me an incident and
how you went about solving it?
13. Were any experts called from BO while you were on the project?
14. What was the Database. Was it a data warehouse?
15. How many Tables was the universe built?
16. What is a loop, how do you resolve them?
17. What do prefer an Alias or an context? why?
18. What is join? Explain different types of joins?
19. What are linked universes? have you worked with them, problems faced and
solutions?
20. How many reports have you created? Explain a few?
21. What are alerters, filters, breaks, master-detail?
22. What's the difference between master-detail and Breaks?
23. What's the difference between filters and conditions?
24. what are pre-defined conditions? compare with report conditions? Justify?
25. What are the differences between a formula, variable and user objects?
26. Did you face any problems while creating reports? Name? Solutions?
27. How do you schedule the reports?
28. How were the reports scheduled and how to resolve unexecuted documents?
29. What is a microcube? how many can a document have?
30. Have you worked with multiple data sources? If yes. How do you link them?
31. What are templates? Explain what you have created?
---------------------------------------------------
BusObj Questions
Remember, there are many ways to do the same thing with all of the BusObj
applications.

General Questions

Q) Tell me about yourself, your employment history.


Q) How many years of experience do you have in BusObj?
Q) Versions?
Q) What was your role in the current project?
Q) How many users were there?
Q) On a scale of 1 - 10, rate yourself on BUSOBJ?
Q) Supervisor
Q) Designer
Q) BusObj
Q) Webi
Q) Broadcast Agent
Q) Business Query
Q) Were any experts called from BUSOBJ while you were on the project?
Q) What is BOmain.key?
A) A file that contains the address of the repository's security domain. This file must be
distributed to all users who will access the BusinessObjects repository to share
universes and documents. By default, the bomain.key is placed in the
BusinessObjects\LocData folder on your system.

Supervisor Questions
Q) What is the Business Objects repository?
A) The Business Objects repository is a set of relational data structures stored on a
database. It enables Business Objects users to share resources in a controlled and
secured environment.

Q) What is a domain? How many are there is a basic set up? What are they?
A) The repository is made up of three domains: the security domain, the universe
domain, and the document domain.

Q) When is the repository created?


A) The repository is created by the general supervisor with the Setup wizard during the
first-time use of the product. You can create and use more than one repository, typically
to manage multiple sites.

Q) Can we have multiple domains? If yes. Purpose of having them?


A) Yes, Having multiple document domains can help with organization. If you stick with
the 'canned' document domain, all documents (BCA, user to user, corporate, universe
lov's) all wind up sharing the same domain/default table space. You can create separate
domains with separate table spaces for the different types of documents and reduce the
risk of space related Repro problems and corruption. Also, you can reduce the risk that
problems corrupt your entire Repro.

Q) How do you restrict the users from using a particular universe, a class or object(s) of
a universe, a particular document etc?

Q) How do you restrict access to the rows of a database?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the user or group.
2) In the Resource pane, click the Universe tab.
3) Right-click the universe.
4) From the pop-up menu, click Properties.
5) In the Universe Properties dialog box, click the Rows tab.
6) Set the options as necessary.
7) Click OK.

Q) How do you Create a user?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the group in which you want to create a new user.
2) Click on the toolbar.
3) Type a user name, and press the Enter key.

Q) What are the types of user profiles and products can they use?
A) Supervisor offers standard profiles representing the various types of Business
Objects users. The names of the profiles, as well as their symbols, roles, and products
are explained below.
Profile) General Supervisor
Role) The Business Objects system administrator. This is the person who launches
Supervisor for the first time. The general supervisor creates the repository, defines
users and groups, and manages resources. A general supervisor is the sole user with a
global view of the hierarchical organization.
Product) All Business Objects Products

Profile) Supervisor
Role) Defines users and group, manages resources, and ensures security. A supervisor
also assigns properties and resources to these users and groups. In addition, a
supervisor can restrict access to certain resources. A general supervisor can create
several supervisors. Product) Supervisor, BusinessObjects

Profile) Supervisor-designer
Role) Creates users, groups and universes. This user has all the rights of the supervisor
and designer combined.
Product) Supervisor, Designer, BusinessObjects Profile) Designer
Role) Creates universes and distributes them to end-users by sending them through the
file system, or by exporting them to the repository. Product) Designer, BusinessObjects

Profile) User
Role) The main BusinessObjects user whose tasks are to query, report, and analyze
data. Users can produce documents containing data from one or more data sources.
There can be an unlimited number of users. Product) BusinessObjects

Profile) Versatile
Role) This user is authorized to use any combination of products defined by a
supervisor.

Q) How do you create a user group?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the group in which you want to create a new group.
2) Click on the toolbar.
3) Type a group name, and press the Enter key.

Q) How do you know if a user is Disabled?


A) A sad face means the user has disabled him/herself by failing the password check X
number of times. A user disabled intentionally via the Supervisor module will have a red
circle X over him/her.

Q) How do you enable a User?


A) Right click on the disabled user and select enable.

Q) How many strikes does it take before a user disables themselves?


A) 3 is the default but a General Supervisor can change this setting in tools/options.

Q) What is a Category?
A) A keyword or phrase created by Supervisor and stored in the repository, which end-
users can assign to documents when they send them to users, groups, or Broadcast
Agent. Users can then filter document searches in the repository by assigned category.

Designer Questions
Q) What is a Universe?
A) A universe is a business-oriented mapping of the data structure found in databases:
tables, columns, joins, etc. It can represent any specific application, system, or group of
users. For example, a universe can relate to a department in a company such as
marketing or accounting. In the BusinessObjects User module, universes enable end
users to build queries from which they can generate and perform analysis. Universes
isolate end users from the complexities of the database structure as well as the
intricacies of SQL syntax.

Q) How many Universes did you create?

Q) Tell me how many classes where there, and objects in each class?

Q) What is an Object?
A) An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a derivation
of data in the database. Using objects, end users can build queries to generate reports.

Q) What is Object qualification?


A) For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of three
types: dimension, detail, or measure.

Q) Tell me about a complicated object you have created?

Q) What was the size of the database? Which server?

Q) What was the Database? Was it a data warehouse?

Q) What problems you have faced while creating a universe?

Q) Tell me an incident and how you went about solving it?

Q) How many Tables was the universe built?

Q) What is a loop, how do you resolve them?


A) A situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another in
the universe.

Q) What do prefer an Alias or a context? Why?


A) Alias - A logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to
resolve loops in the paths of joins.
A) Context - A context is a rule by which Designer can decide which of two paths to
choose when more than one path is possible from one table to another. Contexts can be
used to resolve loops in the universe. You can create contexts manually, or cause them
to be detected by Designer. When contexts are useful, Designer suggests a list of
contexts that you can create.

Q) What is join? Explain different types of joins?


A) A relational operation that causes two tables with a common column to be combined
into a single table. Designer supports equi-joins, theta joins, outer joins, and shortcut
joins.

Q) What are linked universes? Have you worked with them, problems faced and
solutions?
A) Linked universes are universes that share common components such as parameters,
classes, objects, or joins. Among linked universes, one universe is said to be the kernel
or master while the others are the derived universes.

BusObj Questions
Q) How many reports have you created? Explain a few?

Q) What are alerters, filters, breaks, conditions?


A) The Alerters dialog box allows you to create and apply alerters. Alerters use special
formatting to make data that fits specified conditions stand out from the rest of the
data. This helps draw attention to trends and exceptions in report data.
A) A filter enables you to hide the data you do not want to view and display only the
data you want to focus on. In the Apply a Filter on Variable Name dialog box, you
choose which values of the selected variable you want to display in the selected block.
A) Select the variables you want to use to insert a break. When you close the dialog box,
the variable you select is displayed in the Breaks dialog box. Break Level, sets the level
that the block of data will have in the report. You can have more than one break level to
organize blocks of data.
A) Conditions - feature that forces a query to retrieve only the data that meets specified
criteria.

Q) What's the difference between master-detail and Breaks?

Q) What's the difference between filters and conditions?

Q) What are pre-defined conditions? Compare with report conditions? Justify?

Q) What are the differences between a formula, variable and user objects?

Q) Did you face any problems while creating reports? Name? Solutions?

Q) How do you schedule the reports?

Q) What is a microcube? How many can a document have?


A) Local structure in which the data retrieved by a data provider is stored; contains the
data users can display in reports inside a document.

Q) Have you worked with multiple data sources? If yes. How do you link them?

Q) What are templates? Explain what you have created?

Q) How do you resolve #multivalue and #computation errors?

Q) Difference between Foreach and Forall?


A) Foreach - Adds a dimension to the calculation environment.
A) Forall - Specifies the dimensions you want to include in the calculation.

Q) Define a Cell, Block, and Section?


---------------------------------------------------------
1. How can you suppress the 'No data to fetch' messages in Reports?
A) There are a number of ways. VBA can be used to set Application.Interactive to Off.
But this will also prevent the user from responding to any prompts. You can also adjust
your query so that every data provider is a union to a table that returns at least one
row, thereby eliminating the possibility of returning no rows. That "special row" should
be designed so that it doesn't change (impact) the actual results should they be
returned.

2. How can you create a graph with horizontal bars?


A) Put the paper on the table, then get up and move around the corner. Now the chart is
horizontal instead of vertical. I've seen some interesting things done with the Repeat()
function to simulate horizontal (bar) charts as well.

3. When getting 'No data to fetch' msg, how can you make the report to display at least
one record?
A) Again, a union can be used to combine an extra row to a data provider, thereby
eliminating the "no data to fetch" message. Or you can have two blocks, one hidden
behind the other, where one block is displayed when there is data, and the other block
(with a hard-coded text message) displayed only when there is no data in the "real" data
provider.

4. How can you import a single-tab report into another multi-table report so the single-
tab report will keep its formatting?
A) Without VBA, use a template. You'll have to recreate the data provider from scratch.
With VBA, you can move (copy) the data provider to the multi-tabbed document, then
either via VBA or manually use a template to move the formatting. Bottom line is that
you use a template to move the formatting, but have to use VBA or manually move the
data provider as there is no feature within the product to do this.

5. Can you link the 'universe based' query to one based on RDBMS stored procedure?
A) I've never tried this, but I don't see why not. Since you can link a universe-based
query to a personal data provider, and that works just fine, I don't see why this wouldn't
work.

6. How can you display 5 top records only?


A) Need more information. Do you want the top 5 records based on some other value?
Or the "pure" top 5 based on the query? You have a number of choices... use the "rank"
feature in BusinessObjects, use "partial results" and limit the rows returned to 5 (using
a descending sort to get the right order), or use a Rank() feature of your RDBMS,
assuming one is available. But since we're talking about report solutions, that last one
probably should not be considered.

Issues with the reporter rank function include the fact that all data is returned,
resulting in a (potentially) large cube. But it will handle tied results. And by including a
break on some other dimension object, you can determine the top 5 per X, or some
other value.

Issues with the partial results include the fact that ties are not handled properly, and
you can only get the "overall" top 5, not the top 5 per some item.

7. What's the Detail object used for?


A) Officially, any non-defining attribute should be a detail object. So while customer ID
would be a dimension, customer name, address, phone, and so on should be details.
They are used primarily in an environment where lots of report linking is done. If you
don't use the linking technique, then details are less of an issue. Since details are
associated with a dimension, once their associated dimension is linked to some other
dimension, then the detail object is available (and valid) in a block with combined data.

Some objects (date objects come to mine) could be defined in a universe as both
dimensions and details. For example, Order Date could be a detail for Order Number.
The Order Number only has one Order Date. By setting Order Date to be a detail, you
can link on Order Number to some other data provider and continue to use Order Date
in the block without the famous "Variables are not compatible" message. Yet you may
want to drill on a hierarchy of Order Year, Order Quarter, Order Month, Order Date. In
that case, it would have to be a dimension.

Study all the NOTES in the .pdf documents

Questions for Interview:

Installation:

1. What is meant by Master Shared installation?


2. What is the purpose of Shared folder and Locdata folder?

Reporter:

1. Why do we go for Synchronization?


2. What is the main functionality of Do not generate SQL before running? When will it be useful?
3. Know the option Delete trailing blanks in the query panel.
4. What is the purpose of using Save and close?
5.

Differences between v5 and v6:

1. You can explain him about the option Do not retrieve data and its working in both versions.
2.

Supervisor:

If he asks Can you explain the issue which you remember more, from supervisor point of view, we can explain two
issues:

1. The general supervisor password expired with out modifications at the Supervisor module end. The password at
the database end expired. Check if it can possible?
2. When creating a new user, receiving the error that user already exists, though he is not visible in Supervisor. (Run
this SQL on therepository tables:

UPDATE OBJ_M_ACTOR
SET
M_ACTOR_N_LAT = 1
WHERE
M_ACTOR_C_NAME = 'user name'
0 (UNCHANGED) is only used by the developers, as a default value.

1 (DELETED) means that the object which was using this record has been deleted. The place is empty but could be in use
by another object. This is kept to avoid losing the unique ID number.

2 (INSERTED) means that this is a new record created for a new object (e.g., create a user, a domain, a connection, etc.).

4 (UPDATED) means that this object has been replaced by a newer version inside the record (e.g., renaming a user or
modifying a connection updates the corresponding data in the repository).

8 (INSERTEDUPONDELETED) means that the object has been created in a record which was unused (with value 1).

16 (MOVED) means that the object has been moved (for example, a user has been moved from a group to another).

3. M_GENPAR_N_VALUE column (In the column OBJ_M_GENPAR) for that record is changed from the version 5.x
value of 0 to the version 6.0/6.1x value of 1. This field is used to find whether the repository is of 5.x or 6.0/6.1x.

PS: The #121 GENPAR record is always the storage place for the repositorys unique identifier. This provides an easy
way to find out if a repository is in the version 5.x or the version 6.0/6.1x format, as illustrated with the following
SELECT statement:

select m_genpar_n_value
from obj_m_genpar
where m_genpar_n_id = 121

4. The repositorys unique identifier, stored in the OBJ_M_GENPAR tables M_GENPAR_C_LABEL column, consists of
hexadecimal strings of letters (A through F) and numbers (0 through 9) in the following format: xxxxxxxx-xxxx-xxxx-xxxx-
xxxxxxxxxxxx

5. OBJ_M_RESLINK, OBJ_M_MAGICID, OBJ_M_GENPAR.

THE VALUE OF M_MAGIC_N_ID IN THE TABLE OBJ_M_MAGICID IS INCREMENTED BY 1 FOR THE


M_MAGIC_NAME VALUE RESLINK. THE TABLE OJ_M_RESLINK IS INSERTED WITH SOME VALUES WHICH IN
TURN REPRESENT THE MORE SECURITY COMMANDS INCLUDED.

(PS: All the processes explained above are for the repository upgrade from 5.x to 6.0/6.1x only).

The following are the details of the up gradation process for 6.5.1.:

1. After the upgrade, the M_GENPAR_N_VALUE column for this record is changed to a value of 3. (Statement
updates the 121 record of the OBJ_M_GENPAR table to an M_GENPAR_N_VALUE value of 2. Considering
how this value is set to 3 by the end of the upgrade process, it seems that the value 2 is an intermediate
setting to show that the upgrade is currently in progress).

2. Statement creates a first new table for the version 6.5 repository, OBJ_M_USRATTR. Then the upgrade
process destroys the now-outmoded OBJ_M_CHANNEL table from the version 5.x or version 6.0/6.1x
repository. 6 more tables are added to the Universe domain. (25 Security, 1 Document, 30 Universe domain
tables).

Designer:

1. Check when we go for the Personal, Shared, and Secured connections?


2. Get more information on Strategies.
3. What is the scenario for getting the Cartesian Product?
4. What is the purpose of selecting the option Multiple select statements for each measure?
5. External strategies: An external strategy is a text file that contains the same type of information as the Built-in
stratgies, but customized to allow DESIGNER to retrieve a specific type of database information, or to optimize
how information is retrieved from the database.

6. The external strategy file is called in the STG section of the .PRM file for your RDBMS. External strategies are
available from the appropriate drop-down list box on the Strategies page of the Universe Parameters dialog box.
For complete information on defining external strategies, see the section "Defining External Strategies" in the
chapter "Designing a Schema."

7. You can also create your own external strategies. This topic is the subject of
8. Chapter 4, Creating External Strategies. Built-in strategies.
9. You can indicate the maximum number of rows to be retrieved from each table of the database (When you view
right click on the table and see column values). This only applies to the rows returned in DESIGNER, and not
for queries run in BUSINESSOBJECTS or WEBINTELLIGENCE.
10. Enter a value in the text box of the Maximum Number of Rows Fetched option.
11. You can also click one or more times on the up or down arrow to increase or
Decrease the default value (100).
12. Get more on the option Warn if cost estimate exceeds.
13. The time limit that you specify for query execution is the total execution time for a query. If the query contains
multiple SQL statements, then each statement is given an execution time equal to the total query execution time
divided by the number of statements.
14. Multiple SQL statements for each measure
Splits SQL into several statements whenever a query includes measure objects derived from columns
in different tables. See the section "Using multiple SQL statements for each measure" in the Designing a Schema
chapter for more information on using this option. If the measure objects are based on columns in the same table,
then the SQL is not split, even if this option is checked.

Know the pros/Cons of setting this option.

15. What is the need of Linked universes?

16. C for character


D for date
N for number
T for long text
L for blob (binary large object).

16. What is the meaning of Cardinality? The cardinality detection dont have effect on the SQL being generated when
creating a query, but its useful in detecting the contexts. Check how this feature is helpful in detecting the
cardinality?

--Why do we use the Lookup table?


--Understand the points given in the page 155.

Chasm Trap can be resolved by:

Creating a context. (Check if we dont use the alias to resolve the Chasm Trap)
Using the feature Multiple
SQL statements for each
measure.
Creating multiple
universes
(WEBINTELLIGENCE only).

To resolve Fan TRaps:

Creating an alias, creating


a context using the alias,
then building affected
measure objects on the
alias.
Using Multiple SQL
Statements for Each
Measure.
Check which one is better in between Alias and Context. What would be best scenario to use them?

How are aliases used in a schema?


You use aliases for two main reasons:
To use the table more than once in a query. This is the main reason for using aliases, and includes using aliases to
solve loops and fan traps. The example Beach universe contains 2 aliases; Resort_Country for Country, and Sponsor
for Customer.

To abbreviate the table name to save typing when writing freehand SQL. Tip: Another possible use of aliases is to
create an alias for each table as it is inserted into the schema. You then build the schema using the alias tables, not
the Sponsor is an alias for Customer, Resort_Country is an alias for Country original base tables. You place the base
tables together away from the main universe structure. This allows you to give meaningful names to tables, and
prevents the need to rebuild major sections of a universe structure should a base table need to be aliased at a later
stage.

A loop is a set of joins that defines a closed path through a set of tables in a schema. Loops occur when joins form
multiple paths between lookup tables You use an alias to break a loop by providing alternative table for an original
lookup table that is being used for multiple query paths.

The most common use of contexts is to separate two query paths, so that one query returns data for one fact table,
and the other query returns data for another fact table. You use contexts to direct join paths in a schema which
contains multiple fact tables. Aliases are not appropriate in such schemas.

Contexts are also used to solve potential chasm traps. These can occur when two many-to-one join paths converge
on a single table. Multiple rows can be returned for a single dimension causing inflated results. Contexts can split out
the query so that the correct number of rows are returned for the dimension. Contexts can also be used with aliases to
solve fan traps.

Work on Aggregate Awareness

chasm traps exist at the branch where two contexts meet.If you are adding or deleting a table or join within a context,
you should delete the context before making the modification to the table or join. Once the modification is complete,
you can either manually recreate the context if it is being used to solve a chasm trap, or use Detect Contexts to
automatically detect a new context if it is being used to resolve a loop.

If you have made only a simple change to the structure, you can update the joins that are included in each context
manually using either the Edit Context box or the List pane. However, if you have made significant changes to the
universe structure, you should delete the current contexts and re-create them.

A one-to one-cardinality positioned at the end of a join path can prevent Context Detection in DESIGNER from
detecting a context. You resolve this problem by changing the cardinality of the table at the end of the join path to one-
to-many.The important factor is not to have the one-to-one join at the end of the join path.

When two Select statements are synchronized in WEBINTELLIGENCE the results are returned as one table. This can
lead to data that is not necessarily related being interpreted by end users as related. This is an incorrect result. You
should avoid combinations of objects in WEBINTELLIGENCE universes that synchronize two Select statements.

Why loops in a universe schema and not in the database? (See page number 176 of the guide).

In the page number 183, the negative side of using an alias (the drawback of alias and the advantage of
context) is given.

If you created an alias for the Customer so that you had a Customer to Reservation join and a Customer_Sales to
Sales join, you break the loop, but if you want to add a City table to the schema, you end up with a loop again.

If loop contains... then loop can be resolved by...


Only one lookup table Alias
A look up table that
receivesonly "one" ends of joins Alias
Two or more fact tables Context
Detect Aliases: Detects tables that can be aliased to solve a loop in the structure and proposes a candidate alias for
each table. You can insert and rename the alias directly from the box. You should run Detect Aliases before Detect
Contexts to ensure that aliases that you create are included in any contexts that you implement. It does not detect the
need for an alias to resolve a fan trap.

General method for identifying and resolving loops:

Verify that all cardinalities are set.


Run Detect Aliases to identify if your schema needs an alias to solve any loops.
Insert the candidate aliases proposed by Detect Aliases. Or create it manually.
Run Detect Contexts to identify if your schema needs a context to solve a loop that could not be solved with an alias
only.
Implement the candidate contexts proposed by Detect Contexts. Or create the context manually.
Test the resolved loop by creating objects and running queries.

If you are resolving loops for a schema that already has objects defined on the tables, then you must redefine any
objects that now use an alias and not the base table.

Reminder: Before using Detect Aliases, verify that all the tables in schema are linked by joins, and that all cardinalities
are set.

Note: You can also use Check Integrity to automatically check for errors in universe structures, including joins,
cardinalities, and loops. Check Integrity proposes solutions to any errors it discovers.

Using an alias and context together, we can resolve a loop.

The COUNTRY table is used to look up both the customers country of residence and the shipment destination. This
type of table is called a shared lookup table.

How do you force BusinessObjects users to regenerate SQL in Supervisor when running a query?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to force a BusinessObjects user in Supervisor to regenerate the SQL when running a query. You
select the option in Configuration, "Query Technique" and then disable "Do not always regenerate SQL" but the
option is still available in the query panel via the SQL Viewer.

**********CAUSE**************
The "Do not always regenerate SQL" option is disabled only when you disable "Edit Query SQL" in Supervisor.

**********RESOLUTION******
In Supervisor under Configuration > Query Technique, disable the "Edit Query SQL" option.

Note: In BusinessObjects 5.0, the Refresh Data icon automatically regenerates the SQL and the actual SQL will
be displayed in the SQL Viewer.

How do I create a predefined setting in Supervisor that has everything revoked except one setting?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Business Objects 5.1.2

**********RESOLUTION******
1. Select the top level Group, open the Properties of the Module that you want to update the command
restrictions for.
2. Click on the Apply Predefined Settings button
3. From Select a Predefined Setting, select Everything Revoked, Click OK
4. Click OK to accept changes
5. From the menu, select Tools, Manage Predefined Settings
6. Click New and type in a name
7. You will then have a dialog box "Editing xxx Predefined Settings" where you can enable the desired setting
8. Click Save, and this will take you back to the Manage Predefined Settings dialog box
9. From the Select a Predefined Setting dropdown, select the new setting you have created
10. Click on Apply to Users and select the users that you want this to apply for.
11. Click OK to accept changes
12. Select the top level Group, open the Properties of the Module that you have updated the command
restrictions for.
13. Click on the Apply Predefined Settings button
14. From Select a Predefined Setting, select Default and Click OK
15. Click OK to accept changes
This will take you back to the original settings and the users will still have the new settings defined

How do you make your data series appear larger in relation to another data series? How do you create a
logarithmic chart?(V4&V5)

**********RESOLUTION******
1. Select the Axis Labels for the Y-Axis.
2. Click 'Format' and 'Axis Labels.'
3. Select the 'Scale' tab.
4. Click the 'Logarithmic' radio button in the 'Scale' box.
5. Click Apply / OK.

The smaller data series will increase in size relative to the other data series.

You can also customize the sizes by typing specific values for minimum, maximum and major unit in the Value
Axis Scale section on the Format > Axis Scales menu.

This has been tested in V5.x and works the same way in V5.x
NOTE: In V5 there is also a new option for Scale adjustment: "Adjust Scale to Value Range"

How do I display overlapping data series in my chart?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have two data series (groups) that you wish to display in the same graph. You want to have them arranged
so that their values may be compared when viewed.

**********CAUSE**************

**********RESOLUTION******
To display both data series on the same graph, we need to add a Group, then move one of the measures down
into the new Group:

1. Highlight a chart containing multiple measure objects whose graphs will overlap.
2. Right click and select Edit Chart > Series tab.
3. Under Groups and Data Series, click Add.
4. Click the plus symbol on Group 1 to expand it.
5. Drag the measure objects to be displayed in the background from Group 1 into Group 2.
6. Highlight this measure object, and under Associated Axis, select Secondary.
7. Click Apply.

INTERNAL USE ONLY: How can I make all the months appear in a chart or crosstab when there is no data for
a particular month? (v4&v5)

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects versions 4.x and 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to make all of the months appear in a chart or a crosstab when there is no data for a particular month.

**********RESOLUTION******
Use the following workaround when you do not have all of the months. It will create a second object from the
body of the crosstab with zeroes appearing in the block or chart where the missing months were located:

1. Create an Excel file with the 12 months.


2. Open a new BusinessObjects document, and insert the table created on the Excel file.
3. Delete the table, but not the query.
4. Insert a new table based on the database without all of the months and the rest of the objects.
5. Delete this month table, but not the query.
6. Link the month objects of the two dataproviders through Data > View.
7. Insert a new table based on the existing data using the month object from the Excel file as well as your other
objects, and then turn it into a chart.

For example:

Month Sales
Jan 0
Feb 0
March 0
... ...

INTERNAL USE ONLY: How can you use a dimension objects in a chart's Y-axist?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to put a dimension object (such as year) in the Y-axis of a chart, and the measures (such as revenue) in
the X-axis. BusinessObjects does not allow this.

**********RESOLUTION******
At this time, BusinessObjects does not allow you to use dimension objects in the Y-axis.

There are two enhancement requests that have been logged on this issue:
ER # 2782 and ER # 5534

Both of these enhancement requests request the ability to use objects of type "dimension" in a chart's Y-axis.

How do you filter out small values in a pie chart without changing the values of the remaining percentages?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 4.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have a pie chart with numerous values.
You display the values as percentages, but the large number of values are not easily read in the chart.
If you remove the small values using a filter, then the percentages change.
You want to filter out some values in a pie chart without changing the value of the remaining percentages.

**********RESOLUTION******
Here are the steps to follow:

1. In your table with the option add a calculation to make the sum for all the values <revenue> (new
variable=<Sum>)

2. Add a new variable called <Test> = if <revenue> > 1000000 then <revenue>
This way you retrieve the values you want.

3. Add a column with the formula =<Test>/(<Sum In Report) ---> variable <total>

4. Change the format for this last column = percentage.

5. Create your pie chart with the values <total> in the Y axis.

6. In the chart, check the option "Display the Label".

7. Change the format of the values in the chart.

How do you make a pie chart when you only have only two measures (or two dimensions)?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to create a pie chart and you only have two measure objects, but the chart only displays one measure.
For example, you want to produce a pie chart based on number of yes and no answers that customers gave to a
questionnaire. The following Excel spreadsheet appears to have two separate measure objects:

Yes No
12 18

However, it has only one dimension, let's call it "Answer", and one measure, let's call it "Numbers for each type
of Answer".
The issue is that if you create a report based on this spreadsheet, then BusinessObjects will consider it as a
database containing two measures. This can be verified in the microcube.
If you select "First row contains columns names" when you open the Excel file, then it will only change the
appearance of the table, but it will not effect the way BusinessObjects processes the objects (i.e., two measures).
Therefore, the charts created will be meaningless.

**********CAUSE**************
BusinessObjects cannot create a chart unless it has at least one dimension and one measure.

**********RESOLUTION******
The data in the spreadsheet should have the following format:
Yes 12
No 18

To do this, you can copy the table and select "Paste Special" and then check the option "Transpose".
If you also add a row with some meaningful column names (in Excel) and select "First row contains columns
names" when creating the report in BusinessObjects, then your table will be easier to read.
Answer Numbers
Yes 12
No 18

Now you can create meaningful charts.

How to display a picture / image / bitmap in the report background?

**********RESOLUTION******
1. Open your report in BusinessObjects.
2. Select View > Page Layout.
3. Select Format > Page Background.
4. Click on new, then select the desired bitmap.

How do you automatically insert double quotes around column names in the object definition?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 4.x and 5.x
Oracle databases

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You create a table in Oracle with column names in lower case as shown below:

create table EMP ("customer" VARCHAR(5), "ID" VARCHAR(5));

You insert the table in Designer but there are no double quotes in the column names. You run the query and
receive the error, "ORA-00904: invalid column name: 904."

**********CAUSE**************
Oracle stores the string in Data Dictionary exactly as it appears when you use double quotes in a column name.
The usual conversion from lower case to upper case is not performed and thus you receive the error message
above.

**********RESOLUTION******
Use the Struct strategy to add double quotes around column names when new objects are created. To add the
new object strategy in the stora7xx.txt file (where 'xx' is your language):
1. Go to Business Objects > Data Access x.x folder and open the Oracle subfolder.
2. Add the following lines in stora7xx.txt:
[STRATEGY]
TYPE=STRUCT
NAME = Adding double quotes around column names

[SQL]
SQL=
SELECT '','|',UCOL.OWNER,'|',UCOL.TABLE_NAME,'|','"'||UCOL.COLUMN_NAME||'"','|',
decode(SUBSTR(UCOL.DATA_TYPE,1,1),'N','N','F','N','D','D','C'),'|',decode(UCOL.NULLABLE,'Y','1','N','0','
2')
FROM
ALL_TAB_COLUMNS UCOL
WHERE UCOL.OWNER='DEMO';

[HELP]
HELP= This strategy adds double quotes around column names

3. Go to Designer > File > Parameters and click the Strategies tab.
4. Select "Tables: Adding double quotes around column names" and click Apply.

All objects you create should now have double quotes.

Note: The only condition is "where DEMO is the owner of the table". Change that according to your situation.

The list of value ( lov ) is empty when running a query .

*****CONFIGURATION******
Sql server 7
BO 5.0
WINDOWS NT 4

***********SYMPTOMS*******
When the customer run a query which one includes
a @prompt and a lov , the list of values appears empty.
NB: 1-Upgraded from Sql Server v6.5 to Sql Server v7 .
2-Upgraded from bo v4 to bo v5.
3-The lovs contains some dates .

**********CAUSE**************
The InputDateFormat parameter in the SBO file does not give the same format at the one in the database :
The format date used by BO is ('yyyy-mm-dd HH:mm:ss') and the format date in SQL 7.x ('dd-mm-yyyy
hh:mm:ss').
The process does not send back any information about the conflict of dates , but react by showing an empty lov.

**********RESOLUTION******
-Edit your ODBC.sbo
-Look for: InputDateFormat='yyyy-mm-dd HH:mm:ss'.
-Change to InputDateFormat='dd-mm-yyyy HH:mm:ss'
How do you create a line graph with a trend line?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know how to create a line graph with a trend line.

**********RESOLUTION******
Here are the steps to follow:
1. Go to Insert > Column > Right of the selection.
2. Insert the following formula:

=RunningAverage(<Object that the trend line will be based on>)

3. Highlight the new column and go to Format > Define as Variable.


4. Enter a name for your variable, check the option "Keep the Formula Generic", and then click OK.
5. Right-click the body of the table and then select "Turn to Chart".
6. Highlight the graph, right-click on it, and then select "Autoformat".
7. Under Chart Types, select "Line".

How do you build a graph which displays different measure objects using different formatting all on the same
set of axis?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.0.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You wish to build a graph within BusinessObjects that allows you to show one measure object as a bar and one
measure object as a line on the same chart by month.

**********RESOLUTION******
Use the following workflow:

You wish to build a graph within BusinessObjects that allows you to show "Actuals" as a bar and "Plan" as a
line on the same chart by month:

1. Create a regular table with "Actual" and "Plan" as dimension objects.


2. Turn the table into a bar chart.
3. Right click on the chart and select the "Edit Chart..." option.
4. Click the "Series" tab.
5. In the "Groups and Data Series" window, add another group using the "Add" button.
6. Move the "Plan" dimension object into the new group.
7. The graph type for this group can now be changed by clicking on the group and then clicking on the required
graph type (e.g. line graph).

How do I have a graph and table that depend on a section value in BusinessObjects Version 5?
*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x.

***********SYMPTOMS*******
How can you represent in a same report a table and graph independent of each other in a Section?

You find that you cannot format sections to have a graph and table in the same report, and that any change you
made is applied in the entire report.

**********RESOLUTION******
The following was created using the Island Resorts Marketing demonstration universe:

1. Select objects Country and Revenue and Run Query.


2. Set Country as Section.
3. Copy Table and Paste it beside the first one.
4. Turn the first section of the second table into Chart.
5. Go to Format > Chart > Appearance > Hide Block.
6. Edit the formula: Country = France. (From the chart)
7. On the table, select Format > Table > Appearance > Hide Block.
8. Edit the Formula: Country = US.
8. Copy the chart and Paste it underneath the table.

How does BusinessObjects automatically generate the scale when a graph is built?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have the following two tables with which you want to build graphs on the same report:

Table1:x-axis1y-axis1 Table2:x-axis2y-axis2
Cost1 10000 Cost1 10000
Cost2 25000 Cost2 10010
Cost3 30000 Cost3 10020

You then notice that:

- Graph1 built with Table1 has its y-axis beginning at 0.


- Graph2 built with Table2 has its y-axis beginning at a value close to the minimum of 10000.

**********RESOLUTION******
BusinessObjects will automatically generate the scale for a graph that has one or more curves under the
following circumstances:

- If the difference between the maximum and minimum values on the y-axis is greater than 20% of the
maximum value, then the y-axis begins at 0.
- If the difference between the maximum and minimum values is not greater than 20% of maximum value, then
the y-axis does not begin at 0; BusinessObjects will automatically re-scale the graph accordingly. These
adjustments are automatically made for legibility reasons: Graph2 would be flat if the y-axis had to begin at 0.
Note: The user can modify the automatic display as desired. This behavior is the same as with Microsoft
Excel.

An enhancement request (ER # 13095) has been logged for this issue requesting the ability to increase the limit
of the axis by 20% to 40% in order to get the graph better scaled.

The Scale option on the X-Axis label format does not work correctly.

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
The Scale tab is not present in the "Format Axis label" option on the X-Axis, using a 2 dimensional type Graph.

**********CAUSE**************
The X-Axis contains fixed values for a Dimension or a Measure object, so the Scale options cannot be
modified.

An enhancement request (ER # 13095) has been logged reuesting the ability to adjust the scale of a chart by
entering a minimum, a maximum, and the major unit.

**********RESOLUTION******
A workaround for this issue is to apply a Scatter type graph by going to Edit > Chart. The fixed values for a
Dimension or a Measure object are represented as points in the actual Graph and the "Scale" tab is available for
the X-Axis.

What do the .PRM files do, and where are they stored?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know more about the function of parameter (.PRM) files and where they are located in Business
Objects products.

**********RESOLUTION******
DESCRIPTION
The PRM file is a parameter file used to configure the universe creation and the generation of SQL Queries, in
the BusinessObjects and WebIntelligence products. For each RDBMS engine defined in a .SBO file, there is
usually a distinct .PRM file that designates the appropriate parameters to be used for accessing data for the
specific supported target database platform via the appropriate middle ware.

Each .PRM file is divided into four major sections: RDBMS, Date, Operators, and Functions. Within each
.PRM file, there is always one of each section. Some parameters can be modified in a text editor while others
cannot.

LOCATION
The location of the .prm files is in the BusinessObjects program file in a subfolder with the database product
name associated with the database connection.
For example, BusinessObjects has a connection to Oracle version 7.3, the name and location of the relevant file
is: Name - Ora7en.prm, Location - C:\Program Files\BusinessObjects\Oracle\

The Parameter (.PRM) files for some of the specific databases are:

DB2: Db2400en.prm , DB2en.prm, Db2peen.prm, DB2v5en.prm


Informix: Ifxen.prm, Ifxseen.prm
Odbc: Acc2en.prm, Dbaseen.prm, Ing94en.prm, Odbc10en.prm, Rdben.prm, Sqlsvren.prm
Oracle: Ora7en.prm
Redbrick: Redb40en.prm
Sybase: Db2mdien.prm, Siq11en.prm, Syb10en.prm, Syb49en.prm
Teradata: Teraen.prm, Tarav2en.prm

Additional files may exist depending on the database version.

How do we use the lsi file for the access to Business Objects reports

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects 5.1

***********SYMPTOMS*******
When you open a report with BusinessObjects, how does BusinessObjects know if the user has access to teh
report or not?

**********RESOLUTION******
When a user logs in to BusinessObjects, his rights are downloaded locally and stored in the lsi file related to the
key file used.

In that file we store the id of all the documents the user can access.

When a user tries to open a document, the lsi file is accessed to check if the document id is listed as authorized
for that user.

If the user profile is defined with the option Enable Real Time User Rights Update , the repository will be
accessed each time the user tries to open a document to check that the most up-to-date information is available.

If the lsi is not up-to-date when a user tries to open a document he could be not authorized to do so even if the
reality he should be.

Another reason not to be authorized would be that a document has been secured on one repository and tried to
be accessed while connected to another repository and so the lsi file accessed would be different.

Another known issue for that is regarding reports sent to others users via email by the Business Objects Menu.
(Bug #1046889 fixed in SP6).

How do you prevent the creation of the Bomain.key file?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x
Supervisor version 5.x
Windows NT 4 SP6a

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to forbid the creation of the Bomain.key file for a user who has Supervisor.

**********RESOLUTION******
Follow these steps to prevent the creation of the Bomain.key file:
1. Run the BusinessObjects setup.
2. In the installation screen and click on Modify.
3. Define the User Login Information as Local.
4. Define the Security Domain (*.KEY) as Shared.
5. Create the *.key file in the machine.
6. As the local administrator, right click on the shared folder and go to Properties > Security tab > Permissions.
7. Set the permission for "Everyone" to Read.

Now when you try to create the *.KEY file, the following error message is displayed:
"ERROR cannot create *.key file (ADW0007)".

Note: This resolution is more effective in a shared environment.

If you receive the error message "Invalid *.key file" when you are trying to login then the *.key file is not the
one used to create the *.lsi file (USR0030). Delete the *.lsi file and login again.

Why do you have both a *.key file and an *.lsi file downloaded with BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) at
the same time as the *.rkey file?

*****CONFIGURATION******
WebIntelligence version 2.7
BusinessObjects version 5.1.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
When you use BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO), then you do not need to have any middleware installed
on your client machine, and the only link that BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) has is with the
WebIntelligence Server is done through the *.rkey file.

You want to know why the *.key file, which contains information to access the repository and is not used for
BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO), is downloaded when you run BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode
(ZABO)?

Also, you want to know why the *.lsi file is also downloaded.

**********RESOLUTION******
A *.key file is always associated with an *.lsi file; the *.lsi file contains the security and access restrictions for a
user.
For normal BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) use, these files are not used locally because the files
contained on the WebIntelligence Server are used instead.

However, because it is possible to log into BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) in offline mode (without
access to the WebIntelligence Server), it is necessary to locally store the user rights information. This
information is stored in the *.lsi file.
In order to read an *.lsi file, you must first have selected the associated *.key file. Both files are uploaded and
then updated on the local machine each time that you log into BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) in order
to allow you to log in offline later, if necessary.

How do we use the lsi file for the access to Business Objects reports

***********SYMPTOMS*******
When you open a report with BusinessObjects, how does BusinessObjects know if the user has access to teh
report or not?

**********RESOLUTION******
When a user logs in to BusinessObjects, his rights are downloaded locally and stored in the lsi file related to the
key file used.

In that file we store the id of all the documents the user can access.

When a user tries to open a document, the lsi file is accessed to check if the document id is listed as authorized
for that user.

If the user profile is defined with the option Enable Real Time User Rights Update , the repository will be
accessed each time the user tries to open a document to check that the most up-to-date information is available.

If the lsi is not up-to-date when a user tries to open a document he could be not authorized to do so even if the
reality he should be.

Another reason not to be authorized would be that a document has been secured on one repository and tried to
be accessed while connected to another repository and so the lsi file accessed would be different.

Another known issue for that is regarding reports sent to others users via email by the Business Objects Menu.
(Bug #1046889 fixed in SP6).

Is there an automatic way of deploying Objects.lsi locally on each client machine

Is there an automatic way of deploying Objects.lsi locally on each client machine rather than manually copying
the objects.lsi from the master for 150 users.
******CONFIGURATION******
BO 5.1
*********SOLUTION********
Install BO version 5.1 on the server as a master then open security.key find the parameter Objects = Shared and
change to
Objects = Local when the client machine installation is is done and user login to BO the Objects.lsi will be
automatically put on the client machine in the LocData folder

Are LSI files used in BusinessObjects XI R2?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects XI R2
Windows

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have recently deployed BusinessObjects XI R2. You want to know if this release utilizes *.lsi files as
previous versions did, and if so, where they are located.

**********RESOLUTION******
BusinessObjects XI R2 uses the *.lsi files in the same way as previous releases. Their default location is the
following path:

c:\Documents and Settings\user-name\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 11.5\lsi

What is the function of the RSS files under the Data Access folder?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects 4.x, 5.x and 6.x
WebIntelligence
2.x and 6.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You notice in your full-client
or server installation several files with an RSS extension located under the
Data Access folder. These files have database-specific names such as "db2udb.rss"
and "oracle.rss" and correspond to the connectivity support you purchased. You
want to know the purpose of these
files.

**********RESOLUTION******
Business Objects products can communicate with a variety of databases, and SQL
syntax requirements vary between them. The software code is designed to be generic
with respect to supported connectivities, and relies on the RSS files to act as
translators to specific databases. The software is built with procedures that
perform very specific functions, and the RSS files store the exact SQL to handle
the database transaction(s) involved with those functions. For example, you create
a new document domain in an Oracle database with Supervisor's "Repository Management" tool. Supervisor
handles this with a procedure
called "InsertRepoItem" but the procedure itself does not contain any SQL. The
connection defined for the new document domain identifies Oracle as the database
engine to use. Therefore, Supervisor knows to reference the "oracle.rss" file to
get Oracle-specific SQL to create the new OBJ_X_DOCUMENTS for the new document
domain.

Note: The RSS files are not simple text files and cannot be opened
or edited in a standard text editor. They are static and used in read-only
fashion by the Business Objects software.

What is "DOS Format" option for and why it is used when exporting the data to
the text files?
*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects 5.x
BusinessObjects
6.x

*********WARNING***********

***********SYMPTOMS*******

In Data
manager Export option, What is "DOS Format" option for and why it is used when
exporting the data to the text files?

**********CAUSE**************

**********RESOLUTION******

The word-processing import formats tend


to be early versions of the particular formats listed and trying to import a
later
version will nearly always fail. Many word-processors have the ability to
save files in the format of earlier versions and this
should be requested
where possible. Use DOS Format, which stores the file in an ASCII format. While
this will (nearly)
always work, all formatting characters will be lost (bold,
indents etc) and paragraphs will frequently need manually reformatting.

1. Choose Format as Text Files(*.asc,*.prn,*.txt,*.csv) under Export to Local


File Format
2. Enable DOS Format

Exports the data into an ASCII format and this ASCII format file can be used by earlier versions of word-
processing
(DOS
Version) applications. ASCII is a character set used by many MS-DOS
programs.

Early DOS Versions like#

Microsoft Word
3.0, 4.0, 5.0 & 5.5 (DOS Version)
WordPerfect 5.0, 5.1

Wordstar 3.4.5, 4.0, 5.0, 5.5 etc

What is the maximum number


of rows that can be exported to
CSV and Excel XLS files from
BusinessObjects and InfoView?
Length of Resolution 1758
Resolution *****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.1.6
WebIntelligence
version 2.7.2
Excel 95 and above

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want
to know what the maximum number of rows that
BusinessObjects and InfoView can
export to CSV and XLS files.

**********RESOLUTION******
Excel 95 can
handle a maximum of 16384 rows, while Excel 97
and above can handle a maximum of
65536 rows. This is an Excel limitation and is still
applicable to Excel
XP.

Full-client BusinessObjects version 5.1.7 gives you


the ability to export to
an XLS file or to a CSV file. It is recommended that
you export the dataprovider
to a CSV file because if the number of rows in a
BusinessObjects report is over
16384 rows and you try to export directly to XLS
format, then you will receive
error "Spreadsheet is full (3437)" followed by error
"Export failed! (DMA0005)"
and the Excel file will be created but will be empty.

WebIntelligence
version 2.7.x can only export the dataprovider
content of a thin-client report to a CSV file. You can
then access this CSV file from any application.
If you open the file from Excel, then you will
receive the message "File not
loaded completely" and only first 65536 rows will
be imported. If you open a
full-client BusinessObjects report from
WebIntelligence version 2.7.x, then you cannot
download it to either CSV or XLS format.

Note: It is unknown how many


rows that can be exported to a CSV file from
BusinessObjects version 5.1.x or
WebIntelligence version 2.7.x, but it has been
successfully tested with 200 000
rows.

What is the purpose of the .SBO files and where are they kept?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know what the purpose of the .SBO files and where they
are kept.

**********RESOLUTION******
The SBO file is a parameter file
used to configure the behavior of SQLBO, a component of the BusinessObjects and
WebIntelligence products.

For each network layer, there is one SBO file


that defines the "driver" by designating the appropriate parameters to be used
for accessing data and managing a repository on the various supported target
database platforms via the appropriate middleware.

Each SBO file is divided


into three major sections: SQL Syntax, Defaults, and RDBMS Engine. Within each
SBO file, there is always one "Defaults" section, one "SQL Syntax" section, and
one or more "RDBMS Engine" sections.

The location of the .sbo files used


is dependent on the databases being connected to. They are located in the
following path:

/BusinessObjects/ DataAccess 5.0/<database_name>

What are the files "wininet.dll" and "wintdist.exe" used for?

*****CONFIGURATION******
WebIntelligence version 2.x
Windows operating
systems

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know what the files
"wininet.dll" and "wintdist.exe" are used
for.

**********RESOLUTION******
The "wininet" file is used to download the WebIntelligence ActiveX webpanel and
reader, as well as BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO).

The "wininet"
module supports the Microsoft Win32 Internet (WinInet) API set. It provides
access to common Internet protocols such as Gopher, FTP, and HTTP. It allows you to
write Internet client applications at a higher level of programming without
having to deal with WinSock, TCP/IP, or the details of specific Internet protocols.
It provides a consistent set of functions for all three protocols, with a
familiar Win32 API interface.

Functions of the Wininet API are called using the


"wininet.dll", which is redistributed with "wintdist.exe" as part of the
Microsoft ActiveX SDK.

**********MORE***************
See the following address for more information on the Microsoft Win32 Internet (WinInet) API

set:

http://msdn.microsoft.com/library/default.asp?url=/library/en-
us/vccore98/html/_core_wininet_.28.http.2c_.ftp.2c_.gopher.29.asp

What are the column headings for the "user.log" and "userdet.log" files?

WebIntelligence version 2.6.x


Any
database

*********WARNING***********

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You
want to know what the column headings for the "user.log" and "userdet.log" files
refer
to.

**********CAUSE**************

**********RESOLUTION******
For the "user.log" file columns, from left to right:
- Event ID: The
serial number automatically generated by WebIntelligence. It links to the
"userdet.log" file event ID.
- Monitored event: This value ranges from one ("1") to
39. See page 245 of the WebIntelligence System Administrator's Guide PDF file
for the values.
- The time in UTC format.
- The time in readable
format.
- Event duration: When the expected information is not available, the event is
generated anyway and set to "-1". See resolution entry # 7337 for more
information.
- Username: If the value is "unknown", it is because the user clicked the
login button and the session had not yet been established; therefore a user name had not been associated.
- Product ID: See page 248 of the WebIntelligence
System Administrator's Guide PDF file for the values.
- Error ID: If no error
occurs, then the value is set to zero ("0") as a placeholder.
- The machine
name.

For the "userdet.log" file columns, from left to right:


- Event
ID: The serial number automatically generated by WebIntelligence. It links to the
"user.log" file event ID.
- Info ID or document domain ID: Some Info ID
values are set to a default value of "-1". See resolution entry # 7337 for more
information.
- Event details: See pages 250 to 267 of the WebIntelligence System
Administrator's Guide PDF file for the specific action/machine
name/application, etc. associated with each event.
- Event details in numeric format: See
page 249 of the WebIntelligence System Administrator's Guide PDF file for the
values.

What do the .PRM files do, and where are they stored?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version
5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know more about the function of parameter (.PRM) files
and where they are located in Business Objects
products.

**********RESOLUTION******
DESCRIPTION
The PRM file is a parameter file used to configure
the universe creation and the generation of SQL Queries, in the BusinessObjects
and WebIntelligence products. For each RDBMS engine defined in a .SBO file,
there is usually a distinct .PRM file that designates the appropriate parameters to
be used for accessing data for the specific supported target database platform
via the appropriate middle ware.

Each .PRM file is divided into four


major sections: RDBMS, Date, Operators, and Functions. Within each .PRM file,
there is always one of each section. Some parameters can be modified in a text
editor while others cannot.

LOCATION
The location of the .prm files is in
the BusinessObjects program file in a subfolder with the database product name associated with the database
connection.

For example,
BusinessObjects has a connection to Oracle version 7.3, the name and location of the
relevant file is: Name - Ora7en.prm, Location - C:\Program
Files\BusinessObjects\Oracle\

The Parameter (.PRM) files for some of the specific databases


are:

DB2: Db2400en.prm , DB2en.prm, Db2peen.prm,


DB2v5en.prm
Informix: Ifxen.prm, Ifxseen.prm
Odbc: Acc2en.prm,
Dbaseen.prm, Ing94en.prm, Odbc10en.prm, Rdben.prm,
Sqlsvren.prm
Oracle: Ora7en.prm
Redbrick: Redb40en.prm
Sybase: Db2mdien.prm,
Siq11en.prm, Syb10en.prm, Syb49en.prm
Teradata: Teraen.prm,
Tarav2en.prm

Additional files may exist depending on the database version.

What are the differences between the two files in the SetUp folder: Setup.key and LICENCE.key?

Summary
Licence.key no longer exists, it is now License.txt, a text file containing the product key
entered during Setup, in clear.Setup.key contains the valid keys and the available
options for each value, and this file is encoded. How it works:

1/ At the beginning, there is no license.txt.

2/ During Setup, the customer enters a product key.

3/ The Setup programs checks this key against those encoded in Setup.key, and enables
the associated options

4/ The program stores the key in License.txt.

5/ Whenever Setup program is rerun, it first tries the key in license.txt. Before asking
the customer (no need to re-enter the key if it's valid)

Temp directory

Here is an explanation on what you can find in the Temp file :


X:\\Business Objects\BusinessObjects 5.0\Temp
You will be able to see all those folder depending on which workflow you are doing :

1- BOMGR
bcs
webi
2- Cache
<Cachebcafolder>
3- Sessions
AdminBOTools
Audit
Session ID Name

1- folder BOMGR
Once you log in Infoview :

the folder bcs :


Each time you send a FC report to BCA and that the task is executed a folder
"BCA_servername_xxxx_xxxx_xx_x"\"BCAname_docname" is created.
This folder will contain the report ran and the security parameters (.key,.lsi).

the folder webi :


You click on a BO doc in Corporate :
Just when you click, the <Session ID> directory is created in TEMP/BOMgr/webi/ :
Each time you will open a FC report in Webi, the report will be inserted under the directory
Temp\BOMGR\webi\<Session ID>\wi00000001\<rapport>.
If you click a second time on the doc or in anothner one, the following is created wi00000002.
We will be able to see in the <session ID> dir the security parameters and a file which will contain the SQL
generation of the report.

2- Folder Cache

This folder is only used for the BCA tasks and when the Scheduler login task is up to 0.
A folder <7d26c1032....> is created which contains security parameters and a file with user name and
passwords, is then generated and all X minutes this folder will be updated.

KB : 10397

For the SQL generation in webintelligence takes twice as long if multiple contexts
3- Folder sessions

A folder "audit" is generated when you start webi with all the security parameters (BOMain.key,
BOMain.lsi, servername.key, servername.lsi, servername.rkey).

A folder AdminBOTool which is created when you monitor a BCA. It contains all the security
parameters.

A folder with the <Session ID> name : The name of this directory is thing like EN5472E621QT4
where the first 2 letters are the language selected and the last ones are the name of the WIQT process
that handle user's session.

After the user connexion this directory will contain :


o The security parameters : the bomain.key (access to the repository), bomain.lsi (data security cache)
o The session dir ( Temp/sessions/EN5472E621QT4 ) contains the following files when you click on a
WEBI doc in Corp, Perso or Inbox :
059d3706
059d38a0
The security parameters : BOMain.key (access to the repository) and BOMain.lsi (data security
cache)
r<number of doc opened by user>.tmp : data about the docs
r<number of doc opened by user>p<page number>.tmp : html to display one page of the doc.
For example if the doc contains 500 pages, 500 files will are created, from r0p0.tmp to r0p499.tmp
o If you return to your list and click on this doc again, the temporary files are
recreated, even if they already exist: the temp files are never removed and
reused in a same session.
o When he logs off, this directory and all its contents is removed.

UDS Designer - unable to specify the target data source (univers).

*****CONFIGURATION******
Windows 2000, 2003
BO-UDS Designer E651

*********WARNING***********

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You run UDS designer to create or update a map to do some drill trough but when you try to define the Target
Data Source you just see quickly the popup and nothing happens.

**********CAUSE**************
Issue when trying to download universe from repository.

**********RESOLUTION******
Open windows explorer and go your own folder for BO universes. It is located into :
C:\Documents and Settings\<user_account>\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 6.0\universes

Rename this universe folder to


C:\Documents and Settings\<user_account>\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects
6.0\universes_old for example
Create a new folder called universes at the same location. So you'll have two differents folders like :
C:\Documents and Settings\<user_account>\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects
6.0\universes_old
and
C:\Documents and Settings\<user_account>\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 6.0\universes

Then run UDS Designer again and you'll be prompted to select a universe normally. Save your map, it works
now.

INTERNAL USE ONLY: How can you merge two repositories into a single one using only one
"BOMain.key" file?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x
All
RDBMS

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have two repositories, "repositoryA' and
"repositoryB".
You want to merge them into one repository so that users from both
repositories can access it with one single "BOMain.key"
key.

**********RESOLUTION******
Note: The following resolution is not supported by
BusinessObjects.

Here are the steps to follow:


1. Connect to "repositoryA" as a
General Supervisor.
2. Go to File > Export User/group > Save as a text
file.
3. Connect to "repositoryB" as a General Supervisor.
4. Create a new
group with the same name as the one used for "repositoryA".
5. Go to File
> Import User/ group > Browse to your text file.
6. In "repositoryA",
import all of the reports and universes to a Windows NT folder (use Tools >
Import universes).
7. Delete the Document and Universe Domains in "repositoryA"
(use Tools > Repository).
8. In "repositoryB", create new Universe and Document Domains "repositoryA_unv" and "repositoryA_doc" by
using the connection to your "repositoryA"
database (use Tools > Repository).
9. Disable the "repositoryB" users
from accessing the Domains "repositoryA_unv" and "repositoryA_doc".
10. Disable
the "repositoryA" users from accessing the Domains "repositoryB_unv" and
"repositoryB_doc".
11. Export all of the reports and universes to correct folder for
"repositoryB" (use Tools > Export universes).

How to find the version of the repository we are using

There is a way to determine if your repository is 5.x or 6.x. If you look at the OBJ_M_GENPAR table, there is a record in
there that will let you know if it is 5.x or 6.x. In this table, look up the M_GENPAR_N_ID where it equals 121. Look at the
M_GENPAR_N_VALUE for this record. If it is equal to 0 then it is 5.x. If it is equal to 1 or 3 then it is a 6.x version.

How do you configure Windows Installer to generate a log file when installing WebIntelligence, Apache
or Tomcat?

*****CONFIGURATION******
WebIntelligence version 6.5
Windows
2000
Apache web server
Tomcat application
server

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You attempt to install WebIntelligence version 6.5, Apache web server and Tomcat
application server on a Windows 2000 server machine. While installing one of
these three components, Windows Installer fails to finish and closes the
installation. You want to generate a trace of the Windows Installer activity to find the
cause of the issue.

**********RESOLUTION******
Here are the steps to
follow:

1. Open a command line window by going to Start > Run, typing


"cmd" and pressing Enter.
2. Use the Change Directory command ("cd") to
navigate to the setup folder for the software in question (WebIntelligence, Apache or
Tomcat) where its "setup.exe" file is found.
3. Enter the following
command:

Setup.exe /v"/L*v c:\msi.log"

This will launch the setup process


for the troubled software, which should halt in the same place as before, but will generate the "msi.log" output
file on the root level of the C: drive for your
troubleshooting analysis.

How do you trace the BusinessObjects version 6.x installation through the MSI installer?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects Enterprise 6.x
Windows
2000
Windows Installer v2

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You would like to
create a trace log of your BusinessObjects Enterprise 6.x installation in order to
check which files have been added/updated to your
system.

**********RESOLUTION******
Use the following command-line syntax:

msiexec /i
BusinessObjects.msi /l*v myinstallog.txt

What is the difference between Quick Parsing and Thorough Parsing?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x
Designer version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
According to the Online Help, Quick Parsing checks only syntax of a component, and Thorough Parsing checks
both syntax and semantics of a component.

You would like a better explanation.

**********RESOLUTION******
Designer checks the syntax and semantics by calling the functions provided by the database/middleware.
For example, "SQL PREPARE" for ODBC, and "Oparse" for Oracle.

What is checked actually depends on what each middleware checks (any error messages are returned by the
middleware.)

For example, Quick Parsing with Access ODBC does not detect an incorrect column name, while Oracle does.

Quick Parsing: create SQL.

Thorough Parsing: create SQL, execute the SQL and retrieve data without displaying.

When an error is detected in either, Designer displays it.

The following are the function names Designer calls for the parsing:

For ODBC:
- Quick Parsing
SQLPrepare with SQL = "Select Resort.resort From Resort."
- Thorough Parsing
SQLPrepare with SQL = "Select Resort.resort From Resort."
SQLExecute
SQLDescribeCol
For Oracle:
- Quick Parsing
Oparse with SQL = "Select Resort.resort From Resort."
- Thorough Parsing
Oparse with SQL = "Select Resort.resort From Resort."
oexec
odescr

Why use the Integrity Check in Designer?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Designer version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
The Integrity Check checks the validity of the active universe including its structure, joins, cardinalities,
objects, contexts, and conditions. It can also detect whether there are any loops. You can check the entire
universe or only certain of its components.

When Designer has completed checking the integrity of the universe, it displays an Integrity Check Results
dialog box.

**********RESOLUTION******
Dialog Box Options:

Check All
Causes all the components in the universe to be checked. When you click this check box, all options appear with
a check mark.

Check Universe Structure


Checks for both syntax errors and changes to the database structure.

Parse Objects
Checks the SQL definition of all the objects in the universe.

Parse Joins
Checks the SQL definition of all the joins in the universe.

Check Conditions
Checks the SQL definition of all the conditions in the universe.

Check Cardinalities
Checks the cardinalities of the joins.

Check for Loops


Checks the joins of the current universe to detect any loops.

Check for Context


Checks the contexts in the universe.

Parse Level Checking


Parse level checking denotes how Designer determines the validity of a component.
There are two levels: Quick Parsing and Thorough Parsing.

Quick parsing
Checks only the syntax of a component. It is generally quicker though less extensive than Thorough Parsing.

Thorough parsing
Checks both the syntax and semantics of a component.

Note: If you want loops to be verified, be sure that the cardinalities of all joins have been detected. Otherwise,
the function erroneously identifies loops in the universe. Of the two parse checking options, Thorough parsing
provides a more extensive check and thus ensures the integrity of the component. However, if you wish to
create many components in a short time, Quick parsing is generally more rapid.

INTERNAL USE ONLY: Broadcast Agent removes the drill mode from reports when you send
documents to Broadcast Agent.

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.0.x
Broadcast Agent
version 5.0.x

*********WARNING***********
This resolution involves an
unsupported workaround. As stated in the BusinessObjects Installation Guide,
Business Objects Desktop Products should not be installed on the same machine as the
Enterprise Server Products. This setup may cause unreliable operation of
BusinessObjects.

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You send a BusinessObjects
document that includes some reports that are in drill mode to Broadcast Agent (BCA).
When Broadcast Agent refreshes these documents, they are no longer in drill
mode.

**********CAUSE**************
Broadcast Agent is installed on the NT
Server, but BusinessObjects is not.
The BusinessObjects process (on the
server) does not have drill capabilities. The Busobj.exe installed during the BCA
installation is the same as the one installed with WebIntelligence server product,
and does not have all functions (i.e., drill) that the full-client BusinessObjects product does.

An enhancement request (ER # 14560) has


been logged for this issue.

**********RESOLUTION******
A workaround
for this issue is to install full-client BusinessObjects on the server. This will
allow you to use the drill function to refresh the full-client BusinessObjects
reports on the Broadcast Agent.
1. Install BusinessObjects on the NT
Server where Broadcast Agent is installed.
2. Send the original document
containing the reports in drill mode to Broadcast Agent from BusinessObjects client
machine.
3. Retrieve the document from Broadcast Agent and you will see that the drill mode is active.

Does WebIntelligence use user-mode or kernel-mode drivers?

*****CONFIGURATION******
WebIntelligence version 2.7.x
Business Objects
version 5.1.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know if
BusinessObjects uses user-mode or kernel-mode
drivers.

**********RESOLUTION******
BusinessObjects drivers run in user mode.

User-mode and kernel-mode


drivers exist for the operating system, and depending on the application that is
being used, they may be operating in either user-mode or kernel-mode. This may
affect other applications running on the system.

User-mode drivers run in


the non-privileged processor mode in which other application code, including
protected subsystem code, executes. User-mode drivers cannot gain access to system
data except by calling the Win32 API that in turn calls system services.

Kernel-mode drivers run as part of the operating system's executive, the


underlying operating system component that supports one or more protected subsystems.

User-mode and kernel-mode drivers have different structures, different entry points, and different system
interfaces. Whether a device requires a
user-mode or kernel-mode driver depends on the type of device and the support
already provided for it in the operating system.

Most device drivers


operate in kernel-mode, as they perform certain protected operations and can access
system structures that user-mode drivers cannot access. Furthermore, the
kernel-mode drivers render the system more prone to corruption, as they will be checking
less on the requests performed and integrity of the transferred
data.

INTERNAL USE ONLY: Which encryption method does BusinessObjects use?


*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects versions 4.x and
5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know which encryption method is used by
BusinessObjects.

**********RESOLUTION******
Encryption is defined as coding
a digital message so that only a recipient with the proper key can decode and
understand the message.

Business Objects uses DES 5, or Data Encryption


Standard (Level 5).

Data Encryption Standard (DES) is a widely used method


of data encryption using a private (secret) key that was judged so difficult to
break by the U.S. government that it was restricted for exportation to other
countries. There are 72 quadrillion or more possible encryption keys that can be
used. For each given message, the key is chosen at random from among this enormous
number of keys. Like other private key cryptographic methods, both the sender
and the receiver must know and use the same private key.

DES applies a
56-bit key to each 64-bit block of data. The process can run in several modes and involves 16 rounds
(operations).

DES originated at IBM in


1977 and was adopted by the U.S. Department of Defense. It is specified in the
ANSI X3.92 and X3.106 standards and in the Federal FIPS 46 and 81 standards.
Concerned that unfriendly governments could use the encryption algorithm, the U.S.
government has prevented export of the encryption software. However, free
versions of the software are widely available on bulletin board services and Web
sites. Since there is some concern that the encryption algorithm will remain
relatively unbreakable, NIST has indicated DES will not be recertified as a standard and
submissions for its replacement are being accepted. The next standard will be
known as the Advanced Encryption Standard (AES).

INTERNAL USE ONLY: How do you convert a BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) download
version into a full-client BusinessObjects CD version?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version
5.1.x

*********WARNING***********
This resolution involves making a modification to the System
Registry. This is not an operation supported under normal procedures of
BusinessObjects; therefore, we recommend that this operation only be performed under the
direction of Customer Support staff. Create a backup of the System Registry
before making any changes.

***********SYMPTOMS*******
When you download
BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO) from InfoView, you have a Web installation of
full-client BusinessObjects. A Web installation only allows you to connect in
3-tier mode (*.rkeys). If you want to use a local *.key file (2-tier mode), then
you will need to convert the installation into a full-client BusinessObjects CD
version.

**********RESOLUTION******
The difference can be seen in the
System Registry:

1. Go to Start > Run and enter "regedit." The


Registry Editor window appears.
2. Locate the InstallMode key in the path:

HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE/SOFTWARE/BusinessObjects/BusinessObjects/5.0

The InstallMode key can have one of two values:


-"Cd" if installed from a
CD or;
-"Web" if done from a BusinessObjects in 3-tier mode (ZABO)
download.

To convert from "Web" to "Cd":


-Use the actual CD to install any
application. The product will be converted from a web mode installation into a
full-client BusinessObjects CD installation or;
-Manually change the registry
value from "Web" to "Cd".

Note: When you change the installation to "Cd"


and then use a local *.key file, you must have the client middleware configured
as well as the BusinessObjects Data Access drivers. If you only change the
registry from "Web" to "Cd" and try to use the *.key, you will receive the error:
"Cannot Access Network Layer".
The best option to convert a Web install to a CD
full-client BusinessObjects install is to install the Data Access drivers from
the CD. This will automatically update the installation and allow you to use the local *.key file.

What are the minimum database level rights that a database user profile requires in order to create a
Business Objects repository?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Business Objects 5.1.x
Any
RDBMS

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You define a connection in Supervisor Installation Wizard,
and wish to create the repository using an account which is able to run fully
using the most restricted database profile possible.

This is a security
issue because some DBAs have a strict security policy within their companies and
need to give only the minimum required profile rights for some users. Another
permission needed is grant storagegroup. This grant is important when creating
indexes which needs physical space).

If you do not use the correct profile,


you may end up creating the repository, but Architect may not recognize the
repository.

**********CAUSE**************
When running your installation
wizard, please make sure first that you have defined the database via your oracle
configuration assistant, and that you test that you are able to log into the
specially-created account with SQL Net editor.

Do not use the 'system' login as these are the database system tables which should not be mixed
with ERP data.

The Business Objects Online Guides does not go into


details from assigning database space allocation (Installation
- Chapter 6 System
Configuration, Sizing, and Benchmarking).

Overview
A connection enables
you to access a database server. These connections can access:
in a
client/server architecture, the database account(s) created via the SUPERVISOR for the
secured deployment of Business Objects products or WEBINTELLIGENCE resources, or
the database accounts which store data for query and analysis.

Supervisor
Guide:
- Chapter 2 Installing the Repository

In the dialog box, enter


the user name, password, and pathname relating to the database to be opened and
in which the repository is to be created. The dialog box parameters will vary,
depending on the database driver you selected. For more information, refer to
the BusinessObjects Database Guide for your RDBMS.

**********RESOLUTION******
New Repository Creation rights:
An Enhancement Request
19915 exists to allow the possibility that in the future we will document the exact
database privileges a user has to have to create the repository and to state
which are the minimum access rights after the repository was created so that the
database user account can be restricted to the absolute minimum set of access
rights.

When creating repository, give the DB user the following privileges:

1. db connect
2. table create (and drop)
3. table select
4. table
insert
5. table update
6. table delete
7. table alternate
8. table
index
9. table references
10. user view select
11. system view
select

Existing Repository Rights that need to be kept:

When the repository


is already created, any BO user (using any 2-tier or 3-tier appli) will need to
write into existing table as soon as s\he has the ability to create any data
(documents, univeres, security)... Of course reading is necessary too. Creating table or administration rights is
not necessary.

Here are the rights that


the database account has to have in order to be able to manage the repository
database tables for WebIntelligence and the desktop applications (Supervisor,
Designer and BusinessObjects)

- select
- update
- insert
- delete

These privileges are enough to operate the repository

Full-client BusinessObjects version 6.x products do not search the ShData folder for the *.key files at login.

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 6.x
Designer version 6.x
Supervisor version 6.x
Windows 2000

***********SYMPTOMS*******
During installation of the Enterprise 6 desktop (full-client) products, you define a local path for the LocData
folder and a remote path on the network for the ShData folder.
You notice that you cannot browse across Network Neighborhood (but you can use a UNC path such as
"\\server\path\folder" or a mapped drive) and you find that when logging into a desktop product, only the *.key
file(s) in the LocData folder appear in the Security Domain drop-down in the login box.
It seems that the ShData folder is being ignored, as you cannot select one of its *.key files.

**********CAUSE**************
In version 5.x, you could run Setup and toggle between LocData and ShData, but there is no such switch in
Enterprise 6.
A design change in Enterprise 6 has removed the ability to select between local (LocData) and remote (ShData)
locations for your *.key files.

**********RESOLUTION******
You must use either the local location or the remote location, as the system will not look in both.
At installation, define both the LocData and ShData folder paths to the location (local or remote) that you want
the system to look for the *.key files.

1) Tell me about urself, ur education and ur IT exp ?


2) What is Bo_Main key ?
3) What are .lsi and .prm files ?
4) I am not able to export the universe, can u explain some of the reasons for this ?
5) How to check whther the values in a particular column are repeated or not ?
6) Can we edit the reports in WEBi ?
7) What is the reason where BO generates 2 SQLS ?
8) How do you check whether the data in the report is correct ot not ?
9) How do u actually create a universe ?
10) Data warehousing concepts ?
11) Diff between DWH and TDB ?
12) Data mart and DWH normalised or denormalised ? Do both of them exist in
the same tier ?
13) We have 2 schemas, Can we create one DataProvider with this 2 schemas ?
Can u tell me the reason ?
14) Why u want to change the Company ?
15) User is not able to access a report which we have given him, why?
16) Any idea of Supervisor ?
17) What are the domains of a Repository ? What does they contain ?
18) How do we link 2 Data Providers ?
19) What is a Data Cube ? What is its use ?
20) What are the charecteristics of an object ?
21) Is there any way of viewing .REP file, with out having BO installed onur machine ?
22)What are Linked Universes ?
23) What is Windows() function ?
24) What is Custom Hierarchy ?
25) How can we call a report, with in the report ?
26) What are Cascading Prompts ?

Subject : How does BusinessObjects decide whether to recommend Contexts or Aliases?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Designer version 5.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know how BusinessObjects decides whether to recommend Contexts or Aliases.

**********RESOLUTION******
The detection algorithms used by BusinessObjects are as follows:

The product will first attempt to propose Aliases for tables which cause loops in the database schema. These are
typically found on the outer parts of the schema, and often referred to as leaf nodes.

The product will then attempt to resolve loops caused by a centralized FACT table (a table containing two or
more MANY relationships as exits and not containing any ONE relationships as exits) by proposing one or
more Contexts.

Why does the outer join appear to behave differently when you connect to SQL Server 7 than when you connect
to other databases?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x
Microsoft SQL Server 7.0

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You insert an outer join into a universe connecting to a SQL Server database. The outer join symbol is
displayed on the same side of the join as the outer join that was applied in the "Edit Join" window. This
graphical behavior is the opposite of the behavior displayed by many other databases (for example, Oracle and
Access) where the outer join symbol is displayed on the opposite side of the join line.

**********RESOLUTION******
When you develop universes using such a connection, you must to be aware that the outer join symbol will be
positioned on the same end of the join as it was applied within the "Edit Join" window.

In a synchronized report, the "Adjust scale to value range" option does not work correctly when using measures
in the chart that contain detail objects in the formula.

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.1.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
In a synchronized report, the "Adjust scale to value range" option does not work correctly when you use
measures in the chart containing detail objects in the formula.

Follow these steps to reproduce the issue:

1. Create a report with two or more dataproviders.


2. Link the common dimension objects.
3. Create a new measure variable, call it "measureA" and use formula "=sum (detail object)".
4. Turn the turn the table into a chart.
5. Right-click on the chart and go to Format Chart > General tab.
6. Checkmark the "Adjust scale to value range" option.

The chart does not reflect the values for measureA.

This behavior only occurs when synchronization is involved.

**********CAUSE**************
You used a detail object when you created the measure (aggregation).
It is recommended that you do not use detail objects in BusinessObjects version 5.1.x charts because when you
apply the "Adjust scale to value range" option, BusinessObjects will look at the highest value in the chart.
However, it does not detect the measureA values and it actually adjusts the scale according to the maximum
values of the other measures if present.

**********RESOLUTION******
Change the detail object to a measure object in the universe (so you can set the aggregation to sum).

The difference between the Refresh and Run commands and what to do about Broadcast Agent when changing
connection information.

*****CONFIGURATION******
Broadcast Agent version 5.x

**********CAUSE**********
A BusinessObjects Document stores connection parameters (User ID, Password, and Database Name) for each
data provider. This information is embedded in the document and can be viewed using the BusinessObjects
variable: =Connection(DataProvider(<Variable>))

Once a document is created, whenever it is refreshed it gets data using the connection parameters stored in the
document. If you change the connection name or connection parameters (such as the database name ) for the
given universe in Designer, then a 'Refresh' on previously created document (before the universe change) will
fetch data from the old connection.

********RESOLUTION******
This is BusinessObjects designed behavior. When you select Refresh, then Business Objects re-executes the
query (or SQL) that is currently in the memory. This includes the connection parameters, etc. It does not
actually change the dataprovider. This is only done when you select Run from the Edit Data Provider window.

For example: A user creates and saves a report in BusinessObjects. Their Supervisor then changes the database
connection for that user in Supervisor. (This change overrides any specific universe connections for that user).
This user then logs into BusinessObjects and opens the report. When they click Refresh, this report will
continue to point to the previous connection.

However, if they open the Edit Data Provider window and select Run, then he query will connect via the newly
established connection. (Once you enter the query panel, the Universe information is read and then built into the
new query.) For Broadcast Agent (BCA), you can generate the SQL without having to retrieve data first.

1. Click on the Edit data provider icon and click Options.


2. Choose "Do Not Retrieve Data" and Run the query.
3. Go to View > Data and click Options.
4. Uncheck the option "Do Not Retrieve Data".
5. Save the report and submit it to BCA.

How does a refresh work? When is the SQL re-built?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x
***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know how a refresh works, like when the SQL is actually re-built.

**********RESOLUTION******
- The report creating process:
In the query panel, you drag and drop the objects for which you want to retrieve the data and possibly define a
condition. BusinessObjects refers to the universe for the SQL definition of the selected object and for the
connection parameters to the database. The SQL is then built and sent to the database.

- The report refreshing process:


Once the report is opened, you then have three methods of refreshing a query:

1. Select the query from the existing ones, and then edit the query. From the query panel, click the "Run"
button.
2. In the actual report (display panel) click the "Refresh" button.
3. In the data manager (microcube icon), click the "Refresh" button.

- The Reporter SQL re-creation process:


In cases 1 and 3 above, the SQL of the selected query is re-built. This means that any modifications to the
objects' definitions are checked and taken into account.

In case 2 above, BusinessObjects keeps the last SQL statements of all of the report queries and sends them to
the database, regardless of the changes you may have made in the universe.

Note: If you export the universe and modify the local copy, when you will refresh the report from within the
datamanager (Microcube icon) the Reporter module takes into account the latest version of the universe (in this
case the local copy).

Note: If you save a copy of the universe locally and then modify it and try to export it, then you will receive a
message stating that the universe has not been saved. You must then save and then export it (there is no other
choice). As a result, both copies of the universe are identical.

How do you use dynamic formulas within Designer?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Designer version 5.1.x
All RDBMS

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to be able to use dynamic formulas within Designer.

For example, using the Beach.unv demo universe, you create a measure object with the following statement:

sum(Invoice_Line.days * Invoice_Line.nb_guests)

You want the "Invoice_Line.days" to be multiplied by a dynamic column of your choice when you run your
query.

**********RESOLUTION******
Here are the steps to follow:
1. Right-click on your new object and select "Object Properties". The "Edit Properties of <object>"
window appears.
2. Change the Select statement to the following:

sum(Invoice_Line.days * @Prompt('Which Column?','N',,Mono,Free))

3. Click the "Tables.." button and select all the tables of your universe; this is to prevent problems if you
select two columns, which are from different tables.

Note: The tables you select must be from the same context (if you do have one in your universe).

When you now run the query, fill in the prompt with the name of the column name that you want. For example,
"Invoice_Line.nb_guests".

How do you move universes and Lists of Values from a 5.x repository to a 6.x repository?

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x
Designer version 6.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have a version 5.x repository and a version 6.x repository. You want to move a limited number of universes
and associated Lists of Values from the 5.x repository to the 6.x repository. You do not want to upgrade the
entire 5.x repository to version 6.x (in which case the steps described in this resolution are not necessary).

**********CAUSE**************
Due to directory structure changes in version 6.x, you cannot simply import a universe in Designer version 5.x,
save the *.unv file locally, open the same file in Designer version 6.x and export to the 6.x repository.

**********RESOLUTION******
The following resolution assumes BusinessObjects installations to default directories, the use of the default
"BOMain.key" security file name, the use of default Universe Domain name "Universe," and use of a Windows
account with Administrator rights.

Here are the steps to follow:

1. Log into BusinessObjects version 5.x as a General Supervisor user.


2. Go to Tools > Options > "File Locations" tab.
3. The "User Documents" entry will have a path value similar to the following:

c:\Program Files\Business Objects\BusinessObjects 5.0\UserDocs

Change this value to the following path:

c:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 6.0\universes

4. The "Universes" entry will have a path value similar to the following:

c:\Program Files\Business Objects\BusinessObjects 5.0\Universe

Change this value to the following path:

c:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects 6.0\universes


5. Click OK and log out of BusinessObjects.
6. Log into Designer version 5.x as a General Supervisor.
7. Import the universe you wish to migrate to your version 6.x repository. This will create the *.unv file in
the path you just designated in step #4. This will also create a subdirectory, named after the universe, in which
related List of Values (*.lov) files are placed.
8. Close the universe and log out of Designer version 5.x.
9. Log into Designer version 6.x as a General Supervisor.
10. Open the universe file that you imported in step #7. You will likely receive a warning that the connection
is not valid, as it may not exist in your version 6.x repository. If so, change the universe parameters to use a
valid connection for this repository.
11. Save and export the file to the version 6.x repository.
12. Exit Designer version 6.x and log into BusinessObjects version 5.x.
13. Restore the original "User Documents" and "Universes" file location values you had changed in steps #3
and #4.

If you do not have Designer versions 5.x and 6.x on the same PC, here is a modified workflow to follow:

1. Copy the *.unv files from the 5.x PC to the following directory on the 6.x PC:

c:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects


6.0\universes\Universe

2. Copy the *.lov files from the 5.x PC to the following directory on the 6.x PC:

c:\Documents and Settings\Administrator\Application Data\Business Objects\Business Objects


6.0\universes\Universe\<Universe Name>

3. Start the workflow above at step #6.

**********MORE***************
See resolution entry # 14468 for more information on migrating linked universes between version 5.x and
version 6.x repositories.

Can you use Supervisor version 6.x to upgrade a version 4.x repository directly to version 6.x?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Supervisor versions 4.x, 5.x and 6.x

**********WARNING***********
This resolution involves upgrading the BusinessObjects repository. We recommend that you work with your
Database Administrator to create a backup of the repository database before making any changes.

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have a 4.x Business Objects repository that you want to upgrade to version 6.x. You want to know if you
can upgrade the 4.x repository directly to version 6.x, or if you must first upgrade to version 5.x and then
upgrade from 5.x to 6.x.

You attempt to log into the version 4.x repository as the original General Supervisor user with Supervisor
version 6.x. You receive the following error message:

USR0057
The details of the error indicate that the OBJ_M_CATEG repository table is an invalid object or that the table
does not exist. You click "OK" on the error and receive the following additional error:

Internal Problem

**********CAUSE**************
The table OBJ_M_CATEG, along with other tables, cannot be found in a version 4.x repository. The tables were
added in version 5.x.

The login process for Supervisor version 6.x assumes the existence of the OBJ_M_CATEG table and others that
were added in version 5.x of the repository. Supervisor version 6.x is designed to either log into a version 6.x
repository or detect and then upgrade a version 5.x repository.

**********RESOLUTION******
You must use Supervisor version 5.x to first upgrade your version 4.x repository to version 5.x. Then you can
use Supervisor version 6.x to upgrade your version 5.x repository.

**********MORE***************
See resolution entry # 3140 for more information on determining which General Supervisor is the original
General Supervisor account.

See resolution entry # 3180 for general information on upgrading a version 4.x repository to version 5.x.

See the following Knowledge Base Articles for more information on upgrading Business Objects repository
databases:

# 2656: "SQL from the Repository Upgrade of BusinessObjects version 5.x to version 6.0/6.1x"
# 2692: "Supervisor version 6.0/6.1x to 6.5 Repository Upgrade SQL Statements"

How are the dates in the @prompt() or @variable() prompts converted to the correct date formats before being
sent to the database?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know how the @prompt() or @variable() prompts are converted to the correct date formats before
being sent to the database.

**********CAUSE**************
The following date format parameters are used for date prompts:

Regional settings date format:


Used by the BusinessObjects GUI, this is used to display dates (such as LOVs) and the user's date input in a
prompt.

"InputDateFormat" parameter in the "Oracle.sbo" file:


BusinessObjects uses this to convert the dates from the regional settings format to the database session format.

"nls_date_format" parameter:
The Oracle client uses this database session format to read the dates.

**********RESOLUTION******
Here is how BusinessObjects resolves prompts for dates:
1. BusinessObjects uses the regional settings for the input and the display of the dates.
2. The user enters a date in a prompt (input date) either manually, or via an LOV, using the operating
system regional settings format.
3. BusinessObjects converts the user entry into the format specified by the "Oracle.sbo" file
"InputDateFormat" parameter before running the query.
4. BusinessObjects opens a session to the Oracle database and then sets the nls_date_format as it is in the
"InputDateFormat" parameter.
5. BusinessObjects uses the result to send the queries with both the Oracle client session and the prompts.

Note: For SQL Server, make sure to configure the Open Database Connectivity (ODBC) Data Source Name
correctly in the ODBC Data Source Administrator.
Here are the steps to follow:
1. When selecting the System Data source (the query database), use the "Configure" option.
2. In the fourth window, the option "Change the language of the SQL server system settings to" appears.
3. Select the language used in the client machine's regional settings

**********MORE***************
See resolution entry # 11169 for a related issue.

How do you use the MultiCube function with synchronized queries / synchronization in BusinessObjects
version 5.x?

**********RESOLUTION******
The MultiCube Function allows you to make calculations on linked data in reports containing multiple data
providers.

For Example, you have two queries. Query 1 returns <Country> and <Resort>, and Query 2 returns <Resort >
and <Revenue> . When linking on <Resort> and then inserting a new query with <Country> and <Revenue>,
this will bring back the wrong totals (the Grand Total for all Resorts.) This illustrates that you need to use
objects that are compatible. You can not get the revenue for the country as there is no revenue for this. A query
has been run with the revenue for the resort, but not for the country. As there is no data for the country revenue,
BusinessObjects does not know the exact revenue for the country. It will therefore display the Grand Total, as it
does not know which part of this total belongs to which country . The objects are not compatible in this way.
In order to get them to give the correct total per country, you need to insert the MultiCube Function.

Inserting the Formula : =MultiCube(<Revenue>)


In the <Revenue> column will display the correct value per <Country>

The same function will allow to get the correct Break and Section totals in a synchronized report, with an
unlinked object set as a break or master. This will produce a repeat of the Grand Total at all break levels.

To resolve this you need to highlight the sum field at the break level and replace the Sum(<Revenue> )field
with the formula:

=MultiCube(<Revenue>) in which case it no longer needs a sum,

or you can place the MultiCube on the Revenue Column, and then apply a sum to this:

=Sum((MultiCube(<Revenue(Query 1 with BEACH)>)))


Note: In some reports with several data providers, you may have to first apply the formula on the report column,
replacing the <Revenue> object with the formula:

=MultiCube(<Revenue>) and then highlight the sum field and apply the same formula there.

INTERNAL USE ONLY: The filter does not work, or the measure totals are different in reports after you
upgrade from BusinessObjects version 5.1.3 to version 5.1.4 or above.

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.1.4 and above

***********SYMPTOMS*******
Note: This resolution is based on the attached "sample.rep" file and the attached Excel data providers.

You have a report with multiple data providers and filter(s). Data in the microcube is the same, but fewer data
are displayed (fewer rows) or the aggregation of measures is different than in BusinessObjects version 5.1.3 and
below. The data providers are linked on one or more common dimensions. A global or block filter is applied on
an object that is not linked.

To reproduce the issue, follow these steps:


1. Go to Data > View Data. You can see that <Link ID (PD 1)> is linked to <Link ID (PD 2)>, but
<NonLinkDim> from PD 1 is not linked.
2. In the report, go to Format > Filters. In Table 3, you can see that there is a complex filter on
<NonLinkDim> and that it is defined with the following formula:

=IsNull(<NoLinkDim>)

Note: The purpose of the filter is to display data from the second data provider that is not in the first data
provider. PD 2 has one row where <Link ID> = "D" and PD 1 does not have any rows where <Link ID> = "D";
therefore, one row should be displayed.

3. Open the report in BusinessObjects version 5.1.3 or below. On tab "Works in 513 only", Table 3 shows
one row of data.
4. Open the report in BusinessObjects version 5.1.4 or later. On tab "Works in 513 only", Table 3 shows no
data.

**********CAUSE**************
In BusinessObjects version 5.1.4 and above, the list of values that the filter is applied on comes from the data
provider of the filtered object. In the "sample.rep" file, the filter is placed on <NonLinkDim> from PD 1, the list
of values is from <NonLinkDim> PD 1 and has no matching rows in PD 2, so there is no data displayed.

For more details, see the "Calculator Enhancements" technical document located at the following address:

http://www.techsupport.businessobjects.com/app/calc_enhancement_english.asp

**********RESOLUTION******
There are two resolutions for this issue:

Resolution 1
Adjust the definition of the complex filter on <NonLinkDim> by adding a Boolean that will always be true for
the PD 2.
Here are the steps to follow:
1. In the report, go to Format > Filters.
2. Expand Table 3 and select "NoLinkDim".
3. Click the "Define" button and use the following formula (notice that the formula uses the linked object
<Link ID (PD 2)>):

=IsNull(<NoLinkDim>) And <Link ID (PD 2)>=<Link ID (PD 2)>

4. Click the "OK" button and then click the "OK" button again.

Resolution 2
Apply the complex filter on a linked dimension instead of the dimension that is not linked.
Here are the steps to follow:
1. In the report, go to Format > Filters.
2. Expand Table 3 and select "NoLinkDim".
3. Click the "Remove" button, click the "OK" button, click the "Add" button, and then select <Link ID (PD
1)>.
4. Select Table 3, click the "Define" button and use the following formula:

=IsNull(<NoLinkDim>)

5. Click the "OK" button and then click the "OK" button again.

Note: The original filter may have been applied on a report variable made with the non-linked dimension.

How do you add one single column to a table?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You created a report based on the Island Resort Marketing demo universe. This report contains a crosstable with
the objects <Customer>, <Country>, <Resort>, and <Revenue>.

You place a break on the <Customer> object.

You want to add one extra column to the table but find that when you try to insert this column, an extra column
is inserted for all of the values of <Country>.

**********CAUSE**************
An Enhancement Request (# 4071) has been logged requesting that users be able to add a single column.

**********RESOLUTION******
There are three workarounds for this issue:

Workaround 1
Add the extra values at the database level so that they are directly imported into BusinessObjects.

Workaround 2
In the report, right-click on the <Country> object and go to Calculations > Count.
You see that an extra column is added to the table. You can then manually adjust the value/formula.

Workaround 3
Use the principle of synchronization to overcome the issue. For example, you do not only want to see the values
of France and US for <Country>, but also <Zambia>. Here are the steps to follow:
1. Create a list of values in Excel selecting the <Country> object values US, France, and Zambia.
2. Import these values as a personal data file and link on <Country>.
3. Build a table with <Country> from dataprovider2 (the Excel file) and <Resort>, <Customer>, and
<Revenue> from dataprovider1. You can see that one extra column appears just for <Zambia>.

Note: You must follow the synchronization rules as outlined in Technical Article # 1919 on the technical
support website, especially in more complex reports in order to avoid other problems such as calculation issues.
Ideally, in the case outlined here, you should add both <Resort> and <Customer> to the Excel file so that you
can also link on these objects.

**********MORE***************
Refer to Technical Article # 1919 on the technical support website for more information on the basic principles
of a good synchronization.

Error: "Unable to write to the list of values file C:\Program files\Business Objects.........(UX0057)" when you
try to export a universe containing LOVs to a repository.

*****CONFIGURATION******
BusinessObjects version 5.x

*********WARNING***********

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You try to export a universe containing LOVs to a repository and you receive error "Unable to write to the list
of values file C:\Program files\Business Objects.........(UX0057)".

**********CAUSE**************
The export of universe operating cycle is as follows:

Before export:
- The universe is stored in the directory "Universe/".
- The LOV is stored in the directory "UserDocs/Universe_name/".

After export:
- The universe is moved into the directory: Universe/BOMAIN_name/DOMAIN_UNIVERSE_name/
- The LOV are moved into the directory:
UserDocs/BOMAIN_name/DOMAIN_UNIVERSE_name/UNIVERSE_name/

Export cycle:
Before exporting the LOVs, Designer checks all the LOVs to export as defined in the universe. This is an
internal process; the LOV list is stored in a tab (for example, "T1").

For example, universe "U1" contains three LOVs: "L1", "L2", and "L3".
LOV L1 is twice used in the universe.
Tab T1 contains the following list of LOV: L1, L2, L3, and L1.

Step 1
LOV L1 is exported to the repository, then L1 is moved into the following folder:
UserDocs/BOMAIN_name/DOMAIN_UNIVERSE_name/UNIVERSE_name/

Step 2
LOV L2 follows the same process.

Step 3
LOV L3 also follows the same process.

Step 4
LOV L1 must then be re-exported (as it appears in tab T1).
LOV L1 is then deleted from the following folder:
UserDocs/BOMAIN_name/DOMAIN_UNIVERSE_name/UNIVERSE_name/.

Step 5
Designer will try to move LOV L1 from the folder "UserDocs/Universe_name" to folder
"UserDocs/BOMAIN_name/DOMAIN_UNIVERSE_name/UNIVERSE_name/".

Because LOV L1 is no longer stored in the first folder, the error message is displayed.

**********RESOLUTION******
This is a normal behavior when an LOV is used several times in a universe.
When the universe is imported, all of the LOVs are also imported.

**********MORE***************
For more information, see resolution entry # 5033.

How do you change the default format of the Year/Quarter/Month generated by the Time Hierarchy?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
The fomat generated by default when creating a Time Hierarchy is as follows:

Year: YYYY (for example, "1998") Numerical


Quarter: Q (for example, "1") Numerical
Month: MM (for example, "01") Numerical

In your BusinessObjects report, these display with the Regional Settings format for numeric data (for example,
with decimal points (0.00)).

**********CAUSE**************
The Regional Settings uses the default setting for numerals, such as the decimal point.

**********RESOLUTION******
The date format is set in the database *.prm file (for example, for Oracle it is the "Ora7fr.prm" file). You must
manually amend your .prm file to change the values to character type.

For example:

[DATE]
(SQL)
YEAR=TO_NUMBER(TO_CHAR($D,'YYYY'))
QUARTER=TO_NUMBER(TO_CHAR($D,'Q'))
MONTH=TO_NUMBER(TO_CHAR($D,'MM'))
The syntax used on the objects will take into account the format that you set.

**********MORE***************
See resolution entry #4272 for a similar issue.

What are exactly the colors used by business objects charts

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You want to know exactly Business Objects behaviour in terms of colour allocations

**********RESOLUTION******
Allocation of colors in a chart is based on the 16 colors EGA (among which the basic ones). They are identified
by a code. When the 16 first colors are allocated, the 17th one is almost exactly like the first one , at least very
very similar.

1- White
2- Red
3- Green
4- Blue
5- Yellow
6- Magenta
7- Cyan
8- Dark Red
9- Dark Green
10- Dark Blue
11- Light Brown
12- Purple
13- Dark Cyan
14- Light Cyan
15- Gray
16- Dark

How do you display graphic bar charts of data horizontally instead of vertically?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You create a bar chart that displays the data vertically, but you want to display it horizontally. Presently, it is not
possible to create a horizontal bar chart.

**********RESOLUTION******
The following workaround is not a chart that is displayed horizontally, but a formatted table to give a visual
display of data.

Follow these steps as an example in the E-fashion demo universe:


1. Create a simple report containing <Year> and <Sales Revenue>.
2. Create local variable and name it <reduced revenue> with the following formula:

=<sales revenue> / 1000000


(this variable is created to make the values more manageable)

3. Add a fourth column and insert the following formula:

=Fill("g" ,<reduced revenue>)


4. Format the cell to "Webdings" and use a font size of eight ("8"). The reason that we have to reduce the
size of the value of <Sales Revenue> is because the character "g", formatted in Webdings font, replaces
each value (for example, three ("3") becomes "ggg" and five ("5") becomes "ggggg"). Values such as
20,000 would then become unmanageable.

How do you display charts horizontally in a report


containing sections?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You have a report where you have several charts in sections displayed vertically, but you then want to display
them across and then down.
For example, you want to display chart "A" to the left of the page, chart "B" to the right of the page, and chart
"C" underneath chart "A".

**********CAUSE**************
It is not possible to do display this horizontally in sections as requested.
An enhancement request (ER # 4997) has been logged for this issue.

**********RESOLUTION******
Follow these steps as a workaround for this issue:
1. Reset the report, turn it back to a table format, and remove the sections.
2. Copy the table the same number of times as the number of charts you had in the report.
3. Filter out all of the values of the object of that you do not want displayed, one by one.
4. Turn the tables into charts.

For example, follow these steps in the eFashion universe:


1. Create a report using the objects <Year>, <Store name>, <Lines> and <Year> and run it.
2. Select <Store name> as a Master.
3. Turn the table(s) into charts and you will see the charts (of every store name) below each other.

Follow these steps to re-format the report by the workaround above:


1. Reset the report, turn it back to table format, and remove the sections.
2. Copy the table the same number of times as the number of charts you wish to display.
3. In each table, filter out the values (<Store name>) that you are not using.
4. Turn the tables into charts.
5. Add a "Title" cell for each chart. Insert the object that would have been inserted as a section (such as
<Store Name>) into it and format it to appear like a section Master cell.

You can now retrieve the correctly formatted display with the charts next to each other, as well as below each
other.

**********MORE***************

The No_Distinct in the .prm file does not work

***********SYMPTOMS*******
If make changes to NO_DISTINCT=N in the prm file, it is still doing a select distinct?

**********CAUSE**************
The ODBC call used to obtain datarows.
BO uses the SQLExtendedFetch command to obtain more than 1 record with only one call, other applications
use the SQLFetch command, which only fetches one row per ODBC call.
In theory the latter one would have worse performance than the first one, but not in case of this specific ODBC
driver!

**********RESOLUTION******
Change the Array Fetch Size of the BO Connection from 10 to 1.

Cannot see stored procedure in BO Reporter, but can see it in Supervisor module.

PROBLEM:
Cannot see stored procedure in BO Reporter, but can see it in Supervisor module. Customer cannot see stored
procedure in BO Reporter, but can see it in Supervisor module.

SOLUTION:

Tools--->Connection
Login as BO as GENERAL/SUPERVISOR
Click on the connection just created ...Next>> It worked!

You cannot see tables and columns in Supervisor when setting row restrictions for users.
***********SYMPTOMS*******
You try to set a row restriction for a user in Supervisor and the list of tables and column is empty, however you
see them properly in Designer.

**********CAUSE**************
The tables in Designer are being brought back with the Owner and Qualifier in the universe that are not being
recognized in Supervisor.

**********RESOLUTION******
Here are the steps to follow:
1. In Designer, remove the owner name and the qualifier from the tables in the universe or remove the owner
from the database level:
- In the Table Browser, right-click on a table and select "Rename".
- Remove the Owner name and qualifier information and click "OK".

2. Re-export this universe to the repository.

Note: To remove the owner at the database level, consult your database administrator.

Error: "Cannot create bomain.key" when you try to run a safe recovery in Supervisor.
***********SYMPTOMS*******
The safe recovery operation in Supervisor seems to run correctly until the end when the error appears.

**********CAUSE**************
The security domain is set to shared instead of local, so the safe recovery tries to re-build the bomain.key on the
shared folder of the server where BusinessObjects was installed (i.e. MASTER/SHARED). The user does not
have write privileges to this server folder.

**********RESOLUTION******
There are two possible resolutions for this error.
Either, ask someone who has administrator privileges for the server, to run a safe recovery so the bomain.key is
correctly saved to the server folder.

Or, Change the security domain to local.

To change the security domain to local:


1. Run the BusinessObjects setup.
2. Go to Windows Start > Programs > BusinessObjects > Setup.
3. Click on the Modify button (found at the bottom right-hand corner of the window).
4. In the 'Security files' section, select 'Local' for the 'Security Domain (BOMAIN.KEY)'.
5. Click OK and Exit the setup utility.

The BOMAIN.KEY is created on the current computer and stored in


C:\Program Files\BusinessObjects\LocData folder. Note: Your own source directory may be slightly different
depending on where you installed BusinessObjects

Is it possible to add a new pre-defined user profile in Supervisor?

***********SYMPTOMS*******
You would like to add a new standard profile to apply to your user base such as 'Supervisor' or 'Supervisor-
Designer' in the 'Set profile to' drop down list.

**********RESOLUTION******
Unfortunately, it is not currently possible to create a new standard profile. However, the 'Versatile' profile can be
used to workaround this problem. This profile can be used by a supervisor to define access to a non-standard
combination of modules for any given user.

Rules for User Restrictions in Supervisor.

***********SYMPTOMS*******
If a user is placed in more than one user group within Supervisor, the first group having restrictions placed on
them, the second group with no restrictions placed. You would like to know which will overwrite the other, and
when logging in, whether the user will have access to everything or will be limited by the restrictions placed.

You would like to know the rules for user restrictions?

**********RESOLUTION******
The group having restrictions will override the one with no restrictions.

Further rules on restrictions in Supervisor:


- If restriction is placed on a user, it only applies to that one user.
- If restriction is placed on group as whole, inheritance rule applies; all users in that group and all
users in any sub-groups of that group will also have the same restriction applied.
- If command / restriction is revoked at group level, it is revoked for all users in that group and
any users in any sub-groups of that group.
- Group configuration can be overruled at user or sub-group level.

supervisor is case sensitives: clarifications

Case 302172448
Currently, Supervisor respects the typed characters and sends them to the repository.
After that, the repository RDBMS respects the case or not.
A real RDBMS will make a difference between the character strings "user1" and "USER1",
that's normal behaviour.

Technically, both Supervisor behaviours (case sensitive or not case sensitive) are possible and exist.
However, I think that to enable more RDBMS to behave like Access does would be a regression, not an
enhancement.

Inversely, we can't easily emulate the case sensitivity for a RDBMS that isn't case sensitive.

Note:

A RDBMS considering user1 and USER1 as 2 different users is case sensitive (Sybase, Oracle).

A RDBMS considering user1 and USER1 as the same user is not case sensitive (Access).

Why is a user not being deleted from table OBJ_M_ACTOR when it has been deleted in Supervisor?

*****CONFIGURATION******
Supervisor version 5.1.x

***********SYMPTOMS*******
A user is not being deleted from table OBJ_M_ACTOR after it was deleted from Supervisor.

**********CAUSE**************
You are using the field "m_actor_c_name" in the repository to validate your application security. However,
when you are deleting a user in Supervisor, it does not physically remove the username from the table in the
security repository until you force the update of the repository.

**********RESOLUTION******
You must use Supervisor to run Scan, Repair and Compact on the Security Domain:

1. Go to Tools > Repository.


2. Choose the Security Domain.
3. Click successively on the "Scan", "Repair" then "Compact" buttons.

The user should now be removed from the OBJ_M_ACTOR table.


1. Alias
A logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to resolve loops in the paths of joins.

2. Cardinality
Expresses the minimum and the maximum number of instances of an entity B that can be associated with an
instance of an entity A. The minimum and the maximum number of instances can be equal to 0,1, or N.

3. Cartesian product
A situation in which a query includes two or more tables that are not linked by a join. If executed, this type of
query retrieves all possible combinations between each table and may lead to inaccurate results.

4. Class
A logical grouping of objects and conditions within a universe. In general, the name of a class reflects a
business concept that conveys the category or type of objects.

5. Condition
A component that controls the type and the amount of data returned by a specific object in a query. A condition
created in the Designer module is referred to as a predefined condition.

6. Connection
Set of parameters that provides access to an RDBMS. These parameters include system information such as the
data account, user identification, and path to the database. Designer provides three types of connections
secured, shared, and personal.

7. Context
A method by which Designer can decide which path to choose when more than one path is possible from one
table to another in the universe.

8. Detail object
An object qualified as a detail provides descriptive data about a dimension object. A detail object cannot be used
in drill down analysis.

9. Dimension object
An object being tracked in multidimensional analysis; the subject of the analysis. Dimensions are organized into
hierarchies.

10. Document domain


The area of the repository that stores documents, templates, scripts, and lists of values.

11. Drill
The action of navigating through levels of data. When you drill up, you obtain more summarized or general
information. By drilling down, you can reach more refined or detailed information.
12. Equi-join
A join based on the equality between the values in the column of one table and the values in the column of
another. Because the same column is present in both tables, the join synchronizes the two tables.

13. Enterprise mode


A work mode whereby a designer creates universes in an environment with a repository. The mode in which a
universe is saved determines whether other designers are able to access it. By default, a universe is saved in the
mode in which the designer is

14. Hierarchy
An ordered series of related dimensions used for multidimensional analysis.

15. Join
A relational operation that causes two tables with a common column to be combined into a single table.
Designer supports equi-joins, theta joins, outer joins, and shortcut joins.

16. List of values


A list of values contains the data values associated with an object. These data values can originate from a
corporate database, or a flat file such as a text file or Excel file. In Designer you create a list of values by
running a query from the Query

17. Loop
A situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another in the universe.

18. Measure object


An object that is derived from an aggregate function. It conveys numeric information by which a dimension
object can be measured.

19. Object
A component that maps to data or a derivation of data in the database. For the purposes of multidimensional
analysis, an object can be qualified as a dimension, detail, or measure. Objects are grouped into classes.

20. Offline mode


The work mode in which the designer works with universes stored locally.

21. Online mode


The work mode appropriate for a networked environment in which the general supervisor has set up a
repository.

22. Outer join


A join that links two tables, one of which has rows that do not match those in the common column of the other
table.

23. Personal connection


A personal connection is used to access resources such as universes or documents. It can be used only by the
user who created it. Information about a personal connection is stored in both the PDAC.LSI and PDAC.SSI
files; its definition is static and cannot
24. Qualification
A property of an object that determines how it can be used in multidimensional analysis. An object can be
qualified as one of three types a dimension, detail or measure.

25. Query
In Designer a query is a technique for creating or modifying a list of values associated with an object. From the
Query Panel, a designer builds a query from the classes, objects, and conditions of a universe. In the
BusinessObjects User module, a query

26. Quick Design


A wizard in the Designer module that provides guided instructions for creating a basic universe. It lets a
designer name a universe, set up a connection to a database, select strategies, create classes and objects, as well
as generate joins with cardinalities

27. Repository
A centralized set of relational data structures stored in a database. It enables BusinessObjects users to share
resources in a controlled and secured environment. The repository is made up of three domains the security
domain, the universe domain, and

28. Secured connection


A secured connection is used to access universes or documents that may be restricted or confidential. It can be
shared by several authorized users. Stored in the repository, the definition of a secured connection is updated
dynamically.

29. Shared connection


A shared connection is used to access common resources such as universes or documents. It can be used by
several users. Information about a shared connection is stored in a SDAC.LSI or SDAC.SSI file; its definition is
updated dynamically.

30. Shortcut join


A join that links two tables by bypassing one or more other tables in the universe.

31. Strategy
Scripts that automatically extract structural information about tables, columns, joins, or cardinalities from a
database. Designer provides default strategies but a designer can also create strategies. These are referred to as
external strategies.

32. Structure pane


The graphical component within the main Designer window that shows the schema of the universe. It reflects
the underlying database structure of the universe.

33. Subclass
A component within a class that groups objects. A subclass can itself contain other subclasses or objects.
34. Table Browser
The graphical component within the main Designer window that lets you create the classes and objects of the
universe from the tables and columns of a database.

35. Theta join


A join that links tables based on a relationship other than equality between two columns.

36. Universe
A mapping of the data structure found in databases tables, columns, joins, etc. A universe, which is made up of
classes, objects, and conditions, can represent any specific application, system, or group of users.

37. Universe domain


The area of the repository that holds exported universes. The universe domain makes it possible to store,
distribute, and administrate universes. There may be multiple universe domains in a repository.

38. Universe pane


The graphical component within the main Designer window that displays a hierarchical view of the classes,
objects, and conditions in a universe. Two radio buttons on the lower edge of the pane filter the display of the
components. One button, the Classes/Objects

39. User object


An object created by the end user from the BusinessObjects User module. A user object can be inserted into a
universe by the designer.

40. Workgroup mode


A work mode whereby a designer creates universes in an environment without a repository. The mode in which
a universe is saved determines whether other designers are able to access it. By default, a universe is saved in
the mode in which the designer

41. What is Designer?


Designer is a BusinessObjects IS module used by universe designers to create and maintain universes.
Universes are the semantic layer that isolates end users from the technical issues of the database structure.
Universe designers can distribute universes

42. How do you design a universe?


The design method consists of two major phases. During the first phase, you create the underlying database
structure of your universe. This structure includes the tables and columns of a database and the joins by which
they are linked. You may need to

43. what are the precautionary measures you will take in the project?

44. What is the drill up , drill down, drill by , drill trough ?


drill up One level up in the HirearchyDrill down One level down in the Hirearchydrill by direct selection
of level in the Hirearchydrill trough to drill data from one Hirearchy to another Hirearchy
45. Explain the SQL Queries activated to data base from Data provider in BO ?

46. What are steps to be taken care to create a good Universe?


1)make the joins with optimization 2)reduce the creation userobjects more in the universe 3)class should not be
more than 60 4)try to use aggreateware on measure objects

47. What are the steps to taken care to improve the Report performance?
In DESIGNER Level 1)eliminate the unnecessory joins 2)use conditions as much as at the database level
3)edit the SQL query in the Query Panel as per requirment In REPORTER level 1)eliminate the filters as much

48. whether sevirity and priority are synonyms

Posted: Wed Jul 24, 2002 10:15 am


Post subject: FAQ: Designer

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Designer FAQ

Is there any way to set up a prompt that will allow a user to select one value, many values, or type 'ALL' for all
values in a list?

Now that my LOV lets me use ALL for all values, how do I get the ALL in the list?

I've deleted a universe and I'm in a mess! What do I do now?

How do I migrate universes between repositories?

How do I create cascading or nested prompts?

What is an isolated join and how do I fix it?

How do I increase the number of items I can pick from a list of values?

What is synchronization?

How can I calculate the number of hours between two dates?

Why do all my date lists of values include time and can I get rid of the time portion?

What are stored procedures and how do I use them?

Is there some automated way to populate descriptions for my universe objects?

How do I link universes? Why would I link universes? What are the restrictions? What are the advantages and
disadvantages?

I'm confused about connections! What's the difference between secured, personal, shared, full-client, and ZABO
connections?
What is a fan trap, why is it a problem, and how do I resolve it?

What is a chasm trap, why is it a problem, and how do I resolve it?

How can I implement row level security?

What functions are included in the Functions list, and can I add more if I want to?

How can I select a table based on the response to a prompt?

Should I use Contexts or Aliases to resolve my loops?

How can I use the system date in a prompt or an object? Why won't they parse?

I have a universe and it tells me it's from a different CMS. How can I open it?

Last edited by Bob on Tue Aug 10, 2004 10:14 am, edited 2 times in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sun Aug 18, 2002 8:21 pm


Post subject: How can I prompt for select one, many, or all values?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Is there any way to set up a prompt that will allow a user to select one value, many values, or type 'ALL' for all
values in a list?

Yes. Below is a sample of the syntax required to allow a user to select one, many, or all values from a prompt.

Code:
(@Select(Sales Geography\Country Group) IN @Prompt('Select Country Group or
enter * for all groups','a','Sales Geography\Country Group',multi,free) ) OR
('*' in @Prompt('Select Country Group or enter * for all groups','a','Sales
Geography\Country Group',multi,free))

In the sample, the asterisk is used as the wildcard. The first part of the formula...

Code:
(@Select(Sales Geography\Country) IN @Prompt('Select Country or
enter * for all countries','a','Sales Geography\Country',multi,free) )

works when a user picks one or more values from the list. The second part...

Code:
OR
('*' in @Prompt('Select Country or enter * for all countries','a','Sales
Geography\Country',multi,free))

works when the user selects the asterisk.

If a user selects 'USA', the following statement results...

COUNTRY IN 'USA' OR 'USA' IN '*'

If the user selects the asterisk, the following statement results...

COUNTRY IN '*' OR '*' IN '*'

The IN, combined with 'multi' are the keys to allowing the selection of multiple values from the list.

Here is another example which demonstrates how a prompt of this type can accept multiple wildcards and
handle case sensitivity...

Code:
(PER_JOBS.ATTRIBUTE3 IN @Prompt('Enter Employee Survey Code(s) ("ALL" for
all)','A','Job Information\Add. Job Details Survey Code',multi,free) OR
'ALL' IN @Prompt('Enter Employee Survey Code(s) ("ALL" for all)','A','Job
Information\Add. Job Details Survey Code',multi,free) OR
'All' IN @Prompt('Enter Employee Survey Code(s) ("ALL" for all)','A','Job
Information\Add. Job Details Survey Code',multi,free) OR
'all' IN @Prompt('Enter Employee Survey Code(s) ("ALL" for all)','A','Job
Information\Add. Job Details Survey Code',multi,free) OR
'*' IN @Prompt('Enter Employee Survey Code(s) ("ALL" for all)','A','Job
Information\Add. Job Details Survey Code',multi,free) OR
'%' IN @Prompt('Enter Employee Survey Code(s) ("ALL" for all)','A','Job
Information\Add. Job Details Survey Code',multi,free))

Back to top

Nick Daniels
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 15 Aug 2002


Posts: 6631
Location: Yorkshire

Posted: Thu Jul 10, 2003 12:27 pm


Post subject: What is an isolated join and how do I fix it?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What is an isolated join and how do I fix it?

An isolated join is one that has not been included in any context in your universe. Once you start using contexts
in a universe, every single join must belong to at least one context. A join can belong to more than one context,
but if it doesn't belong to any it is considered by BusinessObjects to be isolated from the rest of the universe
structure.

To understand this add a new table to an existing universe that uses contexts. Create a join between that table
and an appropriate existing table. Now create a new object based upon your new table. Now create a simple
query with one object from your new table and one object from the table you joined to. The result is two bits of
synchronised SQL. Why? Because we left our join isolated, as we forgot to add it into an appropriate context.
Go back to the universe and add the join to a suitable context. Now try your report again
_________________
Available for contract work in the north of England!

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 8:16 pm


Post subject: How do I increase the number of items I can pick from a list

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What is the limit on the number of objects I can pick from a list of values and can I increase the limit?

BusinessObjects restricts the number of objects that can be picked from a list of values to '99'. It is possible to
increase this limit by adding a MAX_INLIST_VALUES value to your database prm file. This parameter is not
in any driveren.prm file by default. To use it, you must enter it in the [RDBMS] section under the (GENERAL)
subsection. If you do not enter this parameter, the default value is 99.

Your database has a constraint on the number of values that can be present in an inlist condition. Oracle for
example, allows thousands of values.
Picking values from a list is different than pasting or typing values into a prompt box. If values are pasted or
typed in, the constraint does not apply.

One of our listserv users did some testing with regard to inlist values and had the following to report...

Quote:
I have thoroughly tested this ("this" being max values when using the "in list" operator in a condition) and here
is what I've found out:

1. If you select the values from an LOV, BusObj checks to see if you have set the MAX_INLIST_VALUES
parameter value in your .prm file. If you have, it uses this number to limit how many values you can select. This
number CAN be greater than 256 if your database supports it. Oracle 8 supports up to 1000 values, so I would
assume you could set this value up to 1000 if you use Oracle. (I tried 280 and it worked!).

2. If you select values from an LOV, and you have NOT set the MAX_INLIST_VALUES parameter, BusObj
will limit the number of values to 99.

3. ...and this is what I didn't see documented anywhere!... If you type or cut and paste the values instead of
selecting them from an LOV, the limit is whatever your database allows. It doesn't matter if you have the
parameter set or not.

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 8:28 pm


Post subject: How can I calculate the number of hours between two dates?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I calculate the number of hours between two dates?

The best way to do it (and the fastest) is to do it in the database. If you simply subtract the two days, you will
get a number in the format D.T, where "D" is the number of days, and "T" is the fraction of days in decimal
form. In other words, day 2 and noon minus day 1 at midnight will yield 1.5 as the result.

Take this number and multiply by 24, that gives you the number of hours. Take the decimal portion of that and
divide by 60 and you get the number of minutes. So if you have 1.5 (earlier example) and multiply by 24 you
get 36 hours and 0 minutes.
Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 8:32 pm


Post subject: How can I get rid of the time portion of my dates?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I eliminate the time portion from my dates and my date lists of values?

Read this till I have time to summarize for the FAQ's ...

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Thu Jun 24, 2004 11:54 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 8:38 pm


Post subject: How can I give my objects descriptions programmatically?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Is there some automated way to populate descriptions for my universe objects?

See here...

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Thu Jun 24, 2004 11:54 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top
MichaelWelter
Forum Groupie

Joined: 08 Aug 2002

Posts: 9700
Location: Rancho Cucamonga, CA, USA, Earth, Milky Way

Posted: Tue Jul 15, 2003 11:21 pm


Post subject: How do I create cascading or nested prompts?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How do I create cascading or nested prompts?

Author: Robert Metzker

Let's create a Series of Cascading Prompts for the Island Resort Marketing Universe. We'll simply work our
way through the Resort class for a quick example. All of the prompts will be fairly similar, and I am going
under the assumption that everyone has some Designer Experience.

Let's start at the Highest Level that we'd need a prompt for. That would be the Resort itself, since we need to
know what Resorts we're interested in.

* Edit the List of Values for the Resort object.


* Check the Automatic Refresh Before Use option.
* Click Edit.
* Bring Country into the Conditions and set it to: in list Prompt('What Country are you interested in?')
* Click Save and Close
* Click Apply and edit the next LOV object.

Edit the Service Line and set up the same Prompt on Resort as: in list Prompt('What Resorts are you interested
in?')
Again... Save and Close, ensuring that the Automatic Refresh Before Use checkbox is selected then Edit the
next.

Service will have: Service Line in Prompt('What Service Lines are you interested in?') with the Automatic
Refresh...

--------
Save this Universe and let's generate a report.
--------
Generate a report that pulls in the Country, Service Line and Revenue. Set a prompt on Service Line and apply a
prompt as a condition asking: 'What Service Lines are we tracking?'

Refresh this report.

For the Service Line, click on Values.... A new Prompt should appear, asking about the Services. Again... click
the Values button, and so on... and so forth.

Once you've answered the questions, you only need to hit the Values button when you need to backtrack to
another level.

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sat Sep 27, 2003 6:50 pm


Post subject: How can I see 'ALL' in my list of values?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Now that my LOV lets me use ALL for all values, how do I get the ALL in the list?

Author: Dwayne Hoffpauir

There are two approaches - overriding the LOV SQL, and creating a universe object.

Overriding the LOV SQL


1. Press the SQL button in the query panel of the LOV
2. Add the phrase UNION SELECT 'ALL' FROM DUAL or similar dummy table for your particular database.
For SQL Server (if you don't care if the object parses or not) add SELECT xx From xx UNION SELECT 'ALL'
(You don't need a FROM table)
3. Click the "Do not generate SQL before running" checkbox.

Universe Object
1. Create a universe object defined as a constant 'ALL'
2. Associate it with the SYS.DUAL or equivalent table so it will parse (optional)
3. Press the combined query button in the query panel of the LOV (defaults to UNION)
4. Include the new universe object.

Back to top
Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Tue Jun 01, 2004 8:44 pm


Post subject: Re: How can I prompt for select one, many, or all values?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I've deleted a universe and I'm in a mess! What do I do now?

Keep away from sharp objects . Take a deep cleansing breath and don't panic

First, ask yourself some questions:

Can you get a copy of the universe from the web server?
Can you get a copy from another user or Designer's PC?
Do you have a backup copy in a source control system?
Do you have a repository backup that your DBA could restore to a temporary location? If so you could do the
stuff in this post and import the universe.

Reports will complain if they are unable to find the universe you've deleted. A thorough explanation by digpen
is located here.

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Tue Jun 01, 2004 9:08 pm


Post subject: Re: FAQ: Designer

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
What is synchronization?

Synchronization happens when BO creates two queries for you but doesn't really understand how to merge the
result sets. Say you have a product table, an inventory table, and a sales table. You join products to inventory on
product_code and place that join in the inventory context. You join products to sales and place that join in the
sales context. Create the product code object from the product table, the inventory measure from the inventory
table, and the sales measure from the sales table. When you create a report in the query panel, you'll get two
JOINED queries. BO understands that it can write a query with inventory and product and another with sales
and product and put them back together by product_code.

If you're getting synchronized queries, you've got messed up contexts, joins not in the proper contexts or objects
in the query that aren't from dimension tables joined to both facts. It is very rarely ever acceptable to have
synchronized queries.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Thu Jun 24, 2004 11:54 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

MichaelWelter
Forum Groupie

Joined: 08 Aug 2002

Posts: 9700
Location: Rancho Cucamonga, CA, USA, Earth, Milky Way

Posted: Wed Jun 23, 2004 11:21 pm


Post subject: How do I migrate universes between repositories?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How do I migrate universes between repositories?

Although it is not advisable to have multiple repositories, sometimes it is necessary. Migrating universes from
one repository to another is not difficult, at least the first time.

Log into Designer, using the Key of the repository that currently contains the universe.
Import the universe.
Click on File - Save As, and, in the Save As dialogue box, check "Save for all users".
Click Save, and then Yes, to overwrite the existing universe.
Log back into Designer, using the Key for the destination repository.
Open the universe, and give it a new connection.
Export the universe.

In subsequent migrations, you will be prompted, during export, if you want to overwrite the existing universe.
Click yes.
Back to top

Dwayne Hoffpauir
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 19 Sep 2002

Posts: 6533
Location: Plano, TX USA

Posted: Fri Jul 23, 2004 8:10 pm


Post subject: Connection confusion! Secure? Non-Secure? Full-Client? ZABO?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I'm confused about connections! What's the difference between secured, personal, shared, full-client, and
ZABO connections?

Glad you asked.

There are three types of connections:


Secured (Sec): stored in the repository
Personal (Per): stored on the workstation, and usable only by the BusObj user that created it
Shared (Shr): stored on the workstation, but usable by any BusObj user
Next to consider is your method of connecting to the repository:
Full-client (FC) means you are using middleware that is on your workstation
ZABO means the middleware is on the ZABO server
Now lets see how these two sets of distinctions work together (Y=Yes, N=No):Code:
----Type---
Method Sec Per Shr
FC Y Y Y
ZABO Y N N

Remember that Designer, Supervisor, and Business Query only use the full-client method of connecting.
Reporter can use full-client or ZABO methods. Since the ZABO method cannot use personal or shared
connections, it explains why ZABO users can't use Free-Hand SQL.
_________________
Dwayne Hoffpauir
Image link

Back to top

Bob
Site Administrator
Joined: 06 Jun 2002

Posts: 986
Location: I Live Here

Posted: Tue Aug 10, 2004 10:11 am


Post subject: What is a fan trap why is it a problem how can I resolve it?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What is a fan trap, why is it a problem, and how do I resolve it?

Dave Rathbun describes it well in his presentation, ZEN and the ART of Universe Design. Which is located
here: http://www.integrasolutions.net/Library_Presentations.htm
Here is a quick synopsis of Fan Trap from his presentation:

A Fan Trap is a one - many - many relationship. This would happen if you are using a Summary and a Detail
table in one query. Fan Traps can cause numbers to multiply. Business Objects resolves this transparently by
using 2 queries. It is resolved automatically as long as the measure objects have aggregrate functions (query will
split in 2). You just need to make sure the Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure box is checked in
Designer. It is a default setting, so before you turn it off consider what it is doing.

Another way to solve a Fan Trap comes from the Business Objects web site:
http://tips.businessobjects.com/tips/unvdes/tip/ut001/ut001.htm

Create an alias for the table containing the initial aggregation, then create a context for the alias table and a
context for the original table. You can then apply the aggregate awareness function to optimize the query. This is
the most effective way to solve the Fan trap problem.

1. Create an alias for the table that is producing the multiplied aggregation.

2. Create a one to one join between the original table and the alias table.

3. Build the object that is causing the aggregation on the alias tables.

4. Define a context for the original table and a context for the alias.

5. Select File>Parameters and click the SQL tab to display the SQL page.

6. Select the Multiple SQL Statements for Each Measure checkbox.

7. Modify the select statement for the columns that are summed so that the columns in the alias table are
summed and not the columns in the original table.

[Edit - updated link to new presentations page at Integra site]

Last edited by Bob on Fri May 11, 2007 6:59 pm, edited 2 times in total

Back to top
Bob
Site Administrator

Joined: 06 Jun 2002

Posts: 986
Location: I Live Here

Posted: Tue Aug 10, 2004 10:13 am


Post subject: What is a Chasm trap?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What is a chasm trap, why is it a problem, and how do I resolve it?

Business Objects describes it best at this web site:


http://tips.businessobjects.com/tips/unvdes/tip/ut001/ut001.htm

The Chasm trap occurs when two "many to one" joins converge on a single table. It is a one - many - one
relationship. You will get incorrect results when the following circumstances exist:

A "many to one to many relationship" exists among three tables in the universe structure. The query includes
objects based on two tables both at the "many" end of their respective joins. There are multiple rows returned
for a single dimension.

1. One way to resolve a Chasm Trap use Designer to define a context for each table at the "many" end of the
joins. This creates two SQL statements and two separate tables in Business Objects.

2. Another way to resolve a Chasm Trap is in Designer select the option Multiple SQL Statements for Each
Measure from the Universe Parameters dialog box. (This is a default setting). Only applies to measures. You
force the SQL generation engine in Reporter to generate SQL queries for each measure that appears in the
Query panel. You cannot use this solution to generate multiple SQL statements for dimensions.

- Give scenario and then had to right the sql freehand to get the data.
- Given a report to look and asked to identify why it was not pulling in the correct data, in this case it was the
joins they had to implement security.
- Ask you describe a fan and chasm trap how would you resolve it.
- Explain calculation contexts when to use them.
- Explain about contexts generally and when to use them.
- Common problems to look out for.
- Create new users in Supervisor
- Schedule a report.
----------------------------------------------------------------
5. What is an Universe?
6. How many Universes did you create?
7. Tell me how many classes where there, and objects in each class?
8. What is Object qualification?
9. Tell me about a complicated object you have created?
10. What was the size of the database? which server?
11. How many user were there?
12. What problems you have faced while creating an universe? tell me an incident and how you went about
solving it?
13. Were any experts called from BO while you were on the project?
14. What was the Database. Was it a data warehouse?
15. How many Tables was the universe built?
16. What is a loop, how do you resolve them?
17. What do prefer an Alias or an context? why?
18. What is join? Explain different types of joins?
19. What are linked universes? have you worked with them, problems faced and solutions?
20. How many reports have you created? Explain a few?
21. What are alerters, filters, breaks, master-detail?
22. What's the difference between master-detail and Breaks?
23. What's the difference between filters and conditions?
24. what are pre-defined conditions? compare with report conditions? Justify?
25. What are the differences between a formula, variable and user objects?
26. Did you face any problems while creating reports? Name? Solutions?
27. How do you schedule the reports?
28. How were the reports scheduled and how to resolve unexecuted documents?
29. What is a microcube? how many can a document have?
30. Have you worked with multiple data sources? If yes. How do you link them?
31. What are templates? Explain what you have created?
---------------------------------------------------
BusObj Questions
Remember, there are many ways to do the same thing with all of the BusObj applications.

General Questions

Q) Tell me about yourself, your employment history.


Q) How many years of experience do you have in BusObj?
Q) Versions?
Q) What was your role in the current project?
Q) How many users were there?
Q) On a scale of 1 - 10, rate yourself on BUSOBJ?
Q) Supervisor
Q) Designer
Q) BusObj
Q) Webi
Q) Broadcast Agent
Q) Business Query
Q) Were any experts called from BUSOBJ while you were on the project?

Q) What is BOmain.key?
A) A file that contains the address of the repository's security domain. This file must be distributed to all users
who will access the BusinessObjects repository to share universes and documents. By default, the bomain.key is
placed in the BusinessObjects\LocData folder on your system.

Supervisor Questions
Q) What is the Business Objects repository?
A) The Business Objects repository is a set of relational data structures stored on a database. It enables Business
Objects users to share resources in a controlled and secured environment.
Q) What is a domain? How many are there is a basic set up? What are they?
A) The repository is made up of three domains: the security domain, the universe domain, and the document
domain.

Q) When is the repository created?


A) The repository is created by the general supervisor with the Setup wizard during the first-time use of the
product. You can create and use more than one repository, typically to manage multiple sites.

Q) Can we have multiple domains? If yes. Purpose of having them?


A) Yes, Having multiple document domains can help with organization. If you stick with the 'canned' document
domain, all documents (BCA, user to user, corporate, universe lov's) all wind up sharing the same
domain/default table space. You can create separate domains with separate table spaces for the different types of
documents and reduce the risk of space related Repro problems and corruption. Also, you can reduce the risk
that problems corrupt your entire Repro.

Q) How do you restrict the users from using a particular universe, a class or object(s) of a universe, a particular
document etc?

Q) How do you restrict access to the rows of a database?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the user or group.
2) In the Resource pane, click the Universe tab.
3) Right-click the universe.
4) From the pop-up menu, click Properties.
5) In the Universe Properties dialog box, click the Rows tab.
6) Set the options as necessary.
7) Click OK.

Q) How do you Create a user?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the group in which you want to create a new user.
2) Click on the toolbar.
3) Type a user name, and press the Enter key.

Q) What are the types of user profiles and products can they use?
A) Supervisor offers standard profiles representing the various types of Business Objects users. The names of
the profiles, as well as their symbols, roles, and products are explained below.

Profile) General Supervisor


Role) The Business Objects system administrator. This is the person who launches Supervisor for the first time.
The general supervisor creates the repository, defines users and groups, and manages resources. A general
supervisor is the sole user with a global view of the hierarchical organization.
Product) All Business Objects Products

Profile) Supervisor
Role) Defines users and group, manages resources, and ensures security. A supervisor also assigns properties
and resources to these users and groups. In addition, a supervisor can restrict access to certain resources. A
general supervisor can create several supervisors. Product) Supervisor, BusinessObjects

Profile) Supervisor-designer
Role) Creates users, groups and universes. This user has all the rights of the supervisor and designer combined.
Product) Supervisor, Designer, BusinessObjects Profile) Designer
Role) Creates universes and distributes them to end-users by sending them through the file system, or by
exporting them to the repository. Product) Designer, BusinessObjects
Profile) User
Role) The main BusinessObjects user whose tasks are to query, report, and analyze data. Users can produce
documents containing data from one or more data sources. There can be an unlimited number of users. Product)
BusinessObjects

Profile) Versatile
Role) This user is authorized to use any combination of products defined by a supervisor.

Q) How do you create a user group?


A) 1) In the User pane, click the group in which you want to create a new group.
2) Click on the toolbar.
3) Type a group name, and press the Enter key.

Q) How do you know if a user is Disabled?


A) A sad face means the user has disabled him/herself by failing the password check X number of times. A user
disabled intentionally via the Supervisor module will have a red circle X over him/her.

Q) How do you enable a User?


A) Right click on the disabled user and select enable.

Q) How many strikes does it take before a user disables themselves?


A) 3 is the default but a General Supervisor can change this setting in tools/options.

Q) What is a Category?
A) A keyword or phrase created by Supervisor and stored in the repository, which end-users can assign to
documents when they send them to users, groups, or Broadcast Agent. Users can then filter document searches
in the repository by assigned category.

Designer Questions
Q) What is a Universe?
A) A universe is a business-oriented mapping of the data structure found in databases: tables, columns, joins,
etc. It can represent any specific application, system, or group of users. For example, a universe can relate to a
department in a company such as marketing or accounting. In the BusinessObjects User module, universes
enable end users to build queries from which they can generate and perform analysis. Universes isolate end
users from the complexities of the database structure as well as the intricacies of SQL syntax.

Q) How many Universes did you create?

Q) Tell me how many classes where there, and objects in each class?

Q) What is an Object?
A) An object is the most refined component in a universe. It maps to data or a derivation of data in the database.
Using objects, end users can build queries to generate reports.

Q) What is Object qualification?


A) For the purposes of multidimensional analysis, objects are qualified as one of three types: dimension, detail,
or measure.

Q) Tell me about a complicated object you have created?

Q) What was the size of the database? Which server?


Q) What was the Database? Was it a data warehouse?

Q) What problems you have faced while creating a universe?

Q) Tell me an incident and how you went about solving it?

Q) How many Tables was the universe built?

Q) What is a loop, how do you resolve them?


A) A situation that occurs when more than one path exists from one table to another in the universe.

Q) What do prefer an Alias or a context? Why?


A) Alias - A logical pointer to an alternate table name. The purpose of an alias is to resolve loops in the paths of
joins.
A) Context - A context is a rule by which Designer can decide which of two paths to choose when more than
one path is possible from one table to another. Contexts can be used to resolve loops in the universe. You can
create contexts manually, or cause them to be detected by Designer. When contexts are useful, Designer
suggests a list of contexts that you can create.

Q) What is join? Explain different types of joins?


A) A relational operation that causes two tables with a common column to be combined into a single table.
Designer supports equi-joins, theta joins, outer joins, and shortcut joins.

Q) What are linked universes? Have you worked with them, problems faced and solutions?
A) Linked universes are universes that share common components such as parameters, classes, objects, or joins.
Among linked universes, one universe is said to be the kernel or master while the others are the derived
universes.

BusObj Questions
Q) How many reports have you created? Explain a few?

Q) What are alerters, filters, breaks, conditions?


A) The Alerters dialog box allows you to create and apply alerters. Alerters use special formatting to make data
that fits specified conditions stand out from the rest of the data. This helps draw attention to trends and
exceptions in report data.
A) A filter enables you to hide the data you do not want to view and display only the data you want to focus on.
In the Apply a Filter on Variable Name dialog box, you choose which values of the selected variable you want
to display in the selected block.
A) Select the variables you want to use to insert a break. When you close the dialog box, the variable you select
is displayed in the Breaks dialog box. Break Level, sets the level that the block of data will have in the report.
You can have more than one break level to organize blocks of data.
A) Conditions - feature that forces a query to retrieve only the data that meets specified criteria.

Q) What's the difference between master-detail and Breaks?

Q) What's the difference between filters and conditions?

Q) What are pre-defined conditions? Compare with report conditions? Justify?

Q) What are the differences between a formula, variable and user objects?

Q) Did you face any problems while creating reports? Name? Solutions?
Q) How do you schedule the reports?

Q) What is a microcube? How many can a document have?


A) Local structure in which the data retrieved by a data provider is stored; contains the data users can display in
reports inside a document.

Q) Have you worked with multiple data sources? If yes. How do you link them?

Q) What are templates? Explain what you have created?

Q) How do you resolve #multivalue and #computation errors?

Q) Difference between Foreach and Forall?


A) Foreach - Adds a dimension to the calculation environment.
A) Forall - Specifies the dimensions you want to include in the calculation.

Q) Define a Cell, Block, and Section?


---------------------------------------------------------
1. How can you suppress the 'No data to fetch' messages in Reports?
A) There are a number of ways. VBA can be used to set Application.Interactive to Off. But this will also prevent
the user from responding to any prompts. You can also adjust your query so that every data provider is a union
to a table that returns at least one row, thereby eliminating the possibility of returning no rows. That "special
row" should be designed so that it doesn't change (impact) the actual results should they be returned.

2. How can you create a graph with horizontal bars?


A) Put the paper on the table, then get up and move around the corner. Now the chart is horizontal instead of
vertical. I've seen some interesting things done with the Repeat() function to simulate horizontal (bar) charts as
well.

3. When getting 'No data to fetch' msg, how can you make the report to display at least one record?
A) Again, a union can be used to combine an extra row to a data provider, thereby eliminating the "no data to
fetch" message. Or you can have two blocks, one hidden behind the other, where one block is displayed when
there is data, and the other block (with a hard-coded text message) displayed only when there is no data in the
"real" data provider.

4. How can you import a single-tab report into another multi-table report so the single-tab report will keep its
formatting?
A) Without VBA, use a template. You'll have to recreate the data provider from scratch. With VBA, you can
move (copy) the data provider to the multi-tabbed document, then either via VBA or manually use a template to
move the formatting. Bottom line is that you use a template to move the formatting, but have to use VBA or
manually move the data provider as there is no feature within the product to do this.

5. Can you link the 'universe based' query to one based on RDBMS stored procedure?
A) I've never tried this, but I don't see why not. Since you can link a universe-based query to a personal data
provider, and that works just fine, I don't see why this wouldn't work.

6. How can you display 5 top records only?


A) Need more information. Do you want the top 5 records based on some other value? Or the "pure" top 5
based on the query? You have a number of choices... use the "rank" feature in BusinessObjects, use "partial
results" and limit the rows returned to 5 (using a descending sort to get the right order), or use a Rank() feature
of your RDBMS, assuming one is available. But since we're talking about report solutions, that last one
probably should not be considered.
Issues with the reporter rank function include the fact that all data is returned, resulting in a (potentially) large
cube. But it will handle tied results. And by including a break on some other dimension object, you can
determine the top 5 per X, or some other value.

Issues with the partial results include the fact that ties are not handled properly, and you can only get the
"overall" top 5, not the top 5 per some item.

7. What's the Detail object used for?


A) Officially, any non-defining attribute should be a detail object. So while customer ID would be a dimension,
customer name, address, phone, and so on should be details. They are used primarily in an environment where
lots of report linking is done. If you don't use the linking technique, then details are less of an issue. Since
details are associated with a dimension, once their associated dimension is linked to some other dimension, then
the detail object is available (and valid) in a block with combined data.

Some objects (date objects come to mine) could be defined in a universe as both dimensions and details. For
example, Order Date could be a detail for Order Number. The Order Number only has one Order Date. By
setting Order Date to be a detail, you can link on Order Number to some other data provider and continue to use
Order Date in the block without the famous "Variables are not compatible" message. Yet you may want to drill
on a hierarchy of Order Year, Order Quarter, Order Month, Order Date. In that case, it would have to be a
dimension.
--------------------------------------------------------
Hope the above information would help you people.

Why is my report so slow?

Submitted by kmahler.

Here are some answers that many of our users have come up with:

Optimizing Query Performance (tuning universes and databases):

There are a number of things you can do to speed up your query. The first things I will do is to review your
universe to minimize the un-necessary joins, using aggregate awareness, and shortcut joins if you can. Creating
appropriate indexes definitely will speed up the query performance also. Make sure all of your measure objects
have aggregrate functions.

Your Oracle data base may be using either "Cost based" or "Rule Based" optimization. You need to find out
which your system is using. If your system is using Cost Based, (which is the more recent offereing), you must
make sure the "Statisics" are up to date. Oracle under rule based oprimization uses row counts etc to determine
the fastest path to resolve queries. Once you are happy that the stats are up to date you can use "Hints" to alter
the approach the db might take.

If your system is using Rule Based optimization, the order of the the tables in the "From" clause are important,
altering these by manually assigning row counts in designer is how you do this.

If you are able to look at the Plan of execution that Oracle provides, this may give you an insight on how you
can make improvements. Most of DB will have some sort of utility to find out what index the SQL statement
are using, what execution path they go through. You might need to use this kind of tool(s) to find out what's
wrong with the SQL first. Investigate your SQL statement in SQL Plus or a similar tool. In a past job, I was
given the task of performance tuning SQL statements. Minor changes to the SQL can have tremendous impacts
on retrieval times. Just because a statement is using an index does not mean that it is using a good index.
Especially investigate selected objects that are also used in table joins. Which table you are pulling the object
from can make a big difference but still yeild the same results.
You must have someone do an Explain Plan on your query. The result will provide a starting point for your
performance tuning. If you have the knowledge to do this yourself, I recommend using TOAD or DBArtisan.
These tools will also let you monitor Server Session statistics to see what your Server is doing while your slow
query is running.

Consider playing with the value of the array fetch size on your database connection. The optimum value is
different for everyone.

Optimizing Computation Time (Reporter):

Suggestions:
- reducing formulas/local report variables and complex filters (reporter side) etc.
- Crosstabs and complex formulas will slow it down.
- Amount of data, if you can limit rows further that will help. complex filters, breaks, everything will slow it
down a little.
- Charts can slow the report tabs down

Here are some other ideas:

1. Is the result set of data in the report very large? Perhaps you should add more conditions/prompts to your
query to reduce the number of records returned from the database.

2. Is the report very complicated, eg. does it contain several queries or many calculations? You might try to see
if you can reduce the complexity of the report.

3. Is the query on the database side taking a long time to execute? Then you should work with your DBA to see
what can be done on the database side to optimize query performance (show the generated SQL to your DBA).
_________________
Chris Pohl
Image link
BOBJ 6.5.SP2, WebI 6.5.SP2 (W2K3, 1 cl, 2 nd), BCA 6.5.1, AF 3.0.2
DB2 8.1.10 via CAE 7.2.10, Oracle 8i and ODBC (of course)
_________________________
Search is Your Friend

Back to top

Dave Rathbun
Forum Devotee

Joined: 06 Jun 2002

Posts: 10788
Location: Dallas, Texas

Posted: Wed Aug 11, 2004 9:36 pm


Post subject: How do I migrate between repositories?
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How do I migrate documents between repositories?

Steve Krandel describes this process the best:

Moving the universe:

1. Login to Designer using the BOMain key for your QA repository


2. Import the universe you wish to migrate. Change the connection of the universe to a shared connection.
3. Go to File > Save As. Save the universe in this folder: C:\Program Files\Business Objects\BusinessObjects
5.0\Universe (Note: There may or may not be another folder named 'Universe', it is important to save
the universe in the above referenced location as this will release the security permissions)
4. Go to Tools > Login As. Login using the BOMain key for your Prod repository.
5. Go to File > Open. Open the copy of the universe that you saved in step 3.
6. Go to File > Parameters. Select a secured connection for your data source.
7. Go to File > Save
8. Go to File > Export

Moving the report(s):

1. Login to Reporter using the BOMain key for your QA repository


2. Go to File > Retrieve from > Corporate Documents
3. Select the report you want to move, click retrieve.
4. Go to File > Save As. You can use the default User Docs folder, or any folder of your choice.
5. Make sure that you check the 'Save for all users' option, then save the report.
6. Go to Tools> Login As
7. Login using the BOMain key for your production repository.
8. Go to File > Open and select the report that you saved in step 4 above.
9. Go to Data > View Data (or click on the "Cube" button in your toolbars)
10. Click on the Definition tab.
11. Click on the button with three dots next to the universe name.
12. Select the universe that you moved in the universe migration steps above. (This is also the same process you
would do if you want to change universes for any document).
13. Go to File > Save.
14. Go to File > Publish To > Corporate Documents

Here are some shortcuts to the Moving Reports steps above as suggested by many of the people from the forum:

Open document and do Save As and use Save for all users. Log into the second repository and Publish the
document. When you open the report it will automatically switch itself over to a universe with the same name in
the new repository. WebI reports apparently work the same way if you save them as personal documents first.

The only caveat to this is the original universe from repository "A" needs to be deleted from your local
directory. Otherwise, when you switch BOMain key to point to repo "B" and open the report after doing a "Save
for all Users" you will get the error "A connection required to refresh this document is unavailable". This is
because it still recognizes the original universe (or so it would seem). When you delete all local instances, it is
forced to import the universe from Repo "B" and therefor does the seamless switch. This is of course only if
your universe short names match.

Here are some important considerations and issues encountered when you migrate documents (or universes)
between repositories (as posted by our Forum Moderators):
1. Moving repositories (from one database to another) is easy for everything but documents. For some databases
(Oracle to SQL Server) it seems to be pretty straightforward. For Sybase to anything, I think the security and
universe domains will be fine. The document domains likely won't work. Sybase treats BLOBs differently that
Oracle. They simply do not convert correctly. I'd make sure you do a BIG test first.

2. If you cannot change the repository connection from secured to shared/personal or visa versa as this box is
disabled, it is because that is not possible. You must create a new shared connection. You need to make sure that
you have rights to do this from the Supervisor Module.

3. After moving the updated universe to production first (if needed), open each document in production, open
each data provider and click "save and close," before finally saving the document and publishing to corporate
documents. The "save and close" is the only we have found to guarantee that the connection information is
updated properly.

4. After you created the new repository and imported the old info -- make sure you go into the new repository
and change all of the connnections to point to the new repository domains.

Back to top

Dave Rathbun
Forum Devotee

Joined: 06 Jun 2002

Posts: 10788
Location: Dallas, Texas

Posted: Mon Aug 02, 2004 3:03 pm


Post subject: Re: FAQ: Reporter

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I include data for all months in a crosstab, even if a particular month has no data?

One way to do this is to create a second data provider using only the months. Then link the second data
provider with the first data provider. Use the month column from the second data provider in the cross tab. This
should bring in all months even if there were no data for that month. However this technique does not work if
you have sections in your report.

Back to top

Anita Craig
Forum Fanatic
Joined: 17 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: Palo Alto, California, U.S. of A.

Posted: Fri Jun 25, 2004 5:41 pm


Post subject: Difference between Full-Client Reporter and ZABO (Zero-Admin

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What is the difference between Full-Client Reporter and ZABO (Zero-Admin BusinessObjects)?

The highlights:

1. Installation is done via InfoView, so no workstation by workstation installation is needed.

2. As far as reporting functionality, ZABO and full-client are identical, with the exception that ZABO cannot
use either personal connections nor FreeHand SQL.

3.) One difference is database connectivity. With ZABO, all database connections are managed by the
ZABO/WebI server. With full-client, database middleware and related configuration is on each workstation.

So, Full-Client Reporter is a "2-tier" tool -- the Reporter module sends the query to the database, and the results
are brought right back to your computer.
Reporter <--> Database

ZABO is a "3-tier" tool -- the ZABO Reporter module formulates the query, and sends it to the ZABO/WebI
server, which then sends the query to the database (using the database middleware and configuration on the
server) -- the ZABO/WebI server receives the data cube back -- and then forwards the data cube to the ZABO
client.
ZABO Reporter <--> WebI Server <--> Database

4.) Another difference is the installation.

With Full-Client Reporter, someone has to install/upgrade each individual workstation.

With ZABO Reporter, the initial installation is done by logging in to the WebI server (via Infoview) -- and
setting the WebI options to edit full-client documents with BusinessObjects. Then, the first time you try to build
a query, or edit an existing one in the repositoy -- the WebI/ZABO server launches the installation of a mini
version of the Reporter module on the client computer.

Afterwards, for upgrades, only the WebI/ZABO server is updated directly. Users need to log into WebI via
Infoview, and create/edit a full-client document -- and ZABO will detect that an upgrade is needed -- and will
launch the upgrade.

Last edited by Anita Craig on Thu Jun 16, 2005 5:09 pm, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 6:59 pm


Post subject: How can I open a report that is corrupt?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I had a power outage and now BO is telling me that I cannot open my report because it is corrupt. How can I
save my work?

Search your computer for a temp file saved at the time of the outage. The file may not have a name anything
like the original filename. If you can locate this file, it should open and contain the work you had saved prior to
the outage. Read this thread for more detailed info...

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 6:47 pm


Post subject: How can I calculate the number of hours between two dates?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I calculate the number of hours between two dates?

The best way to do it (and the fastest) is to do it in the database. If you simply subtract the two days, you will
get a number in the format D.T, where "D" is the number of days, and "T" is the fraction of days in decimal
form. In other words, day 2 and noon minus day 1 at midnight will yield 1.5 as the result.

Take this number and multiply by 24, that gives you the number of hours. Take the decimal portion of that and
divide by 60 and you get the number of minutes. So if you have 1.5 (earlier example) and multiply by 24 you
get 36 hours and 0 minutes.
Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Mon Jan 19, 2004 3:00 pm, edited 2 times in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 6:40 pm


Post subject: Can I sequentially number report pages across all tabs.

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Can I sequentially number report pages across all tabs?

Yes.

Scott Bowers came up with this programmatic solution...

First, create a variable for each tab that is named exactly the same as the tab name. Then, use this code:Code:

Sub PageNumberTabs()

PageNum = 0

For i = 1 To ActiveDocument.Reports.Count

If i <> 1 Then
DocumentVariables.Item(ActiveDocument.Reports.Item(i).Name).Formula = "= " & Chr(34) & "Page "
& Chr(34) & " & FormatNumber (Page() + " & PageNum & ", ""#"")"
Else
DocumentVariables.Item(ActiveDocument.Reports.Item(i).Name).Formula = "= " & Chr(34) & "Page "
& Chr(34) & " & FormatNumber (Page() , ""#"")"
End If

ActiveReport.ForceCompute

PageNum = PageNum + ActiveDocument.Reports(i).NumberOfPages

Next i
End Sub
Have this called from the afterrefresh() event. It has been tested it and it numbers all the tabs correctly. Even if
you move the tabs around, there are no code changes that have to occur.

Here is another version of the code...

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Mon Jul 14, 2003 6:52 pm, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Mon Jul 14, 2003 6:36 pm


Post subject: How and when can I point a dataprovider to a new universe?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Is it possible to point a dataprovider from one universe to another?

Yes it is possible. In order to do so, the target universe must have the same class and object name structure as
the source universe. BusinessObjects uses class name and object name when pointing dataproviders from one
universe to another.

Instructions submitted by beloved BOB member Andreas...

You can change the universe a data provider is pointing to by going to BO Reporter, menu Data| View Data..., in
the window "Data View" select your data provider from the left pane and switch to tab "Definition". Notice the
entry under Universe, click on the "..." button to display the available universes (universes your BO user ID has
been granted access to via BO Supervisor). Note that the current universe that the data provider is pointing to is
not listed in the Window "Change Universe".
Now select the new universe from the list you want the data provider to use, select OK and save the BO
document. Repeat the steps for every single data provider.

Possible problem:
The universe that a data provider is based upon has already been removed (your access to the universe has been
denied, or the universe has been renamed or deleted). In this case if you try to point the data provider to a
different universe you might get the error message "Cannot find the 'UniverseName' universe. DA0011".

Solution:
Ask the BO Supervisor or a BO Designer to re-point the data provider to another universe (they might have a
copy of the old universe or they might still have access to the old universe).
Do NOT try to open the BO document with a text editor and modifying it in the text editor, because this will
most likely lead to a corruption of the BO document.

Advice:
Always re-point all your data providers of all your documents to the new universe BEFORE you remove/re-
name any existing universe used by data providers.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Mon Jul 14, 2003 7:05 pm, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sun Jul 13, 2003 1:09 pm


Post subject: What is synchronization?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What is synchronization?

Synchronization happens when there are no (or not enough) common dimensions in each query. The desired
result, when running queries across multiple contexts, is a join not a synchronization operation. You can find out
the exact operation being performed by looking at the SQL from the query panel, you will see a number of
"folders" on the left side of the SQL window, and at the top, the operation used to combine them. If you see
"synchronization" then your queries don't have enough in common.

When does BO "Synchronize"?


Rule of thumb: When the Data provider spans 2 or more contexts, and some dimensions do not exist in every
context used.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Tue Jan 06, 2004 7:33 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002


Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sun Jul 13, 2003 1:00 pm


Post subject: How do I make an object that selects the current date?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How do I make an object that selects the current date?

Create an object in Designer that uses your databases' method of selecting the current date. In Oracle, your
object would select 'sysdate'. The object will not be attached to any table and as a result will not parse
successfully. Never fear . It will work when combined with other valid objects attached to tables.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Tue Jan 06, 2004 7:33 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sun Jul 13, 2003 12:20 pm


Post subject: How can I supress the 'No Data To Fetch' message?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I supress the 'No Data To Fetch' message?

There are multiple methods of supressing the 'No Data To Fetch' message.

Programmatically...
If you copy this code into the ThisDocument module, it should work. To implement the code, you will need to
have your Report which gives you the No Data to fetch message open. Click on Alt + F11, and the Visual Basic
Editor will open. On the left hand side you should see a list of all the documents you have open. Under the
name of the document which gives you the message you will see a icon called ThisDocument. Double click on
it and on the main window, a blank sheet should appear. It not only suppresses the "No Data to Fetch..."
message, but any prompts and so forth are also suppressed. It even turns off the hourglass cursor, so it can be
confusing to the user.

Code:
Private Sub Document_BeforeRefresh(Cancel As Boolean)
Application.Interactive = False
End Sub

Private Sub Document_AfterRefresh()


Application.Interactive = True
End Sub

Note that this code is executed only when a full refresh is performed. If you run queries individually (from the
query panel or Data Manager) the above events are not triggered.

By creating a union query...


One trick used to get around this problem is to create a class of "report objects" in the universe consisting of
blanks and zeroes not attached to any table. Also create at least one of these objects that references a dummy
table such as SYSDUMMY1 in DB2 (v5 and higher) or DUAL in Oracle. The objects that don't reference a
table will not parse in Designer, but they work fine as long as at least one object in the query does reference a
table.

You can then take a report where you don't want to see the "No data to fetch" message and create a union query
using the blanks, zeroes and the object referencing the dummy table. This will guarantee that at least one row
will be returned by the query. The zeroes added to numeric columns will not influence the result. Create a report
filter to hide the union row. This technique can be used for long-running reports that contain multiple data
providers where processing should not stop if one of the queries does not return data.

Using a dummy table and contexts...

The way to get the No Data to Fetch message to disappear is to put a dummy table in your database with a
single row with a single column with a value of 1 or use a system table such as Oracle's dual table. In your
universe, add your dummy table as a class with a single object. Put a self-join on the dummy table. In the object
definition put in the where clause that the column equals 1, so that the value will always be found by the sql. Put
the self join in a separate context. It should be the only join in the context. Do not include the join in any of your
other contexts.

Include the dummy object in your result set in your dataprovider when you don't want the No Data to Fetch
message to appear. The dummy object in its own context will cause B/O to create two datacubes for the query
because two different contexts are used. Because of the self-join always being true you will always get some
result. Just hide or delete the dummy column in your report.

Displaying a friendly user message if no rows are returned...


If you simply wish to display a friendly message on the report when no rows are retrieved, check here for one
method.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Tue Jan 06, 2004 7:32 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic
Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Tue Jun 17, 2003 7:48 pm


Post subject: Re: FAQ: Reporter

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Why do I get a Syntax Error (DMB0007) when I try to Sum(<Sales>) Where (<Year> > 2000)?

The syntax of WHERE Clause is:


measure Where (dimension = (number or character string or date, dimension = ...))

This means that the WHERE Clause in Business Objects Reporter only allows the "=" operator, and the right
side of the equation has to be a constant as well (and not another report variable etc.).

For example:
Code:
Sum(<Sales>) Where (<Year> = 2000)

will work

Work around for original problem:


Create another local report variable "VAR Flag Is Year greater than 2000" defined as:
Code:
= (<Year> > 2000)

This will be a boolean variable returning 1 or 0.


Make sure that the universe object <Year> is of Data Type Number.

Now modify your original formula to use:


Code:
Sum(<Sales>) Where (<VAR Flag Is Year greater than 2000> = 1)

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Tue Jan 06, 2004 7:32 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Nick Daniels
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 15 Aug 2002

Posts: 5185
Location: England
Posted: Mon Jun 09, 2003 1:33 pm
Post subject: Re: Disappearing Windows

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Is it possible to make a copy of a data provider in the same or in a new document?

The current versions of BusinessObjects (up to and including version 6.0.0) do not include this functionality.
However, we do have some code on this site which will allow you to achieve this. See here for details.

What about 6.1.x?

In 6.1a (or later) if you already have 1 data provider and want to create a similar second data provider then you
can do the following: Go to Data > New Data Provider in the menu. Then on the options displayed select "Use
an existing query to build a new one". A list showing all the available data providers is displayed. You can select
the one which you want and click OK and a similar new data provider is created.
_________________
cheers, Nick

Back to top

Nick Daniels
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 15 Aug 2002

Posts: 5185
Location: England

Posted: Fri Jun 06, 2003 5:28 am


Post subject: Disappearing Windows

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Help, my Slice and Dice panel or my Query panel has disappeared.

Press <ALT> and space. This displays the standard windows menu. Now select Maxsimize and the appropriate
window should now be displayed.

If you are using Citrix you may need to edit the registry in order to alleviate the problem. The appropriate key to
delete is:

HKEY_USER\Software\Business Objects\BusinessObjects\5.0\"UserName"

where "UserName" is the BusinessObjects login of the user encountering the problem.
_________________
cheers, Nick

Back to top

Anita Craig
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 17 Jun 2002

Posts: 5599
Location: Palo Alto, California, U.S. of A.

Posted: Tue May 06, 2003 3:12 pm


Post subject: Re: Converting Excel Content to Text

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I import data from Excel and keep the numbers numeric?

Submitted by Dave Rathbun. If you work with reports that include data from Excel, there is a common problem
where numeric data that should be treated as character data is imported as numeric. If it comes in with the
wrong type, it may be a problem for aggregation, linking, or other variables. So I wrote the following really
quick macro that can be used in any Excel sheet to convert a numeric value to a text formula.

Code:
Sub Set2Text()

ActiveCell.Select
While Not (IsEmpty(ActiveCell))
ActiveCell.FormulaR1C1 = "=" & """" & ActiveCell.Value & """"
ActiveCell.Offset(1, 0).Select
Wend

End Sub

Simply enter this macro in your worksheet, highlight the first cell, and run the macro. It will go down the
column until it reaches a blank cell replacing 1234 with ="1234". This data will be recognized as character data
when the Excel data is imported into BusinessObjects.

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Submitted by Brie Anne Clark :

I wrote a macro much like yours a while ago, but mine just adds an apostrophe to the beginning of the cell value
to convert it to text.

Code:
Sub AddSymbol()
Do Until ActiveCell.Formula = ""
ActiveCell.FormulaR1C1 = "'" & ActiveCell.FormulaR1C1
ActiveCell.Offset(1, 0).Select
Loop
End Sub

---------------------------------------------------------------------------

Submitted by Dwayne Hoffpauir on 3/17/04:

This is the method that I use for Excel personal data providers, and at the risk of jinxing myself, it never fails:
Instead of using a "live" Excel file to build the data provider, create a sample file. Same column headings, but
use dummy data.

Put alpha characters in the columns you want to be alpha, numerics in numeric, and so forth. Maybe 20 rows,
but every row the same. It's usually columns that have ambiguous data (could be alpha, could be numeric) that
confuse BusObj.

After creating the data provider, you can now put "live" data in the Excel file, and the definitions will "stick"
from now on.

How do I get rid of or change the message 'No Data To Fetch'?

The VBA code below refreshes the report and supresses all messages from the application, including 'No Data
To Fetch'...

Code:

Dim DP As DataProvider

Private Sub Document_BeforeRefresh(Cancel As Boolean)


Set DP = ActiveDocument.DataProviders(1)
Application.Interactive = False
DP.Refresh
Application.Interactive = True
End Sub

Here is a report level solution from Andreas for supressing the message...

Andreas wrote:
For each data provider create a union query, make sure that the second query from the Union returns one row -
this will prevent the message "No data to fetch".

In your reports you would have to filter out these additional rows.
Another report level solution doesn't supress the message box but provides a user note on the report...
_________________
Cindy Clayton Image link
Ask WHY until you understand! Search is Your Friend or I'm your enemy

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sat Apr 12, 2003 4:24 pm


Post subject: 9 ways to get data to Excel...

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What are the available methods and their associated advantages/disadvantages to get BO data/tables/graphs into
an Excel sheet ?

1. In BO: Edit-> CopyAll ; in Excel: Paste Special -> text


Advantage: retains sections, filters, groupings, formula/variable results
Disadvantage: Colours are lost, no export of graphs
2. In Bo Data -> View Data -> Results tab: Export -> File Format: MSExcel
Advantage: directly creates an excel file, exports whole datacube
Disadvantage: loses all formatting and calculations
3. In BO: Save As .txt ; In Excel: Open created .txt file;
Advantage: retains formatting (sections, filters, groupings) and formula/variable results.
Disadvantage: loses colours and graphs, two-step procedure, need to re-do for each report in the BO document
4. In BO: Save As HTML; In Excel: Open created HTML file;
Advantage: only mehtod that retains all formatting and calculations incl. graphs, saves all reports in the BO
document in one step;
Disadvantage: two-step procedure; creates the HTML files in a sub-folder structure
5. In BO: click exactly on border of a table -> Copy; in Excel: Paste;
Outcome: pastes static image file of that particular table into Excel / Powerpoint etc.
6. In BO: Edit -> CopyAll; In Excel: Paste Special ->Picteue (Enhanced Metafile).
Outcome: Copies the whole report as picture into Excel / Powerpoint etc.
7. In BO: use the available BO_VBA methods DP.ConvertTo() or Report.ExportAs() - for Advanced Users
8. Use the 'Copy to DDE' option (Data-> View Data -> results Tab -> Export; in Excel: Paste Special -> Paste
Link)) to dynamically update the datacube results in Excel
9. Embed a BO report by calling it in Excel via Insert-> Object -> Create from File (Mark Option 'Link to file');
Disadv.: not very reliable
_________________
Cindy Clayton Image link
Ask WHY until you understand! Search is Your Friend or I'm your enemy

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Thu Jul 31, 2003 10:02 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sat Apr 12, 2003 4:18 pm


Post subject: Troubleshooting Unhandled Exception Errors

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

The Unhandled Exception Error (C0000000005) is caused by a number of different things. It seems to be a
kind of catch all for those errors that BO doesn't have a more specific error message for. You can upgrade to
higher service packs to get this message less often but it still occurs even within 5.1.5. Here are a number of
causes and potential resolutions.

1. Part of the Business Objects NT profile becoming corrupt.


Remove the following registry key:

Go to registry key HKEY_CURRENT_SOFTWARE/Software/Business


Objects/BusinessObjects/5.0/USERNAME User Prefs

Something under here becomes corrupt. This can happen in many circumstances, but in particular where a low
spec machine (e.g. 64Mb - this should ring alarm bells) is trying to open a 'large' report - sometimes as little as a
couple of Mb. When USERNAME signs on to BO again, the key is recreated with the correct values.

2. Refreshing a report.
In fact, the refreshing completes and you see the message 'Disconnecting...'. This is BO, signing out from the
database which it has been getting data from - normally you wouldn't see this unless BO is going slow. The fact
that you see this, then get the bug is again a PC resource problem. Try it on a faster better specified machine to
prove this.

Tidy up the report, remove unused variables, formulas as well as objects from the different queries. Encourage
the user to purge the report, so when they pick it up next time the PC doesn't use much resource opening it.
Sound them out on scheduling the report and getting the final result sent to them.

3. Importing universes
Another reason for C0000005 is a bug specific to the version of BO we have, 5.1.2. This is the problem with
importing universes. Basically, each changed version of the universe has a counter which is incremented each
time you save and export. Something goes wrong with this counter so BO is not happy to get the new universe.
Mostly this is solved by deleting the existing universe from the C:\ drive and then forcing and import. There is a
fix (which I have never got to work) which is to import and export twice. Don't forget about Tools/Universe -
you can try and force an import from here. This was supposed to be fixed in 5.1.3.

4. An old or corrupt dll


If you look at the information given when you get the unhandled exception error there is a bit of hex and
references to a bunch of dlls. Occasionally, one of those dlls is a duff version - try tracking that down. Also,
could have problems with duplicate version of dlls, same file, e.g. ociw32.dll in more than one directory.

5. Missing default printer


Sometimes the absence of any default print driver can lead to this error (at least up to ver 5.1.7), when Business
Objects is rendering some graphics. As a remedy install a regular printer as your default printer (even if you do
not have any physical printer).

6. Miscellaneous resolutions
Try a full reinstallation of BO. i.e. deinstall, make sure no trace of files, folders and registry entries before
reinstalling. Reduce the graphics acceleration level via control panel - not a problem on this site, but worth
knowing about.

Check out this thread as well.


_________________
Cindy Clayton Image link
Ask WHY until you understand! Search is Your Friend or I'm your enemy

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sat Apr 12, 2003 4:04 pm


Post subject: Two data providers, show only data common to both...

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I make a table from two data providers and only show data common to both?

Once they are linked, each object of linked data providers contains ALL of the values from BOTH queries. If
you want to isolate the display to show only records that are in both queries, you need to filter for non-null
values from some other non-linked value.

For example, assume you have measure M1 from query 1, and measure M2 from query 2. Measures work the
best, but detail object can be used also. You need to create a custom filter (not a pick list) using the following
steps.
1. Click on M1
2. Click on Format + Filters from the menu. Do NOT use the filter toolbar button.
3. Click on Add, and select M1
4. Click Define, and enter the following expression:

= Not (IsNull(<M1>))

Repeat for measure M2. Now you will only see rows that have entries from both queries.
_________________
Cindy Clayton Image link
Ask WHY until you understand! Search is Your Friend or I'm your enemy

Back to top

Bob
Site Administrator

Joined: 06 Jun 2002

Posts: 829
Location: I Live Here

Posted: Thu Dec 19, 2002 9:18 am


Post subject: Issue creating User Defined Objects for a universe?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

I can't create user defined objects for a particular universe. I can create them for other universes, so it's not a
permission thing. Any idea what's happening?

Sure! BusinessObjects keeps all of the user defined objects (UDO's) in a particular file. This file has the same
name as the short name for the universe, with the file type of UDO. For example, the short name (file name) for
Island Resorts Marketing is BEACH.UNV. There will be a file named BEACH.UDO that contains the UDO's
for that universe.

However, sometimes - generally when the first UDO is being created - BusinessObjects has a problem
accessing that file. If you check and see if there is a zero-byte file for your UDO's for that universe, you should
delete it. Once you've done that, you will generally be able to go back into BusinessObjects and create User
Defined Objects for that universe.

This never seems to be a problem except for the very first object. Once that first object has been created, you'll
never have a zero-byte file from that point forward.

Back to top

Eileen King
Forum Addict

Joined: 10 Jul 2002

Posts: 4510
Location: Cleveland or Chicago...

Posted: Tue Sep 03, 2002 7:05 am


Post subject: How can I send a report from one user to another?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I send a report from Business Objects to another Business Objects User?

1. Open Business Objects.


2. Open your report in Business Objects.
3. While you are in Business Objects, Click on File...Send To...Users. This will bring up a Send box.
4. Click on the To button under Send To. This will bring up a list of Business Objects users and groups. The
groups are presented first and then the individual users.
5. Click on the list.
6. If you type a "B" that will take you down the list to the first "b" which is the Bob group.
7. Using the scroll bar on the right side, you can move down the list of users. I am Bob.
8. Double click on "Bob" and that will add me to the Document Recipients.
9. Click "OK". This will take you back to the Send box.
10. Click "OK" on the Send box.
11. The computer will think for a second and then a box will pop up saying "Export was successful".
12. Click "OK".
13. You'll be back in Business Objects with your report. You can then close Business Objects.

Back to top

Eileen King
Forum Addict

Joined: 10 Jul 2002

Posts: 4510
Location: Cleveland or Chicago...

Posted: Tue Aug 20, 2002 9:09 am


Post subject: What could cause my data to be hidden?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Why can't I see all of the data returned by the cube in my report?

Business Objects seems to be hiding data. I get 9 rows in the cube, but only 3 rows show up on the report. What
would cause this?

There are a couple of reasons why you may not be seeing all the data in your cube within your report.

One possibility is that the data is being filtered. You can check to see whether any filters are excluding rows.

1. Click on the block so that it is highlighted.


2. From the Business Objects Format Menu, select Filters.
3. The Filters On dialog box displays the global and block-specific filters applied to the report.
4. If you have no filters applied, nothing will appear in the Folders. The global folder will display any filters that
have been applied to the all blocks. The block-specific folder is named based on the block name and will
display any filters that have been applied to that block.
5. The Values dialog box displays the values available for the variable. The highlighted values are those
included in the filter. Any that are not highlighted will be filtered out.
6. If you want to remove a filter, click on the filter and then click on Remove.

BusinessObjects, by default, shows only unique rows of data. If the values in your block would result in the
same row being displayed more than once it will only show that row once. However, you can force the block to
display duplicate rows.

1. Click on the block so that it is highlighted.


2. From the Business Objects Format Menu, select Format Table.
3. The Table Format dialog box will be displayed. Click on the General tab.
4. Under the Display box is the option "Avoid Duplicate Rows Aggregation". If you check this box, all rows
will be displayed without aggregating. (This option is not available for a crosstab).

Back to top

Eileen King
Forum Addict

Joined: 10 Jul 2002

Posts: 4510
Location: Cleveland or Chicago...

Posted: Tue Aug 20, 2002 6:39 am


Post subject: How can I position report blocks relative to each other?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

How can I link or "attach" report blocks so that they are positioned in relation to the each other?

This process will allow you to position the report blocks relative to other report blocks.
1. From the Business Objects Report screen, double-click on the edge of the block you want to position. This
will bring up the block format window where you can set Formats for tables in your report. Click on the
Appearances tab. Alternate method: click on the block, and select Format + Block (Table, Crosstab, or Chart
depending on the block type selected).
2. You will see the Position screen. Horizontal or vertical position allows you to set the table's position relative
to the margins, upper section, another table, or center across the page (called markers). The space between the
marker and the table is relative to the upper left corner of the selected table.
3. To move the table to the left and right, use the Horizontal Position Relative to option. To table up and down,
use the Vertical Position Relative to option.
4. You can enter a number (positive or negative) to set the horizontal space between the marker and the table.
You can also enter a number to set the vertical position between the marker and the table.

Back to top

Eileen King
Forum Addict

Joined: 10 Jul 2002

Posts: 4510
Location: Cleveland or Chicago...

Posted: Tue Aug 20, 2002 6:32 am


Post subject: How can I Save/Export to Excel?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Saving / Exporting to MS Excel

There are several ways to get Business Objects data into Excel. Which method works best probably depends on
what you want to do with it once you get it there!

Copy and paste a Table from Business Objects to Excel

This will allow you to take a Business Objects Table into Excel. This keeps the data as displayed (objects,
variables, filters, etc.) and will bring the data as it appears in Business Objects into Excel. It will not preserve
formatting or formulas from Business Objects.

1. From the Business Objects Edit Menu, select Copy All. This will paste your data to the clipboard. Depending
on how large your Business Objects Table is, this can take a while!
2. Open Excel.
3. To maintain text attributes in Excel (such as keeping leading zeros) select the columns that you want to be
treated as text. With the columns selected in Excel choose Format Cells Text.
4. From the Excel Edit Menu, select Paste Special.
5. Choose Text and click OK.

Export a Data Provider from Business Objects to Excel


This process will allow you to take the raw data from a Business Objects data provider and put it into Excel.

1. From the Business Objects Data Menu, select View Data. This will bring up the Data Manager window where
you can see the Data Providers for your report.
2. Click on the Data Provider you want to export.
3. Make sure the Results Tab is highlighted. There will be buttons on the bottom which include Options,
Refresh, Purge, and Export.
4. Click on Export.
5. The Export to External Format screen will appear. Make sure Export to Local File Format is highlighted.
6. Specify the name and path of the file where you want your data to be stored in Name. You can use the
Browse button to locate the path.
7. Specify the format of the file where you want your data to be stored in Format. On the pull down menu,
choose Microsoft Excel Files (*.xls).
8. If you choose the option Delete Spaces it will delete the spaces before and after the delimiters that separate
the columns of data.

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Sun Aug 18, 2002 6:39 pm


Post subject: What does "Some obsolete objects have been removed...&q

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

What does "Some obsolete objects have been removed..." mean?

This message means that one or more of the objects used in your report are no longer available in the universe.
A Designer may have deleted them. Deleting objects is generally a bad idea. Hiding them removes them from
use in future reports but preserves them in current ones.

Another possible reason for this error is that a previously linked universe has now been 'included' instead.
Objects from the kernel universe will report this error. Evidently the inclusion process assigns new ids to objects
from the kernel universe. One way to work around this error is to provide both the original linked version and
an included version of the universe in the repository simultaneously. Users can then use the ... button in the Data
Manager to point the report to the included universe using class and object names rather than ids.

There are a couple of ways to determine which objects are being removed from your query. Use the
DataProviderSql function to display the sql BEFORE accessing the query panel. Compare this sql to what is
written AFTER the message appears. Another method is to use the Data Manager to see a list of query objects.
Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Tue Aug 13, 2002 10:33 am


Post subject: What does 'You are not authorized to use this document' mean

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Explain "You are not authorized to use this document"

The most common reason for this is that the document was - at one point - exported to the repository. Then it
was deleted. At that point, it is a "secured" document (since it was exported) and yet there is no record of who
has access to it (since it's missing from the repository). Thus you, even as the owner, do not have the authority
to access the document. A General Supervisor can open the document and save it for all users to remove the
security information and allow access to anyone.

Another reason why this error can occur is if you totally delete your repository. This will cause this error even if
the document was never exported. If you have a document that was created while you were logged in, and then
you send it to someone that does not have a repository (and therefore cannot log in), they get the same message.

More information on this message is available here.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Tue Jan 07, 2003 11:16 am, edited 2 times in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Tue Aug 13, 2002 10:30 am


Post subject: Why are my prompts out of order?
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Why don't my prompts come out in the order I want them to? Any workarounds?

Report prompts appear alphabetically. Try beginning your prompt text with 1, 2, 3, etc. to force them into
logical order. Using a period to begin a prompt is a good, virtually hidden method of forcing a particular prompt
to the top of the list.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Fri Aug 16, 2002 9:07 am, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Cindy Clayton
Forum Fanatic

Joined: 11 Jun 2002

Posts: 5559
Location: On sabbatical...

Posted: Tue Aug 13, 2002 10:28 am


Post subject: What does 'Variables are not compatible' mean?

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Why is BusinessObjects telling me that my 'variables are not compatible?

A "combined block" that contains data from more than one data provider can only have objects that meet one of
the following criteria:
1. A dimension object that is linked
2. A detail object associated with a linked dimension object
3. Any measure object
4. Any additional dimension object (unlinked) from a single (one only) data provider
You may not include:

1. Unlinked dimensions from two (or more) data providers


2. Detail objects that are not associated with a valid dimension object that can be used
Note that measure objects are always allowed, but may or may not provide the proper value based on the linked
(or lack of of linked) dimensions.

Last edited by Cindy Clayton on Sat Sep 14, 2002 4:13 pm, edited 1 time in total

Back to top

Bob
Site Administrator
Joined: 06 Jun 2002

Posts: 829
Location: I Live Here

Posted: Wed Jul 24, 2002 9:14 am


Post subject: FAQ: Reporter

--------------------------------------------------------------------------------

Reporter FAQ
Why is BusinessObjects telling me that my 'variables are not compatible?

Why don't my prompts come out in the order I want them to? Any workarounds?

Explain "You are not authorized to use this document"

What does "Some obsolete objects have been removed..." mean?

Saving / Exporting to MS Excel

Converting Excel Content to Text

How can I link or "attach" report blocks so that they are positioned in relation to the each other?

Why can't I see all of the data returned by the cube in my report?

How can I send a report from Business Objects to another Business Objects User?

Why can't I create user defined objects (UDO's) for a particular universe? I can for other universes...

How can I make a table from two data providers and only show data common to both?

How do I migrate documents between repositories?

Troubleshooting Unhandled Exception Error C00..5

9 Methods of getting BO data into Excel w/pros and cons

How can I import data from Excel and keep the numbers numeric?

My Query Panel or Slice and Dice Panel are not showing

How can I change or rid myself of the 'No data to fetch' message?

How can I make an object that selects the current date?

What is synchronization?
How and when can I point a data provider from one universe to another?

How can I sequentially number the pages of a report across all report tabs?

Why do I get an error when I try to Sum(<Sales>) Where (<Year> > 2000)?

Is it possible to make a copy of a data provider in the same or in a new document?

How can I calculate the number of hours between two dates?

I lost my work because of a power outage. Is there any way to retrieve my 'corrupt' report?

What is the difference between Full-Client Reporter and ZABO (Zero-Admin BusinessObjects)?

How can I include data for all months in a crosstab, even if a particular month has no data?

Why is my report so slow?